Tekla Structure System_Tutorial

Tekla Structures System Manual

Product version 14.0 April 2008

© 2008 Tekla Corporation

www.cadfamily.com

EMail:[email protected]

The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

© 2008 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved. This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law. Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a thirdparty product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated. Portions of this software: D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved. XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved. DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved. FLEXnet Copyright © 2006 Macrovision Corporation and/or Macrovision Europe Ltd. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary and confidential technology provided by and owned by Macrovision Europe Ltd., UK, and Macrovision Corporation of Santa Clara, California, U.S.A. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Macrovision Europe Ltd. and Macrovision Corporation is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by Macrovision Europe Ltd. and Macrovision Corporation in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any of Macrovision Europe Ltd. and Macrovision Corporation’s intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise. Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries.

www.cadfamily.com



Contents Preface .............................................................................................................37 Audience ........................................................................................................................................................... 37 Additional help resources .................................................................................................................................. 37 Conventions used in this guide ......................................................................................................................... 38 Related guides .................................................................................................................................................. 39

1

Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 41 1.1

General ................................................................................................................................................. 41 Firm and project folders ................................................................................................................... Numbering series ............................................................................................................................. Phases ............................................................................................................................................. Catalogs ........................................................................................................................................... Preferences...................................................................................................................................... Profile names ............................................................................................................................ Connections .............................................................................................................................. Edge distance ............................................................................................................................ Recording and running macros ........................................................................................................ Warning messages ..........................................................................................................................

1.2

Modeling ............................................................................................................................................... 45 Automating the detailing process ..................................................................................................... Predefining part properties............................................................................................................... Using predefined properties ...................................................................................................... Modeling tools.................................................................................................................................. AutoDefaults..................................................................................................................................... AutoConnection................................................................................................................................

1.3

45 46 46 46 47 47

Drawings and printers........................................................................................................................... 47 Drawing properties ........................................................................................................................... Layouts and templates ..................................................................................................................... Reports and symbols ....................................................................................................................... Selection filters................................................................................................................................. Wizards ............................................................................................................................................ Defining print devices.......................................................................................................................

1.4

42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 44 45

48 48 48 48 48 48

Autosave............................................................................................................................................... 48 Setting Autosave interval ................................................................................................................. 49

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

www.cadfamily.com



3

Autosave file location ....................................................................................................................... Keeping Autosave files..................................................................................................................... Usernames ....................................................................................................................................... Application error ............................................................................................................................... Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. ................................................................................... 1.5

Customizing the interface...................................................................................................................... 51 Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................... Managing toolbars ..................................................................................................................... Icons .......................................................................................................................................... Creating a user-defined toolbar........................................................................................................ Creating a user-defined menu.......................................................................................................... Defining shortcuts.............................................................................................................................

1.6

54 54 55 55

Multi-user mode....................................................................................... 57 2.1

Multi-user mode .................................................................................................................................... 57 When to use multi-user mode .......................................................................................................... Switching between single-user and multi-user modes ............................................................... Overview of the multi-user system ................................................................................................... The Tekla Structures server ..................................................................................................... How multi-user works ....................................................................................................................... Locking ...................................................................................................................................... Setting up the multi-user system ...................................................................................................... Saving in multi-user mode................................................................................................................ Save ........................................................................................................................................... Autosave .................................................................................................................................... Saving model revision comments..................................................................................................... Shutting down the model.................................................................................................................. Copying multi-user models............................................................................................................... Displaying active multi-users............................................................................................................ Clearing locks................................................................................................................................... Error messages ................................................................................................................................ Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... Server computer ........................................................................................................................ Client computer .......................................................................................................................... Network ...................................................................................................................................... Model dump ...............................................................................................................................

2.2 4

51 51 52 52 53 53

Optimizing system performance............................................................................................................ 54 Virtual memory ................................................................................................................................. Display adaptor ................................................................................................................................ Solid buffer size................................................................................................................................ How Tekla Structures handles solids ...............................................................................................

2

49 50 50 50 50

58 58 59 59 60 60 61 62 62 62 63 64 64 64 65 65 66 66 66 67 67

Modeling in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................. 67


www.cadfamily.com



Working with a master model........................................................................................................... 67 Numbering setup.............................................................................................................................. 71 Numbering – specific cases ............................................................................................................. 72 2.3

Drawings in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................ 73 About drawing files........................................................................................................................... 73 Guidelines for multi-user drawings................................................................................................... 73 Locks for drawings ........................................................................................................................... 74

2.4

Maintenance procedures ...................................................................................................................... 74 Checking multi-user databases........................................................................................................ 75 Deleting unnecessary dg files .......................................................................................................... 75

2.5

Access rights ........................................................................................................................................ 75 Locking objects ................................................................................................................................ Controlling access to attributes ........................................................................................................ Restricting access to model ............................................................................................................. Controlling access to numbering setup ............................................................................................

3

76 76 77 78

Files and Folders ..................................................................................... 79 3.1

Initialization files.................................................................................................................................... 79 About variables ................................................................................................................................ Setting variables ........................................................................................................................ Using the Advanced Options dialog box ................................................................................... Editing the user.ini file ............................................................................................................... Disabling variables in an initialization file .................................................................................. Structure........................................................................................................................................... Initialization file reading order .................................................................................................... Creating customized initialization files ....................................................................................... Including other initialization files ................................................................................................ Creating shortcuts ............................................................................................................................

3.2

File types and function.......................................................................................................................... 85 Input files.......................................................................................................................................... Component description files ...................................................................................................... Data files .......................................................................................................................................... Data files and modeling tools .................................................................................................... DSTV connection properties ............................................................................................................ Messages......................................................................................................................................... Profiles ............................................................................................................................................. inp (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................. cnv (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................ lis (ASCII) .................................................................................................................................. Binary files ................................................................................................................................. Bin ....................................................................................................................................................


www.cadfamily.com

80 80 80 80 81 81 82 83 83 83



85 86 86 87 89 89 90 90 90 90 90 91

5

Fonts ................................................................................................................................................ Symbols............................................................................................................................................ System ............................................................................................................................................. rpt ............................................................................................................................................... tpl ............................................................................................................................................... lay .............................................................................................................................................. plotdev.bin ................................................................................................................................. Wizard files (dproc) .................................................................................................................... 3.3

Folders .................................................................................................................................................. 92 Folder structure ................................................................................................................................ Folder search order .......................................................................................................................... Model folder...................................................................................................................................... Saved attributes ......................................................................................................................... System folder ................................................................................................................................... Project and firm folders .................................................................................................................... Project folder .............................................................................................................................. Firm folder .................................................................................................................................. Template folder ................................................................................................................................

3.4

91 91 92 92 92 92 92 92 93 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 97

Customizing Tekla Structures ............................................................................................................... 98 Adding properties ............................................................................................................................. 98 Changing user-defined fields ..................................................................................................... 99 User-defined fields in templates .............................................................................................. 100 Effect on numbering ................................................................................................................. 101 Interpreting objects.inp ................................................................................................................... 101 Fields in objects.inp ................................................................................................................. 102 Customizing message files............................................................................................................. 102 Changing the language of the user interface ................................................................................. 103 Customizing parametric profiles ..................................................................................................... 104 Interpreting profitab.inp ............................................................................................................ 104 Save defaults.................................................................................................................................. 105 Creating standard files ............................................................................................................. 106 Customizing other files ............................................................................................................ 106 Creating AutoDrawings wizard files................................................................................................ 106 Unfolding parameters ..................................................................................................................... 107 Using flat bars ................................................................................................................................ 108 Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp .................................................................................... 109 Using market sizes ......................................................................................................................... 109 Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat ............................................................................... 110 Example ................................................................................................................................... 110

3.5

Log files............................................................................................................................................... 110 Tekla Structures log files ................................................................................................................ 110 Numbering history log .................................................................................................................... 111

6


www.cadfamily.com



Interpreting numbering.history ................................................................................................. Overlapping part/assembly series ........................................................................................... Drawing history log......................................................................................................................... AutoDrawings Wizard log............................................................................................................... Viewing log files ............................................................................................................................. Direct access to parts from log files ............................................................................................... Access part pop-up menu .......................................................................................................

4

112 113 113 113 114 114 114

Catalogs ................................................................................................. 115 4.1

Things you should know ..................................................................................................................... 115 Open a model first.......................................................................................................................... The filter ......................................................................................................................................... Saving a modified catalog .............................................................................................................. What is the difference between Update and OK? ..........................................................................

4.2

The profile catalog .............................................................................................................................. 117 Working with rules.......................................................................................................................... Defining the material of profiles ............................................................................................... Adding a rule ........................................................................................................................... Adding a next level rule ........................................................................................................... Editing a rule ........................................................................................................................... Organizing rules ...................................................................................................................... Deleting a rule ......................................................................................................................... Viewing or modifying the profile catalog......................................................................................... Adding a profile .............................................................................................................................. Copy an existing profile ........................................................................................................... Creating a new standard profile .............................................................................................. Creating a cross section................................................................................................................. Cross section with no inner contours ....................................................................................... Cross section with inner contours ............................................................................................ Modifying a cross section............................................................................................................... Different types of chamfer ....................................................................................................... Deleting a cross section ................................................................................................................. Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile ............................................................................... Adding user-defined attributes to a profile ..................................................................................... Merging profile catalogs ................................................................................................................. Exporting the profile catalog........................................................................................................... Exporting elements from the profile catalog................................................................................... Importing from previous versions ................................................................................................... Importing the profile catalog........................................................................................................... What happens to existing profiles? ......................................................................................... User-defined fixed cross section definitions ............................................................................ User-defined attributes ............................................................................................................


www.cadfamily.com

116 116 116 117



118 119 121 121 121 121 121 122 122 122 123 123 123 123 124 124 125 125 127 128 128 128 129 129 129 130 130

7

4.3

The material catalog............................................................................................................................ 130 Viewing or modifying the material catalog...................................................................................... Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade ....................................................................... Units of measure ...................................................................................................................... Adding a material type.................................................................................................................... Adding a new material grade.......................................................................................................... Deleting a material grade ............................................................................................................... Defining your own symbols for materials........................................................................................ Export and import ...........................................................................................................................

4.4

The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs................................................................................................... 134 Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog............................................................................................. Saving a modified bolt catalog ....................................................................................................... Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies ............................................................................................ Creating studs ................................................................................................................................ Merging bolt catalogs ..................................................................................................................... Exporting the bolt catalog............................................................................................................... Importing the bolt catalog ............................................................................................................... Upgrading to a new version .....................................................................................................

The reinforcing bar catalog ................................................................................................................. 142

4.6

For the advanced user ........................................................................................................................ 143 143 144 144 145 146

AutoConnection .................................................................................... 151 5.1

AutoConnection setup......................................................................................................................... 151 AutoConnection setup .................................................................................................................... AutoConnection rule groups........................................................................................................... AutoConnection rule sets ............................................................................................................... Rules.zxt ........................................................................................................................................ Changing a connection...................................................................................................................

5.2

152 153 153 155 155

AutoDefaults setup.............................................................................................................................. 155 AutoDefaults setup ......................................................................................................................... Connection properties files............................................................................................................. Saving connection properties .................................................................................................. Access to properties files ......................................................................................................... Defaults.zxt..................................................................................................................................... Priority of rule sets.......................................................................................................................... Editing connection properties .........................................................................................................

8

135 137 137 139 141 141 141 141

4.5

A closer look at the export file ........................................................................................................ Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file ............................................................................................ Importing part of the bolt catalog.................................................................................................... Units used in export and import...................................................................................................... Bolt length calculation ....................................................................................................................

5

130 131 132 132 132 133 133 134


www.cadfamily.com



156 157 157 157 158 158 158

5.3

AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules............................................................................................. 159 Combining and iterating properties ................................................................................................ Limitations ............................................................................................................................... Combining properties ..................................................................................................................... Iteration with connection check ...................................................................................................... Reaction forces and UDL ...............................................................................................................

6

161 162 162 163 165

CNC......................................................................................................... 167 6.1

NC files ............................................................................................................................................... 167 Setting up NC files ......................................................................................................................... Defining destination machines for parts ......................................................................................... Defining selection criteria ............................................................................................................... Maximum size ......................................................................................................................... Profile type .............................................................................................................................. Maximum size of holes ............................................................................................................ Defining hole properties ................................................................................................................. Creating NC files ............................................................................................................................ Defining the output format and folder.............................................................................................

6.2

168 170 170 171 171 172 172 172 173

DSTV .................................................................................................................................................. 174 Fittings affect NC data.................................................................................................................... 174

6.3

DXF..................................................................................................................................................... 175 Converting DSTV files to DXF ....................................................................................................... 176

6.4

Peddimat............................................................................................................................................. 176 Creating NC files in Peddimat format............................................................................................. 176 Output formats for Peddimat .......................................................................................................... 177 Defining Peddimat standard tooling ............................................................................................... 177

6.5

Pop-marks ......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating pop-marks........................................................................................................................ 178 Pop-mark settings .......................................................................................................................... 179 Pop-marking options ............................................................................................................... 180

6.6

Hard stamps ....................................................................................................................................... 181 Creating hard stamps..................................................................................................................... Hard stamp properties.................................................................................................................... Information contained in hard stamps ..................................................................................... Position of hard stamps ........................................................................................................... Hard stamps for secondary parts ............................................................................................

6.7

181 181 182 182 182

Plate nesting ....................................................................................................................................... 183 Creating nesting tasks.................................................................................................................... 183 Editing nesting tasks ...................................................................................................................... 183 Task properties ........................................................................................................................ 184


www.cadfamily.com



9

Defining stocks ............................................................................................................................... Stock properties ....................................................................................................................... Nesting tasks.................................................................................................................................. Viewing nesting results...................................................................................................................

7

Import and export.................................................................................. 187 7.1

Import and export basics..................................................................................................................... 187 Using import and export ................................................................................................................. Available formats............................................................................................................................ Importing into Tekla Structures ................................................................................................ Exporting from Tekla Structures ..............................................................................................

7.2

7.3

188 188 188 190

Conversion files................................................................................................................................... 192 Converting twin profiles .................................................................................................................. Creating conversion files ................................................................................................................ Locating conversion files ................................................................................................................ Sample conversion files ................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................

192 192 193 193 193

Importing models................................................................................................................................. 194 Import tools..................................................................................................................................... Overview of importing models ........................................................................................................ Finishing the import ................................................................................................................. Re-importing a model ..................................................................................................................... Revision control options ........................................................................................................... Creating reports of import............................................................................................................... Importing DWG/DXF files ............................................................................................................... CIS import ...................................................................................................................................... CAD import..................................................................................................................................... CAD specific information ......................................................................................................... Creating log files ...................................................................................................................... CAD import file types...................................................................................................................... SDNF specific options ............................................................................................................. FEM import..................................................................................................................................... FEM specific information ......................................................................................................... FEM import file types ............................................................................................................... DSTV files ...................................................................................................................................... About DSTV ............................................................................................................................. STAAD files .................................................................................................................................... Stan 3d files.................................................................................................................................... Bus import ...................................................................................................................................... Yield stress in FEM import ............................................................................................................. Model dump import......................................................................................................................... ASCII import ...................................................................................................................................

10

184 185 185 186


www.cadfamily.com



194 195 195 197 197 198 199 199 200 200 200 200 201 202 202 202 203 203 204 204 205 205 206 206

ASCII format description ................................................................................................................ Attribute import............................................................................................................................... About input files ....................................................................................................................... Example input file for drawings ............................................................................................... Example input file for parts ...................................................................................................... Data types file .......................................................................................................................... Steelfab import............................................................................................................................... Steelfab specific information ................................................................................................... Fabtrol XML import......................................................................................................................... S-Frame import .............................................................................................................................. About S-Frame imports ........................................................................................................... MicasPlus import............................................................................................................................ MicasPlus specific information ................................................................................................ Eureka LPM import ........................................................................................................................ Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ Import ELiPLAN status data .................................................................................................... 7.4

Exporting files ..................................................................................................................................... 219 Exporting 3D DWG/DXF ............................................................................................................... Export as ................................................................................................................................. Exporting 3D DGN ......................................................................................................................... Exporting FEM ............................................................................................................................... Combine segments (MicroSAS) .............................................................................................. STAAD .................................................................................................................................... DSTV ....................................................................................................................................... Exporting CIMsteel......................................................................................................................... Analysis model ........................................................................................................................ Manufacturing model ............................................................................................................... More CIMsteel information ...................................................................................................... Exporting CAD ............................................................................................................................... PML ......................................................................................................................................... SDNF ....................................................................................................................................... XML ......................................................................................................................................... PDMS ...................................................................................................................................... Exporting MIS................................................................................................................................. MIS types ................................................................................................................................ MIS list file ............................................................................................................................... Exporting ASCII.............................................................................................................................. Exporting IFC ................................................................................................................................. Exporting a model dump ................................................................................................................ Exporting BVBS ............................................................................................................................. Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format ................................................................................. Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box ......................................................................................... BVBS (78) specification ........................................................................................................... TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

www.cadfamily.com

206 211 212 213 214 214 215 215 215 216 216 216 216 216 216 217



219 220 221 222 222 222 223 224 224 226 227 229 230 230 232 232 233 233 234 234 234 237 238 240 240 242 11

Exporting Unitechnik ...................................................................................................................... Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format ................................................................................ Unitechnik export reference ..................................................................................................... Main ......................................................................................................................................... Unitechnik configuration .......................................................................................................... TS configuration ....................................................................................................................... Reinforcement ......................................................................................................................... Data specification .................................................................................................................... Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ Exporting ELiPLAN .................................................................................................................. 7.5

243 244 247 248 253 257 259 263 263 264

Exporting drawings.............................................................................................................................. 266 Layers............................................................................................................................................. 266 Advanced line type and layer conversion ................................................................................ 268

7.6

Reference models............................................................................................................................... 271 Using a reference model ................................................................................................................ Using several reference models..................................................................................................... Updating reference models ............................................................................................................ Handling large reference models ................................................................................................... Detecting changes in reference models ......................................................................................... Reference model objects................................................................................................................ Selecting reference models and reference model objects ....................................................... Listing reference models and reference model objects in reports ........................................... Supported DGN objects .................................................................................................................

7.7

Tekla WebViewer................................................................................................................................ 278 Publishing a model as a web page................................................................................................. Web templates ............................................................................................................................... Emailing WebViewer models.......................................................................................................... Receiving WebViewer models........................................................................................................ Sending WebViewer links............................................................................................................... Handling named views ................................................................................................................... Handling clip planes ....................................................................................................................... Hiding and showing objects............................................................................................................ Full content rendering..................................................................................................................... How to move and zoom?................................................................................................................

8

271 272 273 273 273 276 276 277 277 278 279 279 279 280 280 281 282 282 282

Variables ................................................................................................ 285 8.1

List of variables ................................................................................................................................... 285 Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box ............................................................................ 285 User variables ................................................................................................................................ 286

8.2

A......................................................................................................................................................... 289 XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM .................................................................... 289

12


www.cadfamily.com



XS_AD_CURVED_BEAMS_BY_STRAIGHT_SEGMENTS .......................................................... XS_AD_DISABLE_EDITING_BY_UDA ......................................................................................... XS_AD_ELEMENT_ANGLE_CHECK_ANGLE_DIFF_LIMIT ........................................................ XS_AD_ENABLE_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL.................................................................. XS_AD_MEMBER_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION ........................................................................... XS_AD_MEMBER_TYPE_VISUALIZATION ................................................................................. XS_AD_NODE_COLLISION_CHECK_DISTANCE ....................................................................... XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION ................................................................................ XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED............................................................................................ XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_RECURSE_CATALOG......................................................................... XS_AD_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL_LIMIT_MM............................................................... XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_DISTANCE_LIMIT.................................................................... XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_PART_ID.................................................................................. XS_AD_RESULT_DATABASE_ENABLED ................................................................................... XS_AD_SOLID_AXIAL_EXPAND_MM.......................................................................................... XS_AD_SUPPORT_VISUALIZATION ........................................................................................... XS_AD_TWIN_PROFILES_ENABLED.......................................................................................... XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS........................................................................................................ XS_AISC_WELD_MARK ............................................................................................................... XS_ALIGN_CUT_SYMBOL_BY_VERTICAL_LINE....................................................................... XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS .......................................................... XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_DIMENSIONS .............................................................................. XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_WELD_SYMBOLS ....................................................................... XS_ALLOW_SHEAR_PLATE_CLASH_FLANGE.......................................................................... XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_CLOSING_DRAWING ................................................ XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_EXIT ............................................................................ XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER ...................................................... XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER..................................................................... XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER ................................................................................ XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER .......................................................................... XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE............................................................... XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS ................. XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR .................................................................. XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING ................................... XS_APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... XS_ARC_WIDTH_OF_CLOUD ..................................................................................................... XS_ASCII_IMPORT_CREATES_CONSTRUCTION_LINES......................................................... ASCII_LEGEND_PATH ................................................................................................................. XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE................................................................................... XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ........................................ XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.............................................................. XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D....................................................................................... XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE .....................................................................


www.cadfamily.com



289 289 289 289 290 290 290 291 291 291 291 291 292 292 292 292 292 292 293 293 293 294 294 294 294 294 295 295 295 295 295 295 296 296 296 296 297 297 297 297 298 299 299

13

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING........................................................ XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE........................................................................ XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL................................................................. XS_ATTRIBUTE_FILE_EXCLUDE_LIST ..................................................................................... XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE ...................................................................................... XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL............................................................................................ XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT.......................................................................................... XS_AUTOMATIC_NEW_MODEL_NAME...................................................................................... XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SAVING_INTERVAL....................................................... XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SENDING_INTERVAL .................................................... XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY...................................................................................................... 8.3

B.......................................................................................................................................................... 301 XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 ...................................................................................................... XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2 ...................................................................................................... XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3 ...................................................................................................... XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4 ...................................................................................................... XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH ............................................................................................................... XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN............................................................................ XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT ............................................................................................................. XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X ..................................................................................................... XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y ..................................................................................................... XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH............................................................................................................... XS_BEVEL_DIMENSIONS_FOR_PROFILES_ONLY ................................................................... XSBIN............................................................................................................................................. XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND...................................................................................... XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON ..................................................................................................... XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX ....................................................................................... XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA ........................................................................ XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE........................................................................................ XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA........................................................................... XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT .................................................................... XS_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_PLANE_IN_NC .......................................................

8.4

301 302 302 302 302 303 303 303 303 303 304 304 304 304 304 305 305 305 305 305

C.......................................................................................................................................................... 306 XS_CALC_REFOBJ_PROTECT.................................................................................................... XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE .................................... XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING ........................................... XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING ........................................ XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR........................................................................................ XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR ............................................................................ XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED................................................................. XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED........................................................................... XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED ...........................................................................

14

299 299 300 300 300 300 300 300 301 301 301


www.cadfamily.com



306 306 306 307 307 307 307 307 307

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED............................................................................ XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED............................................................................ XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO.......................................................................................... XS_CHANGE_WORKAREA_WHEN_MODIFYING_VIEW_DEPTH ............................................. XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO............................................................................................. XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE........................................................................................... XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS .................................................. XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS................................................................ XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT............................................................. XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_NAME ............................................................................................. XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PASSW........................................................................................... XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PATH .............................................................................................. XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE .................................................................................................. XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES ....................................................................... XS_CLASH_CHECK_COLOR ....................................................................................................... XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY.................................................................................................... XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING................................................................................... XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY ............................................................................................... XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER................................................................................. XS_COMPLEX_PART_MEMBERS_DO_NOT_HAVE_TO_BE_MAIN_PARTS ........................... XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COLLECTION_NAME_LENGTH................................................ XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE ..................................................................... XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX.......................................................................... XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER ......................................................... XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL ................................................................................ XS_CONNECT_PLATE_PROFILES_IN_AUTOCONNECTION.................................................... XS_CONSIDER_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS_IN_HIDDEN .................................................................. XS_CONSIDER_REBAR_NAME_IN_NUMBERING ..................................................................... XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM ................................................................. XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM.............................................................. XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK............................................... XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK ................................................................ XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING................................................. XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS .............................................................................. XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS ....................................... XS_CREATE_VIEW_FROM_MODEL_OLD_WAY........................................................................ XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE ........................................................................................... XS_CURVED_AXIS_PLACE ......................................................................................................... XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT ............................................................................................................ XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS .......................................................................................... XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_USE_ATTRIBUTE_LOOPS..................................................................... 8.5

308 308 308 308 308 308 309 309 310 310 310 310 310 310 311 311 311 311 312 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 313 313 313 313 314 314 314 314 314 314 315 315 315 315 315

D ......................................................................................................................................................... 315 DAK_BMPPATH ............................................................................................................................ 315 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

www.cadfamily.com



15

XS_DEFAULT_FONT .................................................................................................................... XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE .......................................................................................................... XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DRAWINGS ............................................................................... XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS .............................................................................................. XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE........................................................................................... XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE................................................................................................. XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS ..................................................................................................... XS_DGN_EXPORT_USE_LOCAL_ID ........................................................................................... XS_DIMENSION_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY ............................................................. XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR .................................................................................. XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER................................................................... XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT ............................................................................ XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR .............................................................. XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET............................................................. XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR......................................................... XS_DIMENSION_FONT ................................................................................................................ XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS.............................................................................................. XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY...................................................... XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE ............................................................ XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER ...................................................... XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT ............................................................ XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT.......................................................... XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_COLOR ................................................................................. XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS ................................................................... XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS.................................................................. XS_DIMENSION_SKEWED_BOLTS_IN_PART_PLANE_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................... XS_DIR .......................................................................................................................................... XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS ......................................................................................... XS_DISABLE_CANCEL_DIALOG_FOR_SAVE_NUMBERING_SAVE......................................... XS_DISABLE_CIS2 ....................................................................................................................... XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS ............................................................... XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE ....................................................................................... XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH ............................................................................................. XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK ............................................................................... XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_ASSEMBLY.......................................................................... XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_GA........................................................................................ XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_MULTI .................................................................................. XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_SINGLE................................................................................ XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID ............................................................................................ XS_DISPLAY_ZERO_INCHES...................................................................................................... XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE.......................................................................... XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS ............................................................................. XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONCRETE_PARTS ........................

16


www.cadfamily.com



316 316 316 316 316 317 317 317 317 317 318 318 319 319 319 319 319 319 320 320 320 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 322 322 322 322 322 322 323 323 323 323 323 323 323 324 324

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE....................................... XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS .......................................................................................... XS_DO_NOT_DRAW_COLUMN_MARKS_AT_45_DEGREES_IN_GA_DRAWING.................... XS_DO_NOT_EXTEND_DIMENSION_LINES_THROUGH_ALL_HOLES ................................... XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES ................................................................. XS_DO_NOT_REMOVE_END_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS ........................................................ XS_DO_NOT_USE_DMPAPER_USER ........................................................................................ XS_DO_NOT_USE_FOLDED_GUSSET_PLATE ......................................................................... XS_DO_NOT_USE_GLOBAL_PLATE_SIDE................................................................................ XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES ............................................................................ XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS ................................................................. XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING....................................................... XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING ................................................... XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES.............................................................................................. XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS ............................................. XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ........................................................... XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................................................... XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES ................................................................................... XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS .................................. XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ................................................ XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ........................................ XS_DRAW_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS.......................... XS_DRAW_BOLTS_THROUGH_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS.............................................................. XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES ........................................................................... XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES ............................................................................... XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES ............................................................................................ XS_DRAW_CROSS_AXIS ............................................................................................................ XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA.......................................................................... XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA ......................................................................... XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR ......................................................................... XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA ........................................................................................ XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH ............................................................................ XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR................................................ XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE ........................................................................................ XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS ................................................... XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE...................................................................... XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.............................................................................................. XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A ......................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W ........................................................................................ XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G......................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M......................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C .........................................................................................


www.cadfamily.com



324 324 324 324 325 325 325 325 325 325 325 325 326 326 326 326 326 326 327 327 327 327 327 327 327 327 328 328 328 328 329 329 330 330 330 330 331 331 332 332 332 332 332

17

XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE .................................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_SCALE_SEPARATOR_CHAR ............................................................................. XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT.................................................................................................. XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X.......................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y.......................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH ................................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA..................................................................... XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY ...................................................................................... XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES.......................................................... XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING.................................................................................. XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT................................................... XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP........................................................ XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK ..................................................... XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM................................................ XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING............................................................................. XS_DRAW_LONG_HOLE_DIMENSIONS..................................................................................... XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS......................................................... XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS ........................................................................................... XS_DRIVER ................................................................................................................................... XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PLATES................................................................ XS_DSTV_LIST_SEPARATOR ..................................................................................................... XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH ............................................................................................................. XS_DSTV_NO_SAWING_ANGLES_FOR_PLATES_NEEDED .................................................... XS_DSTV_NUMBER_OF_PARTS_BY_SELECTION ................................................................... XS_DSTV_PLATE_PROFILE_WITH_WIDTH ............................................................................... XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH........................................................................ XS_DSTV_USE_ONE_VERTEX_SHARP_INNER_CORNER ...................................................... XS_DSTV_WRITE_BEHIND_FACE_FOR_PLATE ....................................................................... XS_DUPLICATE_CHECK_LIMIT_FOR_COPY_AND_MOVE....................................................... XS_DWG_IMPORT_IGNORE_UNITS........................................................................................... XS_DXF_FONT_NAME ................................................................................................................. XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR.............................................................................................. XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR................................................................................................ DXK_FONTPATH........................................................................................................................... DXK_SYMBOLPATH ..................................................................................................................... 8.6

E.......................................................................................................................................................... 338 EDM_LIC13_3_5............................................................................................................................ XS_ENABLE_INNER_CONTOURS_IN_CUT_PARTS.................................................................. XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL..................................... XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION ......................... XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT ................................................... XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE ................................................................................ XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME....................................................................................................

18

332 332 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 334 334 334 335 335 335 335 335 335 335 335 336 336 336 336 336 336 337 337 337 338 338 338 338 338 338


www.cadfamily.com



338 339 339 339 339 340 340

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS .......................................................................................... XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR .................................................................... XS_EXPORT_DGN_ROUND_SEGMENTS .................................................................................. XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_CLASS_AS_COLOR........................................................................... XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_VOLUMETRIC..................................................................................... XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS.................................................................................. XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH .................................................................................... 8.7

F.......................................................................................................................................................... 341 XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR................................................................................................ XS_FIRM........................................................................................................................................ XS_FLAT_PREFIX......................................................................................................................... XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE ......................................................................................... XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE................................................................................................................ XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR.............................................................................................. XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK .......................................................................

8.8

341 341 341 342 342 342 342

G ......................................................................................................................................................... 342 XS_GA_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE................................................................................................. XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING .......................................................................... XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ............................................................................... XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE .................................................................................................. XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ............................................................................................... XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE ......................................................................................... XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH.............................................................................. XS_GRID_COLOR......................................................................................................................... XS_GRID_PLANES_VISIBLE_WITH_USERPLANES .................................................................. XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT ................................................................................................................

8.9

340 340 340 340 340 341 341

342 342 343 343 343 343 343 343 344 344

H ......................................................................................................................................................... 344 XS_HANDLE_SCALE .................................................................................................................... XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK .......................................................................... XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE...................................................................................... XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R ............................................................................................... XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G ............................................................................................... XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B................................................................................................ XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE................................................................................ XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ...................................................................................... XS_HIDDEN_REMOVE_DOUBLE_LINES.................................................................................... XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES.............................................................................................. XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES......................................................... XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES ......................................................................... XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ....................................................................................... XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ..........................................................................

344 345 345 345 345 345 346 346 346 346 346 346 347 347

8.10 I........................................................................................................................................................... 347


www.cadfamily.com



19

XS_IGNORE_SUBASSEMBLY_HIERARCHY_IN_DIMENSIONING ............................................ XS_IMPERIAL................................................................................................................................ XS_IMPERIAL_BOLT_MARK ........................................................................................................ XS_IMPERIAL_DATE .................................................................................................................... XS_IMPERIAL_HOLE_MARK........................................................................................................ XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT ................................................................................................................... XS_IMPERIAL_TIME ..................................................................................................................... XS_IMPERIAL_TRIANGLES ......................................................................................................... XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG .......................................................................................................... XS_INCH_SIGN_ALWAYS ............................................................................................................ XS_INP........................................................................................................................................... XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS ................................................. XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA .................................... XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PART_COUNT .................................................................................. XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PLANE_COUNT ................................................................................ XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED .................................................................................. XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA...................................................................... XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED ................................................................................... XS_INTELLIGENT_MESSAGES_ALLOWED................................................................................ XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER .............................................................................................................

347 347 348 348 348 348 348 348 349 349 349 349 349 349 349 350 350 350 351 351

8.11 J .......................................................................................................................................................... 351 XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT ................................................................................................... 351 XS_JOINTS_USE_NOTCH1.......................................................................................................... 351 8.12 K.......................................................................................................................................................... 352 XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING.............................................. XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX.................................................................................................. XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE....................................................................................................... XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX ...................................................................................................

352 352 352 352

8.13 L .......................................................................................................................................................... 353 LEGEND_MODEL_PATH .............................................................................................................. XS_LINE_WIDTH........................................................................................................................... XS_LOG_FILE_NAME ................................................................................................................... XS_LOGPATH ............................................................................................................................... XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................................. XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ................................................................

353 353 353 353 353 353

8.14 M ......................................................................................................................................................... 354 XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY ............................................................................................................ XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP ............................................................................................ XS_MACRO_REFERENCES......................................................................................................... XS_MACRO_LOG.......................................................................................................................... XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET................................................................................................ XS_MARK_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY ....................................................................... 20


www.cadfamily.com



354 354 354 354 355 355

XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR .................................................................................... XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_HEIGHT ............................................................................ XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH ........................................................................... XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH .................................................................... XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME ............................................. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME........................ XS_MARK_LINE_SPACE_FACTOR ............................................................................................. XS_MARK_TEXT_FRAME_BOX_HEIGHT_FACTOR .................................................................. XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE................................................................. XS_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_SKEWED_END_PLATE_AND_BEAM_END............................... XS_MAX_ANGLE_TOLERANCE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_MAIN_PARTS .................................. XS_MAX_AUTOMATIC_RADIUS_DIMENSION ........................................................................... XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME................................................................................. XS_MAX_FRACTIONS_IN_MODEL_DIMENSION ....................................................................... XS_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_PLANES_TO_NAME................................................................... XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL ...................................................................... XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL ............................................................................ XS_MAX_SPACE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_ASSEMBLY_PARALLEL_PARTS ........................... XS_MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................ XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT ....................................................................................................... XS_MDIVIEWPARENT .................................................................................................................. XS_MDIZOOMPARENT ................................................................................................................ XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT ................................................................................................ XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS .................................................... XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS .............................................................. XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY ......................................................................................................... XS_MIS_SEQUENCE.................................................................................................................... XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR ............................................. XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY ....................................................................................... XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP................................................................. XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_PLACING_TRIAL_NUMBER ....................................................... XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE ........................................................................................... XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK................................................

355 355 355 355 355 356 357 357 357 358 358 358 358 359 359 359 359 359 359 359 360 360 360 360 360 360 361 361 361 361 361 362 362

8.15 N ......................................................................................................................................................... 362 XS_NC_DISABLE_PIECE_IDENTIFICATION_FIX ....................................................................... XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT ....................................................................................... XSNEST......................................................................................................................................... XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS ................................................................................................ XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS......................................................................................... XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE .................................................................................... XS_NO_CSK_MARK ..................................................................................................................... XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................................................... XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS................................................................................. TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

www.cadfamily.com



362 362 362 363 363 363 363 363 363 21

XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR ................................................................................. XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE.......................................................................................................... XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ...................................................................................................... XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK .................................................................. XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK ........................................................................... XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK....................................................................... XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME.............................................................

363 364 364 364 364 364 364

8.16 O ......................................................................................................................................................... 365 XS_OBJECT_SELECTION_CONFIRMATION .............................................................................. XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS.................................................. XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_PARTS_OUT_OF_VIEW_PLANE_LIMIT_ANGLE................................. XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE .................................................................................... XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE.......................................................................................................... XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE ................................................................................................ XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION............................................................... XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE......................................................................................................... XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION...................................................................................... XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS............................................................. XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS_IN_GA................................................ XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS ....................................................... XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS_IN_GA...........................................

365 365 365 365 365 366 366 366 366 366 366 367 367

8.17 P.......................................................................................................................................................... 367 XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR ............................................................................... XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE ................................................................................... XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE.......................................................................................... XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING........................................................................ XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.................................................................. XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR............................................... XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE............................................................................... XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO.......................................... XS_PEDDIMAT_FLANGE_CLEARANCE...................................................................................... XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE .............................................................................................................. XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X ....................................................................................................... XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y ....................................................................................................... PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE............................................................................................. PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE ...................................................................................... XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID................................................................................. XS_PML_EXPORT_USE_ADDITIONAL_CUT_DIST.................................................................... XS_POLYGON_CUT_EXTRA_THICKNESS................................................................................. XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR....................................... XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR................................................. XS_POP_MARK_COLOR..............................................................................................................

22


www.cadfamily.com



367 367 368 368 368 369 369 369 369 370 370 370 370 371 371 371 371 371 371 372

XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT............................................................................................................. 372 XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL ........................................................................................................... 372 XS_POSITION_DIMENSIONS_FOR_HOLES_IN_SINGLE_SECONDARY_PARTS_IN_ASSEMBLY _DRAWING.................................................................................................................................... 372 XS_PRIMARY_PART_FIRST ........................................................................................................ 373 XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER ........................................................................................... 373 XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT......................................................................................................... 373 XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE ..................................................................... 373 XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT......................................................................... 373 XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE ................................................................. 373 XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT..................................................................... 374 XS_PROFDB ................................................................................................................................. 374 XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL ...................................................................................... 374 XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT .......................................................................... 374 XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_REPORTS ........................... 374 XS_PROJECT................................................................................................................................ 375 XS_PROTECT_SYMBOLS............................................................................................................ 375 8.18 R ......................................................................................................................................................... 375 XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING.................................. XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES ............................................................................... XSR_DIAMETER_USE_ONLY_INCHES ...................................................................................... XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE ........................................................................ XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY .................................... XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE....................................................................................... XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH........................ XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE............................ XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME ......................................................................... XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION.......................................................... XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS.................................................................................... XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS .............................................................................. XS_REFERENCE_CACHE............................................................................................................ XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS ................................................................................... XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_LINES........................................................................................ XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE ...................................................................... XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF .......................................................... XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS ............... XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES ...................................................................... XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS .......................................................... XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS..................................................................................... XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING........................................................................ XS_RENDERED_CURSOR_LINE_WIDTH................................................................................... XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE ........................................................................................... XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE.......................................................................................


www.cadfamily.com



375 375 375 375 375 376 376 376 376 376 376 376 377 377 377 377 378 378 378 378 378 378 378 379 379

23

XS_RENDERED_PIXEL_TOLERANCE_SCALE .......................................................................... XS_REPORT_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY.......................................................................................... XS_ROTATE_CUT_VIEWS ........................................................................................................... XS_RUNPATH ............................................................................................................................... XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR............................................................................................ XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL ................................................................................................... XSR_USE_NO_INCH_SYMBOL ................................................................................................... XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE.................................................................................................. XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_FOR_FRACTIONS................................................................................ XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_VALUE ..................................................................................................

380 380 380 381 381 381 381 382 382 382

8.19 S.......................................................................................................................................................... 382 XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT ....................................................................................................... XS_SCALE_COPIED_OR_MOVED_OBJECTS_IN_DRAWINGS................................................. XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT ............................................................................................ XS_SCREW_DIAMOND_WITHOUT_PHI...................................................................................... XS_SDNF_CONVERT_PL_PROFILE_TO_PLATE ....................................................................... XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID .............................................................................. XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER ..................................................................... XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP...................................................................................... XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR........................................................................................................ XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL .................................................................... XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE ....................................................................................... XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL.................................................................. XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE ............................................................................................. XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE........................................................................................................... XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ........................................................................... XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA............................................................... XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ........................................................................... XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .............................................................. XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE................................................................. XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .................................................... XS_SHOW_PERFORM_NUMBERING_MESSAGE...................................................................... XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES .................................................................. XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST.................................................................. XS_SHOW_SITE_STUDS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS............................................................. XS_SHOW_STUDS_IN_WORKSHOP_DRAWINGS..................................................................... XS_SHOW_TEMPLATE_LOG_MESSAGES................................................................................. XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW .............................................................................................. XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................ XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS.............................................................................. XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE ............................................................................................ XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE.................................................................................... XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY ...................................................................................................... 24


www.cadfamily.com



382 382 382 383 383 383 383 383 384 384 384 385 385 385 385 385 386 386 386 386 386 387 387 387 387 387 387 387 388 388 388 388

XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE ................................................................................................. XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS.................................................................................................... XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE ................................................................................................................ XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET .............................................................................................. XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS ................................................................. XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN ........................................................................................................ XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK ............................................................................................ XS_SINGLE_PART_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE ............................................................................. XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA .................................................................................................... XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE ......................................................................................................... XS_SINGLE_SCALE ..................................................................................................................... XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL ................................................................................................ XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS .............................................................................................. XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS....................................................................................... XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE ............................................................................................. XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................................. XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA................................................................ XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................................. XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ................................................................ XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE................................................................... XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ...................................................... XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY ..................................................................................................... XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE ........................................................................................................... XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY ...................................................................................... XS_STACKED_FRACTION_TYPE................................................................................................ XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE ...................................................................... XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE................................................................. XS_STD_PART_MODEL............................................................................................................... XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_FACTOR ...................................................................................... XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR........................................................................................ XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR ........................................................................................... SYMEDHOME................................................................................................................................ XS_SYSTEM..................................................................................................................................

388 388 389 389 389 389 389 390 390 390 390 390 391 391 391 391 391 391 391 392 392 392 392 393 393 393 394 394 394 395 395 395 395

8.20 T.......................................................................................................................................................... 396 TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE..................................................................................... XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY ...................................................................................................... XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM ..................................................................................... XS_TEXT_FONT ........................................................................................................................... XS_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR....................................................................................................... XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON ........................................................................................... TEXT_X_SIZE................................................................................................................................ TEXT_Y_SIZE................................................................................................................................ XS_THUMBNAIL_FONT................................................................................................................ TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

www.cadfamily.com



396 396 396 396 396 396 397 397 397 25

XS_TPLED_INI .............................................................................................................................. XS_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION_IN_FREEPLACING ................................................................. XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS ................................................................................... XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS ................................................................................ XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC..................................................... XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES ..................................................................................

397 397 398 398 398 398

8.21 U.......................................................................................................................................................... 399 XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER ......................................................................................................... XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT ................................................................................... XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION............................................................................... XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS................................................ XS_UNFOLDING_PLANE_EPSILON ............................................................................................ XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS............................................................................................................... XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS ......................................................................................... XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING........................................................................... XS_UPDATE_MARKS_IN_FROZEN_DRAWINGS ....................................................................... XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED ....................................................................................... XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT................................................................................... XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR........................................................... XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR......................................................................................... XS_USE_BOLT_DISTANCE_IN_NOTCH_CALCULATIONS........................................................ XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS..................................................................................................... XS_USE_CONVEX_PROTECT_AREA ......................................................................................... XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_FILE_NAME ................................................................. XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE ........................................................................... XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS................................................................... XS_USE_FILE_COMPRESSION................................................................................................... XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION.................................................................................................... XS_USE_LINECLIP ....................................................................................................................... XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR............................................................ XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR........................................................................................... XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS .................................... XS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK .................................................................................................. XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION....................................................................................... XS_USE_NEW_WELD_PLACING................................................................................................. XS_USE_NEW_USNOTCH ........................................................................................................... XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR ............................................................................ XS_USE_OLD_FILTERING ........................................................................................................... XS_USE_OLD_HQ_PROFILE_DEFINITION................................................................................. XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION .............................................................. XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES.............................................................................. XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH ........................................................................... XS_USE_ONLY_NOMINAL_REBAR_DIAMETER ........................................................................ 26


www.cadfamily.com



399 399 400 400 400 400 400 400 401 401 401 401 401 402 402 402 402 402 403 403 403 403 403 403 404 404 404 404 404 405 405 405 405 405 405 406

XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING........................................................................................ XS_USE_POINT_AS_SEPARATOR_IN_PROFILE_NAME.......................................................... XS_USE_SEMI_ORTHO ............................................................................................................... XS_USE_SMALLER_GUSSET_PLATE ........................................................................................ XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES........................................................................................................... XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING ........................................................................................... XS_USE_SPECIAL_FILLER_PLATE_THICKNESS...................................................................... XS_USE_TUBE_INNER_LENGTH_IN_DIMENSIONING ............................................................. XS_USE_VERTICAL_PLACING_FOR_COLUMNS_IN ................................................................ XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE........................................................................... XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS ..............................................

406 406 406 406 406 406 407 407 407 407 407

8.22 V ......................................................................................................................................................... 408 XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS .................................. XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER .................................................... XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS........................................................ XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS ................................................ XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS ................................................................. XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS ........................................................... XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR...................................................................................................... XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR..................................................................................................... XS_VIEW_FAST_BOLT_COLOR.................................................................................................. XS_VIEW_FREE_MEASURE_PLANE .......................................................................................... XS_VIEW_HEIGHT........................................................................................................................ XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR................................................................................................ XS_VIEW_POSITION_X................................................................................................................ XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y................................................................................................................ XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT................................................................................................................ XS_VIEW_WIDTH .........................................................................................................................

408 408 408 408 408 408 409 409 409 409 410 410 411 411 411 411

8.23 W ........................................................................................................................................................ 411 XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS................................................................................... XS_WARP_MAX_DEVIATION ...................................................................................................... XS_WEB_PUBLISHING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY .................................................................... XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE ............................................................................................................ XS_WELD_FONT .......................................................................................................................... XS_WELDING_LENGTH_TOLERANCE ....................................................................................... XS_WELDING_TOUCH_TOLERANCE......................................................................................... XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR.......................................................................... XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT ................................................................................................... XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART..........................................................

411 411 412 412 412 412 412 412 412 413

8.24 Z.......................................................................................................................................................... 413 XS_ZERO_POINT_SYMBOL_OLD_WAY..................................................................................... 413 XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO ............................................................................................................. 413


www.cadfamily.com



27

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE ............................................................... 413 XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE........................................................................... 413

9 File extensions ...................................................................................... 10 Reserved shortcuts...............................................................................

415 419

10.1 Common shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 419 10.2 Modeling commands........................................................................................................................... 420 10.3 Drawing commands ............................................................................................................................ 421 10.4 UCS..................................................................................................................................................... 422 10.5 Representation for parts...................................................................................................................... 422 10.6 Representation for component parts................................................................................................... 422

11 Template attributes ...............................................................................

423

11.1 Content type........................................................................................................................................ 423 11.2 Attributes............................................................................................................................................. 425 11.3 User-defined attributes in templates ................................................................................................... 426 Adding attributes to contentattributes_userdefined.lst .................................................................. 428 Modify the way attributes are displayed in the attribute tree .................................................... 429 11.4 A.......................................................................................................................................................... 430 ACN................................................................................................................................................ 430 ACTIVE_DESIGN_CODE .............................................................................................................. 430 ADDRESS ...................................................................................................................................... 430 ALIAS_NAME1 ... 3........................................................................................................................ 430 ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V................................................................................................. 431 ANG_U_MAX, ANG_U_MIN, ANG_V_MAX, ANG_V_MIN............................................................ 431 AREA.............................................................................................................................................. 431 AREA_FORM_TOP, AREA_FORM_BOTTOM, AREA_FORM_SIDE ........................................... 431 AREA_GROSS............................................................................................................................... 432 AREA_NET .................................................................................................................................... 432 AREA_PER_TONS ........................................................................................................................ 432 AREA_PGX, AREA_NGX, AREA_PGY, AREA_NGY, AREA_PGZ, AREA_NGZ........................ 432 AREA_PLAN .................................................................................................................................. 433 AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_GROSS ............................................................................................ 433 Restrictions .............................................................................................................................. 433 AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_NET.................................................................................................. 433 AREA_PROJECTION_XY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_GROSS............................................................................................... 433 AREA_PROJECTION_XY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_NET .

28


www.cadfamily.com



434 AREA_PX, AREA_NX, AREA_PY, AREA_NY, AREA_PZ, AREA_NZ ......................................... ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL ..................................................................................................... ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED........................................................................ ASSEMBLY_PLWEIGHT ............................................................................................................... ASSEMBLY_POS .......................................................................................................................... ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE .................................................................................................... ASSEMBLY_PREFIX..................................................................................................................... ASSEMBLY_SERIAL_NUMBER ................................................................................................... ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL ............................................................................................................. ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED................................................................................

434 434 434 434 435 435 436 436 436 436

11.5 B ......................................................................................................................................................... 437 BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE ............................................................................................................. BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE_MIN..................................................................................................... BOLT_MATERIAL_LENGTH ......................................................................................................... BOLT_NPARTS ............................................................................................................................. BOLT_STANDARD ........................................................................................................................ BOTTOM_LEVEL........................................................................................................................... BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED ............................................................................................. BUILDER........................................................................................................................................

437 437 437 437 437 437 437 437

11.6 C ......................................................................................................................................................... 438 CANTILEVER................................................................................................................................. CAST_UNIT_POS.......................................................................................................................... CAST_UNIT_POSITION_CODE.................................................................................................... CAST_UNIT_PREFIX .................................................................................................................... CAST_UNIT_SERIAL_NUMBER................................................................................................... CATALOG_NAME.......................................................................................................................... CC .................................................................................................................................................. CC_CROSS ................................................................................................................................... CC_EXACT .................................................................................................................................... CC_EXACT_CROSS ..................................................................................................................... CC_EXACT_LONG........................................................................................................................ CC_LONG...................................................................................................................................... CC_MAX ........................................................................................................................................ CC_MAX_CROSS ......................................................................................................................... CC_MAX_LONG ............................................................................................................................ CC_MIN ......................................................................................................................................... CC_MIN_CROSS........................................................................................................................... CC_MIN_LONG ............................................................................................................................. CLASS ........................................................................................................................................... CLASS_ATTR ................................................................................................................................ CODE.............................................................................................................................................


www.cadfamily.com



438 438 438 438 438 438 438 438 438 439 439 439 439 439 439 439 439 439 439 440 440

29

COG_X, COG_Y, COG_Z.............................................................................................................. comment......................................................................................................................................... CONNECTED_ASSEMBLIES........................................................................................................ CONNECTED_PARTS................................................................................................................... CONNECTION_CODE................................................................................................................... CONNECTION_DSTV.................................................................................................................... CONNECTION_ERROR ................................................................................................................ CONNECTION_GROUP ................................................................................................................ CONNECTION_NUMBER.............................................................................................................. CONNECTION_RUNNING_NUMBER........................................................................................... CONTENTTYPE............................................................................................................................. COVER_AREA............................................................................................................................... CROSS_SECTION_AREA............................................................................................................. CURRENT_PHASE........................................................................................................................

440 440 440 440 440 440 440 441 441 441 441 441 441 441

11.7 D.......................................................................................................................................................... 441 DATE.............................................................................................................................................. 441 DATE_CREATE ............................................................................................................................. 442 DATE_END .................................................................................................................................... 442 DATE_ISSUE ................................................................................................................................. 442 DATE_LAST................................................................................................................................... 442 DATE_MODIFY.............................................................................................................................. 442 DATE_PLOT .................................................................................................................................. 442 DATE_START ................................................................................................................................ 442 DESIGNER..................................................................................................................................... 442 DIAMETER..................................................................................................................................... 442 DIAMETER_1, DIAMETER_2 ........................................................................................................ 443 DIAMETER_X ................................................................................................................................ 443 DIAMETER_Y ................................................................................................................................ 443 DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O, DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y ............................................................................................................................... 443 DIM_A_MAX ... DIM_G_MAX, DIM_H1_MAX, DIM_H2_MAX, DIM_I_MAX, DIM_J_MAX, DIM_K1_MAX, DIM_K2_MAX, DIM_O_MAX, DIM_R_MAX, DIM_TD_MAX, DIM_X_MAX, DIM_Y_MAX................................................................................................................................... 444 DIM_A_MIN ... DIM_G_MIN, DIM_H1_MIN, DIM_H2_MIN, DIM_I_MIN, DIM_J_MIN, DIM_K1_MIN, DIM_K2_MIN, DIM_O_MIN, DIM_R_MIN, DIM_TD_MIN, DIM_X_MIN, DIM_Y_MIN ................... 444 DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE .......................................................................................................... 444 DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE ......................................................................................................... 444 DR_PART_POS ............................................................................................................................. 444 11.8 E.......................................................................................................................................................... 444 ECCENTRICITY_X, ECCENTRICITY_Y ....................................................................................... EDGE_FOLD, EDGE_FOLD_1, EDGE_FOLD_2 .......................................................................... END_X, END_Y, END_Z................................................................................................................ END1_ANGLE_Z ...........................................................................................................................

30


www.cadfamily.com



444 445 445 445

END1_ANGLE_Y ........................................................................................................................... END2_ANGLE_Z ........................................................................................................................... END2_ANGLE_Y ........................................................................................................................... END1_CODE, END2_CODE ......................................................................................................... END1_SKEW, END2_SKEW.........................................................................................................

445 445 445 445 446

11.9 F.......................................................................................................................................................... 446 FATHER_ID ................................................................................................................................... FINISH ........................................................................................................................................... FLANGE_LENGTH_B.................................................................................................................... FLANGE_LENGTH_U.................................................................................................................... FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO.............................................................................................................. FLANGE_THICKNESS .................................................................................................................. FLANGE_THICKNESS_1, FLANGE_THICKNESS_2 .................................................................. FLANGE_THICKNESS_B.............................................................................................................. FLANGE_THICKNESS_U.............................................................................................................. FLANGE_WIDTH ........................................................................................................................... FLANGE_WIDTH_1, FLANGE_WIDTH_2..................................................................................... FLANGE_WIDTH_B....................................................................................................................... FLANGE_WIDTH_U ...................................................................................................................... FOLD_ANGLE ...............................................................................................................................

446 446 446 446 446 446 446 447 447 447 447 447 447 447

11.10 G ......................................................................................................................................................... 447 GRADE .......................................................................................................................................... 447 GROUP_TYPE............................................................................................................................... 447 GUID .............................................................................................................................................. 448 11.11 H ......................................................................................................................................................... 448 HEAD_DIAMETER......................................................................................................................... HEAD_THICKNESS....................................................................................................................... HEIGHT.......................................................................................................................................... HEIGHT_1 ... 4............................................................................................................................... HOLE_TOLERANCE ..................................................................................................................... HOOK_START, HOOK_END......................................................................................................... HOOK_START_ANGLE, HOOK_END_ANGLE ............................................................................ HOOK_START_LENGTH, HOOK_END_LENGTH ....................................................................... HOOK_START_RADIUS, HOOK_END_RADIUS .........................................................................

448 448 448 448 448 449 449 449 449

11.12 I........................................................................................................................................................... 449 INNER_DIAMETER ....................................................................................................................... ID.................................................................................................................................................... INFO1, INFO2 ................................................................................................................................ IS_POLYBEAM ..............................................................................................................................

449 449 449 449

11.13 L.......................................................................................................................................................... 449 LAST .............................................................................................................................................. 449


www.cadfamily.com



31

LAST_MARK .................................................................................................................................. LAST_TEXT1...3 ............................................................................................................................ LENGTH......................................................................................................................................... LENGTH_GROSS.......................................................................................................................... LENGTH_MAX ............................................................................................................................... LENGTH_MIN ................................................................................................................................ LONG_HOLE_X ............................................................................................................................. LONG_HOLE_Y ............................................................................................................................. LOT_NUMBER............................................................................................................................... LOT_NAME ....................................................................................................................................

450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450

11.14 M ......................................................................................................................................................... 451 MAJOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2 ..................................................................................................... MARK ............................................................................................................................................. MATERIAL ..................................................................................................................................... MATERIAL_TYPE .......................................................................................................................... MESH_POS ................................................................................................................................... MINOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2...................................................................................................... MODEL........................................................................................................................................... MODEL_TOTAL ............................................................................................................................. MODULUS_OF_ELASTICITY........................................................................................................ MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_X............................................................................................................ MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_Y............................................................................................................ MORTAR_VOLUME.......................................................................................................................

451 451 451 451 451 451 451 451 452 452 452 452

11.15 N.......................................................................................................................................................... 452 NAME_BASE ................................................................................................................................. NAME_FULL .................................................................................................................................. NAME_SHORT .............................................................................................................................. NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_X................................................................................... NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_Y................................................................................... NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_X................................................................................... NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_Y................................................................................... NORMALIZED_WARPING_CONSTANT....................................................................................... NUMBER#1, NUMBER #2 .............................................................................................................

452 452 453 453 453 453 453 453 453

11.16 O ......................................................................................................................................................... 453 OBJECT ......................................................................................................................................... OBJECT_DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................... OBJECT_LOCKED ........................................................................................................................ OBJECT_TYPE.............................................................................................................................. OWNER..........................................................................................................................................

453 453 454 454 454

11.17 P.......................................................................................................................................................... 454 PAGE ............................................................................................................................................. 454 PART_POS .................................................................................................................................... 454 32


www.cadfamily.com



PART_PREFIX............................................................................................................................... PART_SERIAL_NUMBER ............................................................................................................. PCS................................................................................................................................................ PHASE ........................................................................................................................................... PLASTIC_MODULUS_X................................................................................................................ PLASTIC_MODULUS_Y ............................................................................................................... PLATE_DENSITY .......................................................................................................................... PLATE_THICKNESS ..................................................................................................................... PLOTFILE ...................................................................................................................................... POISSONS_RATIO ....................................................................................................................... POLAR_RADIUS_OF_GYRATION................................................................................................ PRELIM_MARK ............................................................................................................................. PROFILE........................................................................................................................................ PROFILE_DENSITY ...................................................................................................................... PROFILE_TYPE ............................................................................................................................ PROFILE_WEIGHT ....................................................................................................................... PROFILE_WEIGHT_NET ..............................................................................................................

455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 456 456 456 456 457 457 457 457

11.18 R ......................................................................................................................................................... 458 RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_X ......................................................................................................... RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_Y ......................................................................................................... REBAR_POS ................................................................................................................................. REFERENCE_MODEL .................................................................................................................. REFERENCE_MODEL_OBJECT .................................................................................................. ROUNDING_RADIUS, ROUNDING_RADIUS_1 ... 2.................................................................... ROW_IN_PAGE.............................................................................................................................

458 458 458 458 458 458 458

11.19 S ......................................................................................................................................................... 459 SCALE1...5 .................................................................................................................................... SECTION_MODULUS_X, SECTION_MODULUS_Y .................................................................... SHAPE ........................................................................................................................................... SHAPE_INTERNAL ....................................................................................................................... SHEAR_CENTER_LOCATION...................................................................................................... SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART ........................................................................................................... SITE_WORKSHOP........................................................................................................................ SIZE ............................................................................................................................................... SORT_OF_E_x_Cw_PER_G_x_J ................................................................................................. SUPPLEMENT_PART_WEIGHT................................................................................................... START_X ....................................................................................................................................... START_Y ....................................................................................................................................... START_Z ....................................................................................................................................... STATICAL_MOMENT_Qf .............................................................................................................. STATICAL_MOMENT_Qw............................................................................................................. STIFFENER_DIMENSION.............................................................................................................


www.cadfamily.com



459 459 459 459 459 459 459 459 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460

33

STIFFENER_DIMENSION_1 ... 3 .................................................................................................. STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_1...5 ...................................................................................... STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_1...5 ............................................................................... STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_1...5........................................................................... STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_1...5 ..................................................................... STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_1...5................................................................. STRAND_N_PATTERN ................................................................................................................. STRAND_N_STRAND ................................................................................................................... STRAND_POS ............................................................................................................................... STRAND_PULL_FORCE ............................................................................................................... STRAND_UNBONDED .................................................................................................................. SUBTYPE....................................................................................................................................... SURFACING_NAME......................................................................................................................

460 461 461 461 461 461 461 461 461 462 462 462 462

11.20 T.......................................................................................................................................................... 462 TANGENT_OF_PRINCIPAL_AXIS_ANGLE.................................................................................. TEXT1...3 ....................................................................................................................................... THERMAL_DILATATION ............................................................................................................... THREAD_IN_MATERIAL ............................................................................................................... TILE_NUMBER .............................................................................................................................. TILE_VOLUME............................................................................................................................... TIME............................................................................................................................................... TITLE.............................................................................................................................................. TITLE1...3....................................................................................................................................... TOP_LEVEL................................................................................................................................... TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED ..................................................................................................... TORSIONAL_CONSTANT............................................................................................................. TYPE .............................................................................................................................................. TYPE1 ............................................................................................................................................ TYPE2 ............................................................................................................................................ TYPE3 ............................................................................................................................................ TYPE4 ...........................................................................................................................................

462 462 462 462 462 462 463 463 463 463 463 463 463 464 464 464 464

11.21 U.......................................................................................................................................................... 464 USERFIELD_1 ... _8 ...................................................................................................................... 464 11.22 V.......................................................................................................................................................... 464 VOLUME ........................................................................................................................................ 465 VOLUME_GROSS ......................................................................................................................... 465 VOLUME_NET ............................................................................................................................... 465 11.23 W......................................................................................................................................................... 465 WARPING_CONSTANT ................................................................................................................ WARPING_STATICAL_MOMENT ................................................................................................. WEB_HEIGHT................................................................................................................................ WEB_LENGTH............................................................................................................................... 34


www.cadfamily.com



465 465 465 465

WEB_THICKNESS ........................................................................................................................ WEB_THICKNESS_1, WEB_THICKNESS_2................................................................................ WEB_WIDTH ................................................................................................................................. WEIGHT......................................................................................................................................... WEIGHT_GROSS.......................................................................................................................... WEIGHT_M.................................................................................................................................... WEIGHT_MAX ............................................................................................................................... WEIGHT_MIN ................................................................................................................................ WEIGHT_NET................................................................................................................................ WEIGHT_PER_UNIT_LENGTH .................................................................................................... WEIGHT_TOTAL ........................................................................................................................... WELD_ANGLE1, WELD_ANGLE2 ................................................................................................ WELD_ASSEMBLYTYPE .............................................................................................................. WELD_DEFAULT .......................................................................................................................... WELD_FATHER_CODE ................................................................................................................ WELD_FATHER_NUMBER........................................................................................................... WELD_FILLTYPE1, WELD_FILLTYPE2 ....................................................................................... WELD_FINISH1, WELD_FINISH2................................................................................................. WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS .............................................................................................. WELD_SIZE1, WELD_SIZE2 ........................................................................................................ WELD_TEXT.................................................................................................................................. WELD_TYPE1, WELD_TYPE2...................................................................................................... WIDTH ........................................................................................................................................... WIDTH_1, WIDTH_2......................................................................................................................

12 Reinforcing bar bending types.............................................................

465 465 465 466 466 466 466 466 466 467 467 467 467 467 467 467 467 467 468 468 468 468 468 468

469

12.1 Reinforcement in templates ................................................................................................................ 490


www.cadfamily.com



35

36


www.cadfamily.com



Preface

Tekla Structures includes complete documentation in an accessible help system. Our online help is a detailed guide to Tekla Structures concepts, tools, commands, and features, with plenty of examples. The documentation is also available in PDF format. Topics in the Preface are:

• •

Audience (p. 37)

•

Conventions used in this guide (p. 38)

•

Related guides (p. 39)

Additional help resources (p. 37)

Audience This guide is aimed at structural engineers, detailers and designers who model, analyze, and design concrete and steel structures. We assume that you are familiar with the processes of structural engineering.

Additional help resources The following resources also provide information about Tekla Structures: Web site

http://www.tekla.com

E-mail

Contact your local helpdesk via e-mail:

Area office

E-mail address

China

[email protected]

Finland

[email protected]


www.cadfamily.com



37

Area office

E-mail address

France

[email protected]

Germany

[email protected]

Japan

[email protected]

Malaysia

[email protected]

Middle East

[email protected]

Sweden

[email protected]

UK

[email protected]

US

[email protected]

If you believe you have discovered a problem with this software, please report it to your Tekla Structures Reseller using the maintenance request form provided at Help > Tekla on the Web > Maintenance request.... Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to [email protected]. Tekla Extranet

Anyone with a current maintenance contract can use Tekla Extranet. Register now to get free access to our online discussion forums, hints & tips, software downloads, tutorials, and more. To register, go to https://extranet.tekla.com. You can also access Tekla Extranet from Tekla Structures by clicking Help > Online Support > Tekla Extranet.

Conventions used in this guide Typefaces

We use different typefaces for different items in this guide. In most cases the meaning is obvious from the context. If you are not sure what a certain typeface represents, you can check it here.

Convention

Usage

Bold

Bold indicates the names of keyboard keys. Bold is also used for general emphasis in text.

Arial bold

Any text that you see in the user interface appears in Arial bold. Items such as window and dialog box titles, field and button names, combo box options, and list box items are displayed in this typeface.

Italic bold

New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context for the first time.

Monospace

Extracts of Tekla Structures’s program code, HTML, or other material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appears in monospaced font. Filenames and folder paths appear in monospace. Also all the text you enter yourself appears in monospaced font.

Noteboxes

38

We use several types of noteboxes, marked by different icons. Their functions are shown below:


www.cadfamily.com



A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing things. A tip never contains information that is absolutely necessary.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can also point you to other information in this guide that you might find useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers. You are never required to understand this kind of information.

Related guides Tekla Structures includes a comprehensive help system in a series of online books. You will also receive a printed installation guide with your Tekla Structures installation DVD.

•

Modeling Manual How to create a physical model.

•

Analysis Manual How to create loads and run structural analysis.

•

Detailing Manual How to create reinforcement, connections, and details.

•

Drawing Manual How to create and edit drawings.

•

System Manual Covers advanced features and how to maintain the Tekla Structures environment.

•

TplEd User’s Guide How to create and edit report and drawing templates.

•

SymEd User’s Guide How to use the SymEd graphical interface to manipulate symbols.


www.cadfamily.com



39

•

Installation Troubleshooting Guide Printed booklet explaining how to install Tekla Structures.

40


www.cadfamily.com



1

Using Tekla Structures effectively

Introduction

With Tekla Structures you do not have to do everything manually. There are many features you can you use to automate your work processes. You will find it useful to read this chapter before starting a project in Tekla Structures.

In this chapter

This chapter is a collection of practical suggestions from experienced Tekla Structures users and service personnel on how to use Tekla Structures effectively. You will also find many links to more detailed explanations of the various features discussed here and step-by-step instructions where appropriate.

Contents

This chapter is divided into the following sections:

• •

General (p. 41)

•

Drawings and printers (p. 47)

•

Autosave (p. 48)

•

Customizing the interface (p. 51)

•

Optimizing system performance (p. 54)

Modeling (p. 45)

1.1 General This section describes how to make the most of various Tekla Structures features when setting up a project. Topics

Firm and project folders (p. 42) Numbering series (p. 42) Phases (p. 42) Catalogs (p. 42) Preferences (p. 43) Recording and running macros (p. 44)

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Using Tekla Structures effectively

41

Firm and project folders Before you customize any object properties for specific projects or organizations, create firm and project folders in which to store them. This will save you time setting up future projects and also when you upgrade Tekla Structures. Project and firm folders (p. 96)

See also

Folder search order (p. 94) Predefining part properties (p. 46)

Numbering series Numbering series

Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers you will use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.

Example

You could define the prefixes and start numbers for a multi-storey building as follows:

Profiles

Plates

Column assembly

Beam assembly

Brace assembly

Truss assembly

1st floor

PR1000

1000

C1000

B1000

V1000

T1000

2nd floor

PR2000

2000

C2000

B2000

V2000

T2000

See also

Numbering parts Numbering Preferences (p. 43)

Phases You can use phases to break up a model into different sections. Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects and copy objects from other models according to their phase number. Example

You have a large project on which several users will work simultaneously in single-user mode. First create a basic model which includes, for example, the columns. This is phase 1. You then copy this basic model to all users. Each user then works on a separate part of the building. As each part of the model is completed, you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc).

See also

Phases Edit > Copy Special > From Another Model... View filter (Numbers tab)

Catalogs Before you start a project, check that the catalogs you are using conform to the project requirements. Ensure all users access the same catalogs. See also

Folder search order (p. 94) Catalogs (p. 115) Open a model first (p. 116)

42


Using Tekla Structures effectively www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected]


The profile catalog (p. 117) The material catalog (p. 130) The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 134) The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 142)

Preferences Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. Click Setup > Options... > Preferences. Component properties override preferences. Tekla Structures only uses the values in the Preferences tab if the corresponding fields in the component dialog boxes are empty. Tekla Structures uses the information in the Preferences tab when it creates parts using components. Example

It is important that profile names are set up correctly so that you can use filters and wizards effectively. If you change settings in the Preferences tab, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to components you subsequently create. Components you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.

In multi-user mode, all users working in the same model have the same preferences as well as other properties, catalogs, etc.

Profile names In the Preferences tab, profile names are parametric profile prefixes. They must exist in the profile catalog. If you want to use a parametric profile name that does not exist in the catalog, first add it to profile catalog, then enter it here. Tekla Structures uses the Folded plate prefix when you use the Polyplate command in macros. See also The profile catalog (p. 117).

Connections To define the default bolt properties to use in connections, select a Bolt standard and Bolt size. Enter part start numbers in fields Pos1 to Pos4. Cross-check these settings against the numbering series you define to make sure they cannot overlap. If they overlap, Tekla Structures may create two non-identical parts with the same part number. This generates an error in the log file numbering.history.

Edge distance When you use components, Tekla Structures uses the Factor of bolt edge distance and Element considered fields to check that the bolts it creates are not too close to the edge of a part. Tekla Structures warns you if they are. Check that bolt edge distance is set according to the standard you are using. Use the Element considered field to base edge distance checks on bolt or hole diameter. Default edge distance settings depend on the environment. If you change the default settings, use Save defaults (p. 105) command to save settings in the current model folder. See also Getting started.

www.cadfamily.com




43

Recording and running macros Tekla Structures enables you to record a series of actions from menus, dialog boxes, and shortcuts. Recording a macro

To record a macro: 1. 2.

Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Enter a Macro name.

3.

Click Record.

4.

Perform the actions you want to record.

5.

Click Stop to stop recording.

Macros are saved as *.cs files, in the folder defined with the XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY variable in the environment-specific initialization files.

The recorded macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders, depending on in which mode the macro was recorded in. Creating a macro manually

To manually create a macro file, click Create in the Macros dialog box. This creates an empty macro file, which you can manually edit, or copy and paste commands to it from other macro files.

Running a macro

To run a macro: 1.

44

Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.




2. Editing macros

Select the macro and click Run.

To view or edit a macro: 1. 2.

First check that the file type .cs is associated with suitable text editor. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.

3.

Select the macro and click Edit.

4.

The macro opens in the associated text editor.

Macros are based on C# commands and in case you want to edit macros, knowledge of C# programming is needed.

Timestamp

If you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros, use the variable XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP.

Warning messages Some third party applications may cause unexpected complications, such as unnecessary warning messages, when working with Tekla Structures. Applications that are known to cause complications are anti-spyware programs.

1.2 Modeling This section explains how to make the most of the various modeling tools and features in Tekla Structures. Topics

Automating the detailing process (p. 45) Predefining part properties (p. 46) Modeling tools (p. 46) AutoDefaults (p. 47) AutoConnection (p. 47)

Automating the detailing process If you have a standard way of configuring connections, save time by saving the connection properties once. Store them in firm or project folders for future use. See Firm and project folders (p. 42). Tekla Structures includes AutoConnection and AutoDefaults tools to automate the modeling process. So you can customize Tekla Structures to suit a particular project and the way you work. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults and also AutoConnection (p. 151). There are three levels of automation that you can help you work faster and more accurately.

www.cadfamily.com




45

Predefining part properties If you have additional information you need to include for particular parts, create user-defined attributes. Tekla Structures saves all customized object properties in the current model folder. You can also copy the attribute files to project or firm folders for future use. See Firm and project folders (p. 42) and Part properties.

In multi-user mode, all users working on the same model use the same preferences and attribute files.

Example

For beam properties, this technique guarantees that part names are correct. This means you can easily use a wizard to create drawings. See Using drawing wizards and Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106). Consider developing a naming policy for files containing customized object properties. Then you can easily cut and paste them to firm and project folders. This also makes it easier to manage objects in view filters, selection filters, drawing properties, etc.

Using predefined properties You can set the properties for macros, connections, and other objects (columns, beams, bolts, etc.) then save them. It is then simple to reload these properties either for current or future projects.

Modeling tools Customize the properties of modeling tools you use to create objects, rather than changing the properties manually each time. Example

46

You know you will use the same type of stairs in several projects. Set up and save the stair modeling tool properties once.




When you next need to use that particular stair modeling tool you can just load the pre-defined properties, as shown below. When you apply the modeling tool, Tekla Structures creates exactly the same stairs.

Predefined properties See also Getting started.

AutoDefaults Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply the correct properties to existing connections. Using this technique you are also building your own expertise into the Tekla Structures database, so the entire company benefits from it. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 151).

AutoConnection Use the AutoConnection feature to automatically apply connections. You can use AutoConnection to quickly add connections individually, in phases, or projectwide. This is a useful technique when you are working on a large project using many connections, modifying a model, or importing modified profiles. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 151).

1.3 Drawings and printers This section explains how to make the most of the selection filters, wizards and printer catalog settings to standardize drawing creation and printing. Topics

Drawing properties (p. 48) Layouts and templates (p. 48) Reports and symbols (p. 48) Selection filters (p. 48) Wizards (p. 48) Defining print devices (p. 48)

www.cadfamily.com




47

Drawing properties Using well-prepared drawing settings and wizards can dramatically reduce the time it takes to create and edit drawings. Define the settings for different types of parts and assemblies carefully. Then the drawings you create are as complete as possible, with little or no need for editing. Examples

Define different assembly drawing settings for columns, beams, secondary beams, plates, bracings and trusses. Define single-part drawing settings for I and H profiles, tubes, round tubes (wrap-around) and plates. Predefine drawing view properties to use additional views in drawings, such as detail, section or plan views. See also Drawing Properties.

Layouts and templates Plan and define the layouts and templates for drawings you will use before you start a project. See Drawing Layout.

Reports and symbols Plan and define special reports and symbols you need for a project.

Selection filters Create your own selection filters to use both when modeling and using wizards to automate drawing creation. You will find it useful to create selection filters for each part with a different name (column, beam, sec.beam, plate, brace, truss, etc.). Use the Selection Filter dialog box to modify existing filters or create your own. See Selection filter.

Wizards Use wizards to create objects and drawings automatically. See Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106) and Using drawing wizards.

Defining print devices Set up print devices before starting the project. See The plotter catalog.

1.4 Autosave Tekla Structures includes the Autosave feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. In addition, we strongly recommend that you implement and test a corporate

48




backup strategy. When restoring system backups, you should always restore an entire copy of a model rather than parts of it. Autosave files have the extension .db1_.

In multi-user mode, Autosave is not equivalent to the Save command. Autosave only saves a single user’s version of the model and does not update the master model.

Topics

Setting Autosave interval (p. 49) Autosave file location (p. 49) Keeping Autosave files (p. 50) Usernames (p. 50) Application error (p. 50)

Setting Autosave interval You can define Autosave intervals separately for operations performed in the Drawing Editor or while modeling, and for automatic drawing creation. Click Tools > Options > Options... > General.

The first value defines how often Tekla Structures performs an autosave while working in the Model Editor or the Drawing Editor. This number represents the number of menu commands issued. If the command is recursed, for instance creating many beams without interrupting the Create > Beam command, it counts as one menu command. Likewise, in the Drawing Editor, creating many dimensions with the Create > Horizontal dimension command without interrupting the command counts as only one command. The second value is the number of drawings after which Tekla Structures automatically saves your work.

Autosave file location To have Tekla Structures store Autosave files in a specific folder, use the variable XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY. Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically. You will find the Autosave file in the autosave folder, in a subfolder with the same name as the model. If you do not use this variable, Tekla Structures stores Autosave files in the current model folder. Example

www.cadfamily.com

You are working in multi-user mode and want Tekla Structures to store Autosave files locally, not in the model folder. Set the variable XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave.




49

In multi-user mode, Autosave only saves a single user’s version of the model and does does not update the master model.

You will notice that in multi-user mode Autosave is much faster than using the Save command. This is because Autosave performs a local save, but the Save command updates the master model.

Keeping Autosave files By default Tekla Structures deletes Autosave files when you save and close a model. To keep Autosave files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model, set the variable XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING=TRUE.

Usernames Give all users a different username when working in both single- and multi-user mode. Tekla Structures identifies users by username. Single-user

In single-user mode, if several users with the same username open a model, Tekla Structures does not display a warning. So you risk conflicts when saving the model.

Multi-user

In multi-user mode, Tekla Structures saves Autosave files in the master model folder by default with the filename .db1_. So, if several people are using the same username, conflicts are inevitable. See also Multi-user mode (p. 57).

Application error When you open a model, Tekla Structures automatically checks if the previous session exited normally. If it did not, Tekla Structures prompts whether you want to continue using the Autosave model or the original model.

Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. When Tekla Structures displays the warning Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read, it means that hardware problems have damaged the model database. Your hard disk may be damaged. Use autosave or system backup files to restore the model.

50




1.5 Customizing the interface Once you are familiar with Tekla Structures, you can create your own toolbars, menu and shortcuts containing the commands you use every day. This section explains how to do this. Topics

Toolbars (p. 51) Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 52) Creating a user-defined menu (p. 53) Defining shortcuts (p. 53)

Toolbars In Tekla Structures, both customized toolbars and user-defined menus belong to the user, not the model or PC. You can create as many toolbars as you need.

Do not change existing toolbars, particularly the connection toolbars. Instead, create new ones. See Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 52).

Managing toolbars To open the Customize dialog box, click Tools > Customize....

Use the Toolbars tab to reorganize toolbars: move commands from one toolbar to another and even create your own toolbars. The tree on the right contains all available toolbars and displays the commands they include.

www.cadfamily.com




51

Action

Description

Add or remove commands

In the Customize dialog box, click on a command to select it, then on the toolbar on which you want the command to appear. Click the right arrow to add commands, the left arrow to remove them.

Delete commands or toolbars

In the Customize dialog box, click a command or toolbar to select it, then click Delete.

Restore original toolbar

Click Reset to restore the original toolbar.

Display toolbar

Check Visible to display the toolbar in Tekla Structures. Tekla Structures uses the following icons to indicate if a toolbar is visible or not:

Move command in toolbar tree

Use arrow buttons.

Icons Tekla Structures displays the icon for the command you select. By default, the icon is 16x16 pixels. If the icons look too small, check Large icons which are 24x24 pixels. Check Tooltips to see the command name when you hold the pointer over an icon.

Creating a user-defined toolbar To create your own toolbar: 1.

Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Create also the toolbars for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor, otherwise they are not written to the registry.

2.

On the Toolbars tab, click New.... An new toolbar with the name User Toolbar 1 appears in the toolbar tree. You can enter a new name for the toolbar.

3.

Click commands on the list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to a toolbar. Use the left arrow to remove commands from a toolbar.

4.

Repeat step 3 until you have all the desired commands on the toolbar.

5.

Click Close.

See also Toolbars (p. 51) and Creating a user-defined menu (p. 53).

52




Creating a user-defined menu Each user can create their own menu, which is always named User. You can only create one user menu per user. To create your own menu: 1.

Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Create also the menu for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor, otherwise it is not written to the registry.

2.

Click the Menu tab.

3.

Click commands on the command list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to the menu. Tekla Structures displays the commands on the menu on the right of the dialog box.

4.

Use the left arrow to remove commands from the menu.

5.

Use the arrow buttons to move a command up or down the toolbar tree.

6.

Use the line button to add a separator line above the selected command.

7.

Repeat step 3 until you have added all the desired commands to the menu.

8.

Click Close.

9.

You must restart Tekla Structures to activate the menu. The menu name is always User.

See also Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 52).

Defining shortcuts If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will find it faster than using the icons and menus. To assign a shortcut to a command:

Valid shortcut keys

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Click on the command on the list on the left of the dialog box. Use the Filter list box to find commands easily. Click to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the commands available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to search for commands.

3.

Use the Shortcut fields to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys.

4.

Copy the command to the User menu to activate the shortcut. See Creating a user-defined menu (p. 53).

5.

Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box.

You can use the following keys in shortcuts:

• •

A–Z

•

F1–F24

•

Left, Right Up, Down

•

Backspace, Enter, Esc, Tab

0–9




53

•

Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down

•

Numpad 0–9

•

Numpad */+-, (Multiply, Divide, Add, Subtract, Decimal)

To define, for example, + as a shortcut, enter add in the Shortcut field:

Restart Tekla Structures. To execute the command, use the + key on the Numpad. The same procedure applies for Multiply, Divide, Subtract and Decimal. Tekla Structures also includes many predefined shortcuts. See Appendix E, Reserved shortcuts (p. 419).

1.6 Optimizing system performance There are various settings in Tekla Structures that you can modify to improve system performance, which is particularly useful when you are handling large and complex models. Topics

Virtual memory (p. 54) Display adaptor (p. 54) Solid buffer size (p. 55) How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 55)

Virtual memory You will probably need to adjust the virtual memory settings in Windows to optimize system performance. The amount of virtual memory you need depends on the size of the model, and the processes you are using. (For example, saving in multi-user mode is more memory-intensive than in single user mode.)

To prevent data loss, always use identical values for the Initial size and Maximum size of virtual memory.

Display adaptor Tekla Structures makes use of OpenGL technology, if your display adaptor supports it. You may need to indicate that your display adaptor does not support OpenGL technology. Indications can be: objects displayed incorrectly, or difficulty selecting objects. 1. 2.

54

Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced options dialog box. In the Model view category, set the variable XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING to TRUE.




3.

Restart Tekla Structures.

Solid buffer size To improve performance in large models, try increasing the solid buffer size using the variable XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE. This results in Tekla Structures keeping more solids in memory, so it does not have to continuously recreate them. This technique uses a little extra memory, but can result in significant increases in speed. In one example, increasing the solid buffer size from 5000 to 20000 decreased the time taken to run the numbering routine by 80%. This variable affects many aspects of modeling, drawings and numbering.

If you increase the solid buffer to a size that exceeds the available memory, Tekla Structures uses the hard drive. This slows down the system significantly. Trial and error is the best way to optimize the solid buffer size. See also How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 55).

How Tekla Structures handles solids One of the factors that affect performance is the number of verteces in objects. For instance, tubes, particularly if they are curved, usually contain a large number of verteces, as can large numbers of round cuts. The key to optimizing performance in these circumstances is to manipulate the settings that affect how Tekla Structures handles solids. Techniques you can try include:

www.cadfamily.com

•

Try setting the variable XS_ROUND_SEGMENTS=21. This results in fewer segment in round cross sections, up to 50% of the original load.

•

Minimize the number of curved segments in curved beams. A value of 20 or less is usually adequate for the bottom chords. See Bending.

•

Maximize solid buffer size. See Solid buffer size (p. 55).

•

Minimize the number of views, when you create assembly drawings. For instance, avoid using automatic section view creation in an assembly drawing with many tubes. When Tekla Structures creates the cuts, the solids are are actually cut in the drawing, which is time-consuming.

•

When you create assembly drawings, minimize the number of dimensions, as searching for dimension points in tubes is time-consuming. Avoid using automatic dimensioning in trusses. See Dimensioning.

•

It is much faster to use fast, or reference line parts and fast hole and bolt representation. When you want an exact view of the parts, either minimize the work area first, or only the objects you want Tekla Structures to draw with exact lines. See Display.




55

56




2

Introduction

Multi-user mode

You can work on Tekla Structures models in either single-user or multi-user mode. Multi-user mode allows several users to access the same model at the same time. Several users can work on the same project and be aware of the others’ progress. This eliminates the need for copying and merging models. This chapter describes how to set up a multi-user system and how to work in multi-user mode.

Assumed background

You need some experience using the Tekla Structures Model Editor.

Contents


• •

Multi-user mode (p. 57)

•

Drawings in multi-user mode (p. 73)

•

Maintenance procedures (p. 74)

•

Access rights (p. 75)

Modeling in multi-user mode (p. 67)

2.1 Multi-user mode This section explains how multi-user mode works, and how to set up and use Tekla Structures in multi-user mode.

Tekla Structures multi-user mode only runs on TCP/IP-based networks.

Topics

When to use multi-user mode (p. 58) Overview of the multi-user system (p. 59) How multi-user works (p. 60)

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Multi-user mode

57

Setting up the multi-user system (p. 61) Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62) Shutting down the model (p. 64) Copying multi-user models (p. 64) Error messages (p. 65) Recommendations (p. 66)

When to use multi-user mode You can use Tekla Structures in either single-user or multi-user mode. In single-user mode, only one user can work on a model at one time. When modeling a large project, multi-user mode allows many users to work on a model simultaneously. Advantages

Other issues to consider

• •

No duplicate models to control, track or store

•

Erection plans based on a single master model

•

Bolt and material lists generated from a single master model

•

Ability to share the workload of large projects among many users

•

Ability to collect model history (see XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY in the online help)

Less interfacing reduces onsite errors

As with all projects, you need to plan your multi-user project carefully. Some issues to consider are:

• •

Only one user can save to the master model at a time

•

Schedule numbering sessions appropriately (it can take some time to number larger models)

•

If possible, assign distinct areas of the model to each user.

•

You should never use a mix of single-user and multi-user setups on one project. Saving a multi-user model in single-user mode deletes changes by other users working on the model, and can also corrupt the model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62) to find out how saving works in multi-user mode.

Use a numbering plan

Switching between single-user and multi-user modes You can easily switch between single-user and multi-user modes by using the different options in the Open dialog box. To open a multi-user model in single-user mode: 1. 2.

In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model. Right-click and select Open as single-user model from the pop-up menu.

To open a single-user model in multi-user mode:

Changing the server

58

1. 2.

In the Open dialog box, select the single-user model. Right-click and select Open as multi-user model from the pop-up menu.

3.

Tekla Structures asks for the name of the server. In the Open as multi-user model dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.

To change the Tekla Structures server of a multi-user model: 1.

In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.


Multi-user mode www.cadfamily.com



2.

Right-click and select Change server from the pop-up menu.

3.

Tekla Structures asks for the name of the new server. In the Change server dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.

If you change the server of a model, but the connection to the new server cannot be established, the old connection is restored.

The file .This_is_multiuser_model located in the model folder defines whether the model is a multi-user or a single-user model. The file includes also the name of the server. You can open the file using any standard text editor. For more information on the multi-user mode, see Multi-user Mode.

See also

Overview of the multi-user system A Tekla Structures multi-user system runs on a TCP/IP network and consists of:

• •

A server computer running xs_server.exe

•

Client computers running Tekla Structures

A file server computer containing the master model

We recommend that you only run one Tekla Structures server on a network.

The Tekla Structures server The Tekla Structures server program performs these main tasks:

• •

Distributes ID numbers for new objects

•

Identifies client computers

Locks the model when somebody saves or numbers the model

To optimize the performance of a multi-user system, run as few other programs as possible on the Tekla Structures server. This ensures that it processes network requests for object ID numbers efficiently. Server shutdown

Users should save their working models to the master model before the Tekla Structures server is shut down. If the server closes down before saving the working models, simply restart it, then have users save their working models to the master model.

See also

How multi-user works (p. 60) Setting up the multi-user system (p. 61)

www.cadfamily.com




59

How multi-user works

The multi-user model consists of a single master model. Each user can access this model and open their own local view of the model. This local view is called a working model. The above image shows one possible configuration of the multi-user system. Any changes a user makes to his working model are local and are not visible to other users until he saves the working model to the master model. The multi-user system can contain several client computers, where users work on their working models. The master model can be located anywhere on the network, including any of the client computers. When you open a multi-user model on a client computer, Tekla Structures makes a copy of the master model and saves it locally on the client computer (a working model). When you click Save to save your working model back to the master model, Tekla Structures: 1. 2.

Takes a new copy of the master model and compares your working model with it. Saves the changes in your working model to the copy of the master model (locally).

3.

Saves this copy back to the master model. (Other users can now see your changes.)

4.

Takes a new copy of the master model and saves it locally as your working model. (You can see your own changes and those uploaded by other users.)

Locking To preserve the integrity of the multi-user model, Tekla Structures locks the master model when a user:

• •

Opens the multi-user model

•

Runs numbering

Saves a plan model to the master model

When you try to save the model when it is locked, Tekla Structures gives you an option to queue for saving until the model is unlocked.

60





If you click Yes, Tekla Structures displays the following message:

Tekla Structures will keep on retrying every 15 seconds until the operation is completed or until you click Cancel. See also

Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62)

Setting up the multi-user system The following steps outline how to set up a multi-user system: 1.

Set up one computer to run the Tekla Structures server program, xs_server.exe. This program must be launched before anybody opens the multi-user model in Tekla Structures. The xs_server.exe program is installed by default in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\MultiUserServer\.

2.

In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures Multi-user server > Tekla Structures Server to start the Tekla Structures server program.

3.

Users can now start working on their copies of the multi-user model.

4.

Check the DOS window created by xs_server.exe to check that it is running. This shows all the server activity (for example, who has a model open, etc.).

You can also:

• •

Run the server program from the command prompt using the same command. Click Start on the taskbar, select Run... and then type the command shown in the box above.

We recommend that you make it a common practice to update the xs_server.exe also when updating the client computers with the latest version of Tekla Structures.

See also

Overview of the multi-user system (p. 59) How multi-user works (p. 60)

www.cadfamily.com




61

Saving in multi-user mode Tekla Structures multi-user mode uses a flexible master model and plan model concept, rather than more limiting ’file-locking’ technology. See How multi-user works (p. 60) for more information.

Save Tekla Structures preserves the integrity of the model, even if more than one user edits the same model objects. If two users modify the same object, then save to the master model, the master model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model.

To avoid potential save conflicts, have users work on different areas of the model.

If Tekla Structures detects conflicts in the multi-user model when you are saving the model before exiting, it asks if you wish to review the conflicts before exiting.

Tekla Structures creates connections to the right parts, even if the part is moved by another user.

Autosave Autosave (p. 48) only saves to your computer, and does not reload the master model. Other users do not see the modifications you make after an Autosave. In multi-user mode, this makes Autosave much faster than the Save command. Save updates the master model. To save quickly during a Tekla Structures session: 1.

Go to Tools > Options > Options... > General, and define Autosave intervals for operations performed in the Drawing Editor or while modeling in Autosave. Periodically autosave the model manually.

2.

To do so,

•

create a shortcut for the Autosave command, see Defining shortcuts (p. 53) OR

•

add the command to a toolbar, see Toolbars (p. 51).

Remember to save regularly to the master model by clicking Save.

See also

Error messages (p. 65) Copying multi-user models (p. 64)

62





Saving model revision comments You can save model revision comments when working with multi-user models. This means that all objects which have been changed during the last save interval include the revision information in them. You can use this information in filtering and reports.

Preconditions

Set the variable XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Multi-user. Set the variable XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Speed and Accuracy.

www.cadfamily.com

1.

When you have set the variables mentioned above to TRUE, Tekla Structures displays the Model revision comments dialog box when you are saving the model. Enter the desired revision comment and code in the Model revision comment and Model revision code fields.

2.

Click OK.




63

Tekla Structures applies the values of this dialog box to parts that were changed after the last save. When you inquire objects, you can see the model revision information in the Inquire Object dialog box. You can use this information also for selection and view filtering.

To disable the saving model revision comments, add it to the user.ini file without a value. For more information see Disabling variables in an initialization file (p. 81).

Shutting down the model Do not shut down the computer containing the master model while other users are working on their working models. They will not be able to save their changes to the master model. If this does happen, to avoid losing any changes, follow the steps below:

See also

1. 2.

Keep the working model(s) open on the client computer(s). Restart the computer containing the master model.

3.

Open the master model on the computer containing it and autosave the model.

4.

Click Save on the client computers to save the working models to the master model.

Save (p. 62) Autosave (p. 62)

Copying multi-user models To copy a multi-user model: 1. 2.

Have all users quit the master model. Click File > Open, right-click the multi-user model and select Open as single-user model.

3.

Use Save as to make a copy of the multi-user model.

4.

Exit Tekla Structures and re-open the model in multi-user mode to continue working on it.

Displaying active multi-users You can display information on users working on the same server. To do this: 1.

Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...

The Active Multi-Users dialog box displays the following information:

64

Field

Description

Locked

The time when the model was locked.

Model name

The name of the model.

User

Users that are currently working on models on the server.

Latest login

The time when the users have logged in.

Latest access to server

The time when the users have last accessed the server.





Field

Description

Editing drawings

The drawings that are currently being edited.

Edited drawings

The drawings that have been edited and saved to the server.

The Active Multi-Users dialog box is refreshed every 30 seconds. You can refresh it immediately by clicking Refresh.

Clearing locks You can clear the locks of objects from other users in the multi-user server. Preconditions

To use this feature you need to define the action AllowMultiuserKick and give full permissions to the users that may clear locks in the file privileges.inp located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\*your_environment\inp. To clear the locks of a user:

Usage

1. 2.

Click Tools > Active Multi-Users... Right-click a user whose locks you want to clear and select Clear locks from the pop-up menu.

Result

Using this command removes all the locks the user has on objects. This means that if an application error has occurred on the user’s computer, the locks on locked objects can be cleared.

See also

Locks for drawings (p. 74)

Error messages This section describes the error messages you might come across when you work in multi-user mode, their probable causes, and possible solutions.

www.cadfamily.com




65

Error message

Problem

Solution

Database write conflicts detected

More than one user has changed an object.

Check the conflict.log. It lists the ID numbers of the objects that more than one user has changed. This is not usually a critical problem. No need to use the Check database tool. See also Save (p. 62).

Could not save model. Disk is full or write protected.

You tried to save a multiuser model to a computer or folder that you could not access.

•

Check that the computer where you want to save the model is switched on.

•

Check that you have permission to write to the model folder.

•

Check that there is enough disk space to save the model.

•

Restart the computer where you want to save the model. Try to save the model again.

Database locked cannot open model

Computer crashed while saving the model, which locks the model.

To unlock the model, the user whose system crashed should open the model in multi-user mode and save it.

Recommendations Here are some recommendations on how to optimize your multi-user setup.

Server computer The Tekla Structures server does not have a high workload and can be run on a relatively low specification computer. You do not need a commercial network file server. Its main task is to process network requests for object ID numbers. See The Tekla Structures server (p. 59) for more information.

Client computer Have as much RAM as possible (128 Mb minimum). This speeds up saving in multi-user mode. See Save (p. 62) to find out more about the multi-user save process. We also recommend using a fast processor, particularly for computers where you run numbering. LVD (Low Voltage Differential) drives speed up the saving and opening of models, if the system does not have to use virtual memory (or file swapping to the hard disk).

66





Network Ensure that the TCP/IP protocols are set correctly:

• •

Each PC on the same network has a unique ID number Each PC on the same network has an identical Subnet mask

To find the IP address of a computer, type ipconfig at the DOS prompt. In Windows 2000 you can also use Control panel > System > Network identification.

Model dump Do not import model dumps in multi-user mode.

2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode This section describes aspects of modeling in Tekla Structures that are specific to multi-user mode. Topics

Working with a master model (p. 67) Numbering setup (p. 71) Numbering – specific cases (p. 72)

Working with a master model Before you start a project, assign each user an area of the model. To prevent potential save conflicts, you need to avoid having more than one user working on the same, or adjacent model objects. See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62). Example

If three users are to model a project, User #1 could model columns, User #2 the 1st floor beams, and User #3 the 2nd floor beams. In the following example, three users are working on the same model. You can see how modeling and saving works in practice. The master model contains columns and grids, as you can see here. Each user opens the model in multi-user mode. All users are now working on working models, locally.

www.cadfamily.com




67

On the working models: User #1 adds base plates to the columns:

User #2 adds and connects the 1st floor steel beams:

68





User #3 adds and connects the 2nd floor steel beams:

User #1 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows the base plates he added and looks like this:

www.cadfamily.com




69

User #2 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows his 1st floor framing and and User #1’s base plates:

User #3 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows all three users’s work:

70





To see the updated master model, Users #1 and #2 need to save to the master model again to update their working models.

Numbering setup We strongly recommend that you do not carry out numbering on more than one computer working on the multi-user model, but if you do so, number newly created parts before saving to the master model. This is because numbering modifies the part. If you save unnumbered parts and continue working with them, some other user may number the model, including your new parts, and save to the master model, and thus overwrite your modifications. To lock the master model and allow the other users continue working during numbering: 1. 2.

Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings.... In the Numbering setup dialog box, select the Synchronize with master model (savenumbering-save) check box. When you select this check box, you can cancel the numbering before the last save is made. This is useful, for example, if you want to check the numbering results and you find something that you still want to change.

3.

Modify the other properties as required.

4.

Click OK. Tekla Structures will now save the model before and after you run full numbering, or number modified parts.

When you run numbering by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number All Parts (Full Numbering), Tekla Structures displays a list that shows the numbering progress. When the numbering is finished, the changed numbering results are highlighted in the list.

www.cadfamily.com




71

When you select an item on the list, Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding object(s) in the model. If you keep the F key pressed when you select the item, Tekla Structures fits the work area of the current view around the objects. If the numbering results are correct, click Save numbers to make the second save. To cancel the numbering before the second save, click Cancel. If you cancel the numbering, the model is returned to the state before numbering and standard files are read to all dialogs. To review the numbering results further, click Stop timer. To change the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save, use the variable XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME.

Adjusting the variable XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE in Tekla Structures can improve numbering speed.

See also

Controlling access to numbering setup (p. 78)

Numbering – specific cases If you need to include numbering information from areas in the model that have been modeled by other users:

72

1. 2.

Save your working model. Ask all the other users to save their working models. This updates the master model.

3.

Number the model. Make sure that the Synchronize with master model (savenumbering-save) checkbox is selected in the Numbering setup dialog box (see Numbering setup (p. 71)). This updates each working model, numbers the master model, and then saves the numbered master model for all users to access.





If you create drawings and/or reports after numbering, you need to save the master model again to make them visible to other users.

2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode The multi-user environment is very useful when several users are simultaneously editing drawings. This section describes aspects of drawing production that are specific to multi-user mode. Topics

About drawing files (p. 73) Guidelines for multi-user drawings (p. 73)

About drawing files Tekla Structures saves each drawing in a unique file. These drawing files are located in the drawing folder in the master model folder.

The file is in the format D0000123456.dg. dg files are part of the model, so you can only open them using the Tekla Structures drawing editor. dg files contain the locations of views, details of any editing done to the drawing, and the positions of dimensions, part marks, and text. The dg filename does not contain any reference to assembly, part, or multi-drawing numbers. If two users open and save the same drawing in their working models, then save their changes to the master model, one set of changes will be lost. The master model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62). The Tekla Structures server program xs_server.exe assigns the general arrangement drawing numbers automatically. This means that each drawing gets the first free number available. If users A and B both create a general arrangement drawing at the same time, they are automatically assigned different numbers. The same applies to multi-drawing numbers.

Guidelines for multi-user drawings You may find the following guidelines useful when you edit or check drawings:

www.cadfamily.com




73

Action

Recommendation

Saving drawings

Periodically save your working model to the master model (every 5–10 drawings).

Editing drawings

•

Assign each user a different range of drawings to edit.

•

Lock finalized drawings.

•

If Tekla Structures displays the message Database write conflicts detected and a drawing ID number, two or more users have opened and saved the same drawing. See About drawing files (p. 73).

Checking drawings

Only check locked drawings.

Printing drawings

Make sure that no-one else is working with the same drawing. If you print a drawing while someone else is editing it and then save the model, the other user’s changes will be lost, even though you have not opened, modified, or saved the drawing. You can disable the print date by using the variable XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE.

Creating GA drawings

Create and assign blank GA drawings to each user. This prevents users overwriting each others changes, or creating GA drawings with the same name.

Locks for drawings When you are about to open a drawing, Tekla Structures displays a notification on the status of the drawing. The options are:

• •

Someone is already editing it.

•

The drawing has already been saved and there is a newer version available on the server.

Someone has already edited it (drawing has been saved to their computer, but not yet to the server).

Locks for drawings are only used when a drawing is edited manually, not for example when drawings are automatically edited through cloning.

See also

Clearing locks (p. 65)

2.4 Maintenance procedures This section contains advice on maintaining your multi-user model. Topics

74

Checking multi-user databases (p. 75)





Deleting unnecessary dg files (p. 75)

Checking multi-user databases To preserve the integrity of your multi-user model, you need to remove any inconsistencies from the multi-user database at least once a day. This may also fix assemblies with no main part and drawings of unknown (U) type. To remove inconsistencies from a multi-user database: 1. 2.

Have all other users exit the multi-user model. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Diagnose Model.

3.

Save the model.

4.

Exit the model.

We recommend that you check the multi-user databases regularly.

Deleting unnecessary dg files Every time you update a drawing,Tekla Structures creates a new drawing (.dg) file in the drawings sub-folder of the model. After that, the previous drawing file is not used. You can have the unnecessary drawing files deleted automatically when the last user exits the model and saves the model. To do this, set the variable XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DRAWINGS to TRUE in the global_default_env.ini file located in the ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-independent folder.

For additional safety, drawing files that are less than seven days old are not deleted.

2.5 Access rights You can protect user-defined attributes using privileges. You can also protect your model and drawings from accidental changes using a lock attribute. Using the lock attribute and privileges together you can even restrict some users or organizations from modifying your model. For example, you can limit access to the model so that a checker can only change status attributes. Or you could prevent certain users from changing the user-defined attributes used for approval or manufacturing and erection status. Topics

Locking objects (p. 76) Controlling access to attributes (p. 76) Restricting access to model (p. 77)

www.cadfamily.com




75

Locking objects To protect objects from being accidentally changed, you can use a user-defined attribute called a lock attribute. You can use it for:

• •

parts (separately for beams, columns etc.)

•

welds

•

specific drawing types

•

project properties

•

phase properties

bolts

The lock attribute has two values, Yes and No. When set to Yes, the object is locked and you cannot modify its properties. You can only change the object’s user-defined attributes that do not affect numbering. If you try to modify a locked object, Tekla Structures shows the message "There are locked objects, see report. The operation could not be performed." and a report on access rights. To add the lock attribute to the user interface, you need to add the following line in the object’s section in the objects.inp: objects.inp attribute("OBJECT_LOCKED", "Locked:", option,"%s", none, none, "0.0", "0.0") { value("No", 1) value("Yes", 0) }

For more information on objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 98) and Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101).

Controlling access to attributes Use the privileges.inp file to control access to user-defined attributes. It is a standard text file that you can open using any text editor. Tekla Structures searches for the file first in the current model folder, then in the folder defined by the variable XS_INP. Below is an example file: privileges.inp attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYA/full attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYB/view attribute:APPROVED_BYeveryonenone attribute:STATUSCOMPANYB/full attribute:STATUSCOMPANYA/view attribute:STATUSeveryonenone

Each row contains three columns, separated by tabs:

76





Column

Option

Description

protected userdefined attribute

attribute:name

Affects the user-defined attribute "name". Check the exact spelling of the name in the objects.inp.

user

everyone

All users

domain/

Affects all users within the network domain "domain".

domain/nn

Affects the user "nn" in the network domain "domain".

nn

Affects the user "nn".

full

User can change the user-defined attribute.

view

User can view the user-defined attribute, but not change it. The field is grayed out to the user.

none

The user-defined attribute is hidden from the user.

rights

If you do not set any privileges, all users have full rights. Tekla Structures checks the privilege defaults in the input file privileges.inp when you create a model, and each time you open a model. Changing rights

If you need to the change the privileges, just change the privileges.inp file and re-open the model. However, you can only change the privileges of the objects the organization owns.

Only the person who created the model can modify its privileges.inp file.

Restricting access to model To prevent a user from changing object properties, set their access to the lock attribute to none in the privileges.inp. In this example, privileges.inp gives the users "man" and "man2" full rights to lock and unlock objects, but hides that attribute from everybody else: privileges.inp attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDeveryonenone attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDmanfull attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDman2full

To protect other user-defined attributes, you need to list them in the privileges.inp.

See also

www.cadfamily.com

Locking objects (p. 76)




77

Controlling access to attributes (p. 76)

Controlling access to numbering setup To prevent unauthorized users from modifying the numbering settings, restrict their access to the numbering properties in the privileges.inp file.

Users can still run numbering even if they have no privilege to modify the numbering settings.

To control access to the numbering properties: 1.

Usage

Open the privileges.inp file in any text editor. The file is located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\inp folder.

2.

Make the required changes in the file. You can set values to the attribute action:PartnumbersOptions.

The option view cannot be used for controlling access to the numbering properties.

3.

Save the file.

Result

If a user who has no privilege to modify properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box tries to access the dialog box, Tekla Structures displays a warning message, which states that the user does not have the required privilege.

Example

In this example, only the administrator can modify the properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box: privileges.inp action:PartnumbersOptions everyone action:PartnumbersOptions ORGANIZATION\admin

See also

78






none full

3

Introduction

Files and Folders

This chapter explains where Tekla Structures stores information. It describes the file types Tekla Structures contains and how to use files to customize Tekla Structures. You will also find out how to use model, project and firm folders effectively. It also explains how the initialization files work and how you can use them to customize Tekla Structures. This chapter also includes information on the various log files and how to interpret them.

Assumed background

We assume that you have experience using Windows Explorer to manage files and folders. You should also know how to use a standard file editor, such as Wordpad.

Organization


• •

Initialization files (p. 79)

•

Folders (p. 92)

•

Customizing Tekla Structures (p. 98)

•

Log files (p. 110)

File types and function (p. 85)

3.1 Initialization files Initialization files are used to launch Tekla Structures. They can contain many variables that you can use to configure Tekla Structures for different standards and your own style of working. Tekla Structures automatically creates the necessary initialization files during installation.The number of initialization files it creates depends on how many country-specific environments you choose to install. We recommend that you make all your customizations in the user.ini file, which is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin folder. This way the customizations are kept when you install the next version of Tekla Structures. Topics

About variables (p. 80) Structure (p. 81)

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Files and Folders

79

Creating shortcuts (p. 83) See also

Appendix C, Variables (p. 285)

About variables Tekla Structures contains two kinds of variables, user variables and system variables. User variables

User variables set your personal preferences, for example the appearance of the Tekla Structures window. Tekla Structures saves user variable settings in the options_.ini file, located in the TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin folder.

System variables

options.ini contains the settings for system variables. It is located in the current model folder. To share your settings with other people, copy options.ini to the system, project or firm folders.

If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when you change a variable setting,

Setting variables Use variables to configure Tekla Structures to suit the way you work, or to comply with specific project requirements or industry standards. You can set variables by: Using the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 80) OR Editing the user.ini file (p. 80) We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set variables. The variable settings in the Advanced options dialog box override those in the initialization files.

If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when you change a variable setting.

Using the Advanced Options dialog box To set a variable using the Advanced Options dialog box: 1. 2.

Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced Options dialog box. Browse the categories to find the variable you want to set.

3.

Set the variable, then click Apply or OK in the Advanced Options dialog box.

Editing the user.ini file To set a variable in the user.ini file: 1.

Locate the variable in the ..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin\user.ini file. Check that it is set and has the value you want to use.

• •

80

If it is has, you can stop here. To change or add the variable, follow steps 2 to 5.


Files and Folders www.cadfamily.com



2.

Right-click the ..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin\user.ini file in Windows Explorer and click Open with.... Select a standard text editor from the list of available programs.

3.

On a new line, type set, then the name of the variable followed by its value in a single line. Tekla Structures only reads lines in the initialization file that start with set, for example, set XS_DIR=C:\TeklaStructures\ 14.0.

4.

Save user.ini.

5.

Restart Tekla Structures to activate the variable.

You must restart Tekla Structures after changing the initialization file for the changes to take effect.

Different variables use different switches in Tekla Structures. To check which switch a variable uses, check Appendix C, Variables (p. 285).

Switc h

Value

TRUE FALSE

Example set XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID=TRUE set XS_DIMENSION_DIRECTION_REVERSED=FALSE

1

On

set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=1

0

Off

set XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS=0

string

set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_ symbol_table.txt

number

set XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE=12

Disabling variables in an initialization file To disable a variable, add it to the user.ini file without a value. Do not add any spaces or characters after the equals sign. See the example below: set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=

In previous versions you could disable a variable by adding "rem" before it. This does not disable the variable, if the same variable is set in the other initialization files. rem set XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave

Structure This section describes the location and folder and hierarchical structure of different initialization files.

www.cadfamily.com




81

teklastructures.ini in the bin folder calls the other initialization files in the environments subfolders. Add your own settings to user.ini in the bin folder. teklastructures.in i

The file teklastructures.ini in the bin folder starts Tekla Structures.

env_global_defau lt.ini

The file env_global_default.ini is used as a default for all environments. New options can be added in this file until they are localized and specified differently in environment-specific initialization files.

env_.ini

The env_.ini files in the environments subfolders contain all the variables that have environment-specific settings.

user.ini

The user.ini file is where you save your personal settings. The variables in user.ini override those in other ini files. For example, if you have set the same variable in an .ini file in a file in environments subfolder and the user.ini file, Tekla Structures uses the value in the user.ini file.

See Variables (p. 285) for details of all variables.

Default settings

teklastructures.ini and the .ini files in the environmentssub folders contain default settings. Tekla Structures creates them automatically during installation. We recommend that you do not modify these files.

Initialization file reading order The initialization files are read in the following order during startup:

82





1. 2.

Program settings: .../nt/bin/TeklaStructures.ini Language-specific settings: .../nt/bin/lang_.ini

3.

Environment and other settings: all .ini files given as program startup parameters (in the given order)

The variable settings in the user.bat file override those in the batch files contained in the environment and language folders.

Creating customized initialization files You can create customer-specific initialization files that include custom settings particular to each customer, a company and/or a single project. You can also create customized initialization files for multi-user mode as needed. To do this: 1.

2. 3.

Open the user.ini file located in the folder..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin using any standard text editor. Save the file with the required name, such as customer.inior project.ini. Edit the file by adding the required customer settings. Save the modified initialization file.

Including other initialization files Initialization files can include or call other initialization files. You can use this functionality to create shortcuts for different purposes, for example to have different setup files depending on the client you are working for in a project such as fabricators. Below is an example of a project initialization file that calls other initialization files. MyProject.ini: // The project is based on the default US imperial settings call c:\TeklaStructures\13.1\environments\usimp\env_usimp.ini // ..but our company policy requires these changes call c:\CompanySettings\OurPolicy.ini // ..and the fabricator requires something call c:\Fabricators\Fabricator1.ini // ..and then we let users to make some changes (bg color etc.) call c:\Users\user_%USERNAME%.ini

The project shortcut for MyProject: C:\TeklaStructures\13.1\nt\bin\TeklaStructures.exe -i \\MyServer\MyProject\MyProject.ini \\MyServer\MyProject\MyModel\MyModel.db1

Creating shortcuts Shortcuts are used to start teklastructures.exe with defined initializations. The Tekla Structures installation automatically creates shortcuts for the selected environments. To create a project-specific shortcut:

www.cadfamily.com

1.

Make a copy of the default shortcut. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures 14.0 > Tekla Structures 14.0 and right-click.

2. 3.

Select Copy from the pop-up menu. Paste the shortcut to your desktop.




83

4. 5. 6.

Select the shortcut and right-click. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu. Modify the Target of the shortcut by adding the required project initializations to it.

You can use the following parameters in shortcuts:

•

-i InitializationFile: Initialization file to be read during startup, for example: -i \\MyServer\MyProject\Project1.ini. You can repeat this parameter as many times

as you need.

•

ModelToBeOpened: Full path to the model to be opened automatically.

The maximum length of a shortcut is 256 characters. If you have problems with this, you can include other necessary initialization files from your project initialization file instead of adding them to the shortcut. For more information see Including other initialization files (p. 83).

84





3.2 File types and function This section describes the various types of file Tekla Structures uses and explains their uses and location. Input files (p. 85)

Topics

Data files (p. 86) DSTV connection properties (p. 89) Messages (p. 89) Profiles (p. 90) Bin (p. 91) Fonts (p. 91) Symbols (p. 91) System (p. 92)

Input files Tekla Structures uses input files to control dialog boxes, as well as how components work. All input files have the extension inp.

www.cadfamily.com

File

Description

More information

objects.inp

Controls the user-defined attributes

Adding properties (p. 98)

profitab.inp

Contains available parametric profiles

Customizing parametric profiles (p. 104)

fltprops.inp

Includes materials and dimensions of available flat bars

Using flat bars (p. 108)

pop_mark_parts. inp

Contains settings for popmarking

Pop-mark settings (p. 179)

privileges.inp

Controls access rights.


rebar_config.in p

Contains settings for reinforcement marks

rebar_schedule_ config.inp

Contains internal bending types of reinforcing bars and their mapping to area specific bending codes..

component_confi g.inp

Contains settings for the representation and marking of cast-in fittings

analysis_design _config.inp

Contains settings for analysis and design



Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469)


85

Component description files Tekla Structures uses component description files to define the properties of system components. As a general rule, you should not modify these files, as they affect the operation of system components. See When to modify. These files are located in the folder: ..\applications\steel1\ and ..\applications\steel2\ There is one input file for each component toolbar. For example, xs_page_10.inp controls the components on toolbar 10. When to modify

You will only need to modify component description files in the following circumstances:

•

If you add step profiles to the steps.dat file, you should change the xs_page_10.inp file to reflect those changes. If you do not, Tekla Structures will not display the changes in the Steps dialog box. See also Example 1: Stairs (S82).

•

If you modify the Stanchion connection type used in handrailing (1024). See Example 2: Handrailing (1024) for more information.

Data files Tekla Structures reads data files from the system folder. See System folder (p. 96). These files contains data used by certain modeling tools and details. They are:

86

File

Description

joints.dat

Contains the data used in detail 1024 and modeling tool S76. Used in the Stanchion connection type field

railings.dat

Contains the data for railing detail 1025. This information is used in the the railing type field.

stairs.dat

Contains the data for the modeling tool S83. Used in the Stair type field

steps.dat

Contains the data for modeling tool S82. Used in the Step profile field

std_flange_plate s.dat

Contains the detail used in modeling tool S99. Used in the fields:

• •

Outer flange profile

•

Top plate profile

Inner flange profile

std_stiffener_pl ates.dat

Contains the data used in modeling tool S99. Used in the Horizontal stiffener profile field

marketsize.dat

Contains available market sizes for certain material grade. Can be used with fMarketSize() function in the custom component editor. See also Using market sizes (p. 109).





These files affect the operation of modeling tools and details.

Data files and modeling tools Here are two examples of how data files and modeling tools work together.

You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file.

Example 1: Stairs (S82)

The modeling tool Stairs (S82) is on component toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file xs_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 86). The entry for Stairs (S82) in the xs_page_10.inp file starts: attribute("step_index", "j_step_profile", option,"%s", none, none,"0.0", "0.0")

Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Step profile field in the Tekla Structures Stairs (82) dialog box: { value("DEFAULT", 1) value("PLAIN50x200", value("PLAIN50x210", value("PLAIN50x220", value("PLAIN50x300", etc...

0) 0) 0) 0)

Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file steps.dat. It reads the information in by line number, not name.

Do not change the line order in data files or modeling tool description files.

The option PLAIN50X200 in the Step profile field in the Stairs (S82) dialog box appears on line two of the xs_page_10.inp file. If you pick this option, Tekla Structures reads in the information from line 2 of the steps.dat file.

www.cadfamily.com




87

Line 2

You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file.

Example 2: Handrailing (1024)

Handrailing detail 1024 is on toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file xs_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 86). The entry for handrailing 1024 in the file xs_page_10.inp starts: tab_page("","jd_Parameters",3) { attribute("cut2", "j_railing_type", option, "%s", none, none, "0.0","0.0")

88





Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Stanchion connection type field in the Handrailing (1024) and Stanchions (S76) dialog boxes: value("j_Default", 2) value("j_auto", 1) value("j_MONO_S", 0) value("j_MONO_SC", 0) value("j_MONO_SO", 0) etc...

Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file joints.dat. It reads the information in by line number, not name.

Do not change the line order in data files or component description files.

The joints.dat file contains the following fields:

Field

Description

index

For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by line number, not index number

name

For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by line number, not name

joint number

Number of the connection to use

attribute name

Name of the connection attribute file to use

updirection origin type

If railing type and stringer collide use COLLISION, otherwise use MIDDLE

double bolts

0 indicates that the connection only uses one bolt group 1 indicates that the connection uses two bolt groups

DSTV connection properties The file ..\environments\country-independent\inp\dstv.lis contains the properties for different DSTV standard connections.

Do not change this file, as the information it contains is based on European standards.

Messages Tekla Structures uses the information in the message files to display messages in the user interface. The message files for different languages are located in ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\messages.

www.cadfamily.com




89

All message files have the file extension ail.

See also Customizing message files (p. 102).

Profiles Tekla Structures uses ASCII and binary files to manage profiles. Each environment has its own profile folder. For example, ..\environments\europe\profil\ contains the files for managing European profiles. You can edit ASCII files using a standard text editor. Information in the binary files can only be changed via the user interface. This section describes the various file types in the ..\profil\ folder.

inp (ASCII) profitab.inp

The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles. Tekla Structures searches for this file in the standard search order (see Folder search order (p. 94)) and then the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file. See also Customizing parametric profiles (p. 104).

rebar_database.i np

The file rebar_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It includes both the standard bending radii and the standard hook dimensions. See also The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 142).

mesh_database.i np

The file mesh_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement meshes used in concrete structures. See also Reinforcement mesh.

cnv (ASCII) Tekla Structures uses the information in cnv files to convert materials and profiles when transferring model information using links. For example, when you use the PML or HLI links, Tekla Structures reads the cnv files from the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.

lis (ASCII) Tekla Structures creates lis files when you export bolt, profile and material catalogs. See also Merging profile catalogs (p. 128) and Merging bolt catalogs (p. 141).

Binary files Tekla Structures stores catalog information in the binary files, which have the file extension bin. Tekla Structures searches for these files in the following folder search order

90

• •

Model

•

Firm

•

Folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.

Project





This means that if Tekla Structures finds binary catalog files in the current model folder it does not use the catalogs located in the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.

If you want to make catalogs available to other users, we recommend that you save catalogs in the project or firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 96). These are the binary catalog files:

File

Description

assdb.db

Bolt assembly catalog

profdb.bin

Profile catalog

matdb.bin

Material catalog

screwdb.db

Bolt catalog

Bin The folder ..\nt\bin\ contains Tekla Structures executable files and the Symbol, Drawing, Report and Template Editors. It also contains some support files for Tekla Structures editors.

Fonts The variable DXK_FONTPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder. It includes the graphic fonts:

• •

romsim

•

fixfont

romco

The Template Editor always searches the folder indicated by the variable DXK_FONTPATH, even if you configure it to also search other folders. The variable TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE points to the the conversion file Tekla Structures uses to map Tekla Structures fonts to Windows fonts. Windows fonts must have the extension ttf and be located in the ..\windows\fonts folder.

Symbols The folder ..\environments\country-independent\symbols\ contains the Tekla Structures symbol files. There are two types of symbol files, sym and dwg. The Symbol Editor creates sym files. dwg files contain the symbols Tekla Structures displays in rendered views (for example, connection, point and origin symbols). The variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder.

www.cadfamily.com




91

The Template Editor always searches for symbols in the folder indicated by the variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH.

System The folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\system\ includes several file types:

rpt Report templates you create with the Template Editor.

tpl Drawing template files you create with the Template Editor.

lay Layout definitions you create with the Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout... option.

plotdev.bin This file contains the print device definitions you create using File > Print... > Printer Catalog.... See The printer catalog. The definitions in the system folder are accesible to all users. You can also save printer definitions in the current model folder or the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 96). Tekla Structures searches for plotdev.bin in the model, project and firm folders, then the folder indicated by the variable XS_DRIVER.

Wizard files (dproc) Tekla Structures wizard files automate drawing creation by performing a series of actions you would otherwise have to perform manually. Wizard files have the file extension dproc. Tekla Structures searches the system folder (see System folder (p. 96)) for wizard files. See also Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106).

3.3 Folders This section describes how Tekla Structures stores the files associated with a model and explains how to use folders to manage files, including those you customize to project and company specifications. Topics

Folder structure (p. 93) Folder search order (p. 94) Model folder (p. 95) System folder (p. 96) Project and firm folders (p. 96)

92





Template folder (p. 97)

Folder structure This is a quick reference to the default locations for folders and files discussed in this section. You will find more detailed information on files and folders throughout this chapter.

Catalog files System folder Firm folder Message files Bin folder Project folder Model folder

www.cadfamily.com




93

Folder search order When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the associated files in specific folders in a set order. It is important that you locate files in the correct folders. Once Tekla Structures finds the associated files, it stops searching. So files that have the same name but are located lower down the search order are ignored. The folder search order is:

Folder

Defined by

Current model

The open model

Project

variable XS_PROJECT

Firm

variable XS_FIRM

System

variable XS_SYSTEM

Tekla Structures does not search for certain files in exactly this order. The exceptions are listed below. The table also includes links to more information. The exceptions are:

File (type)

More information

objects.inp

Adding properties (p. 98)

*.dat files

Data files (p. 86)

Templates

Search order:

• •

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY

•

XS_PROJECT

•

XS_FIRM

•

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM

•

XS_SYSTEM

Model folder

For more information, see Template folder (p. 97) Catalogs

Profile, bolt, material and reinforcement catalogs. Search order:

• •

Model folder

•

XS_FIRM

•

Folder indicated by the variable

XS_PROJECT

XS_PROFDB

For more information, see Binary files (p. 90).

94





Do not use the system folder to store customizes files. You will avoid having problems or doing a lot of unecessary work when you upgrade. See System folder (p. 96) and Project and firm folders (p. 96).

Model folder Tekla Structures stores all files associated with a model in a folder it creates with the same name as the model database file (*.db1). In multi-user mode all users access the same model folder. To view the files in the model folder, click File > Open model folder.

Saved attributes When you change object properties, templates, reports, connections, etc. and then click Save or Save as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures saves the changed files in the current model folder in the attributes sub-folder. See also Project and firm folders (p. 96) and Folder search order (p. 94). Tekla Structures creates the following files in the model folder:

www.cadfamily.com

File/extension

Description

db1

The model database. Tekla Structures uses the filename without the extension to name the model folder.

db2

Numbering database. The filename without the extension should be the same as the model folder.

xslib.db1

Contains user-defined connections and details. Can be copied from one model folder to another.

xslib.db2

Stores numbering information.

xs_user.user_name

Contains interface settings for each user, such as drag and drop settings. See Mouse and pointer settings.

xsdb.xs

When you open a project database, Tekla Structures displays the name in the Open dialog box, if it finds this file in the current model folder.

bak

Tekla Structures saves a backup copy of the model databases each time you save the model. To restore a previous version of the model, rename the *.bak file to *.db1.




95

File/extension

Description

dg

Located in the sub-folder ..\drawings under the model folder. These are drawing files, which include information on how each drawing was created. Tekla Structures also stores information on current drawings in the model database. Opening or printing a drawing opens the corresponding *.dg file. Do not manually delete *.dg files. Tekla Structures deletes *.dg files when you delete a drawing.

xsr

Tekla Structures reports

nc1

Neutral files in DSTV format for NC tooling machines. The filename consists of the part mark and this extension. You can change the file extension in the NC files dialog box Tekla Structures displays when you click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files.... By default it is nc1.

Log files

See Log files (p. 110)

.This_is_multiuser_ model

Contains information about the PC running xs_server.exe. Do not alter or delete this file in normal circumstances. If, you move a model to a different server, you should delete this file. Tekla Structures generates a new file with the same name.

System folder The system folder contains templates for drawings and reports and object settings and properties. Files in the system folder are read-only. See Project and firm folders (p. 96) and Folder search order (p. 94). The location of the system folder is defined by the variable XS_SYSTEM in the initialization file.

Do not store customized files in the system folder. Tekla Structures may replace these files when you install a new release. This is not the case with files in the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 96).

Project and firm folders You can create project and firm folders for customized files. This is a useful technique if you want to store the files for future use, or want to retain them when you install a new release. Property files are always saved in the attributes folder under the current model folder, for example, ..\TeklaStructuresModels\my_building\attributes. You can copy these files to the project or firm folders. See Folder search order (p. 94) for important information on where to locate files.

96





Tekla Structures does not replace files in the project and firm folders when you install a new release, so you retain your customized files without having to cut and paste, or export and import from previous versions. Create firm and project folders for example on the same level as the Tekla Structures folder and make them available in all versions using variables: XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM.

Project folder The project folder is where you should store files you customize for a particular project.The location of the project folder is defined by the variable XS_PROJECT in the initialization file. See also Folder search order (p. 94). You need to create a project folder manually, then edit the variable XS_PROJECT to point to that folder.

Firm folder Use the firm folder to store files customized for a particular organization or company. The location of the firm folder is defined by the variable XS_FIRM in the initialization file. See also Folder search order (p. 94). You need to create a firm folder manually, then edit the variable XS_FIRM to point to it. Example

You regularly work for a company that has specific drawing layout standards it expects you to use. Customize the drawing templates once for the company and save them in a sub-folder located under the firm folder. You can then use the customized drawing templates for all future projects for that company. And all users can access the customized files.

Template folder Tekla Structures searches for the Template Editor v. 3.3 templates and reports in the following order:

Folder

Defined by variable

Folder containing your templates

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY

Model Project

XS_PROJECT

Firm

XS_FIRM

Environment-specific system templates

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM

System

XS_SYSTEM

To modify the variables, click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations. Tekla Structures searches for version 2.2 templates in two locations, in XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY and in the first folder containing templates:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

model

•

firm

•

system templates

•

system

project




97

When Tekla Structures finds a template in one of these folders, it stops searching.

3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures This section explains how to customize Tekla Structures. It covers the following subjects: Adding properties (p. 98) Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101) Customizing message files (p. 102) Changing the language of the user interface (p. 103) Customizing parametric profiles (p. 104) Save defaults (p. 105) Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106) Unfolding parameters (p. 107) Using flat bars (p. 108) Using market sizes (p. 109)

See Project and firm folders (p. 96).

Adding properties Many dialog boxes contain user-defined attributes for various objects, including beams, columns, bolts and drawings, in Tekla Structures. You can use the ..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp file to define your own attributes for these objects. Tekla Structures displays these fields when you click User defined attributes or the User attributes tab in the relevant dialog box. You can then use these values in reports and drawings. When you upgrade Tekla Structures, the user-defined attributes that you have added in the objects.inp file in the previous version of Tekla Structures are automatically copied to version 14.0 or later. The objects.inp file reads attributes in order from the folders listed in the table below starting with the model folder:

Folder

Defined by variable

Model

98

Project

XS_PROJECT

Firm

XS_FIRM

System

XS_SYSTEM

inp

XS_INP





The files are merged so that if there are user-defined attributes in any of the files, they are displayed in the user interface. Tekla Structures merges the files in a way that eliminates duplicate attributes. If Tekla Structures encounters the same attribute name in different objects.inp files, the attribute from the first read objects.inp file will be used.

You should only edit the user-defined fields in the objects.inp file. Do not change other standard field names or values.

Changing user-defined fields You can customize existing User fields shown in dialog boxes. You can also add more userdefined fields. See also User-defined fields in templates (p. 100). Example

You want to change the name of the user-defined attribute User Field 1 in the Column dialog box, which by default looks like this:

Steps

1. 2.

Open the objects.inp file using a standard text editor. Find the section: /******************************************************/ /* Part attributes */ /******************************************************/

3.

Each attribute is listed on a new line and starts with the word attribute. Find the line: attribute("USER_FIELD_1", "j_user_field_1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0")

4.

Change the line to read: attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0")

www.cadfamily.com




99

Attribute names must be unique. The maximum number of characters in a name is 19.

5.

Save the objects.inp file.

6.

Close Tekla Structures and restart the program for the changes to take effect. The Column properties dialog box will now look like this:

This change affects dialog boxes of all parts, not only columns.

User-defined fields in templates This section explains how to use user-defined attributes with Template Editor version 2.2. For more information on how to use user-defined attributes in Template Editor version 3.3, see User-defined attributes in templates (p. 426). If you change the name of a user-defined field, or create a new user-defined field, you need to modify the legend_text.fields located in the ..nt\bin\ folder, before you can select the field from a list in the Template Editor. You can also use user-defined fields without modifying the legend_text.fields, if you just type the field name correctly. For the example shown in Changing user-defined fields (p. 99), change legend_text.fields as follows: Example

100

TITLE3 MY_INFO_1 USER_FIELD_2 USER_FIELD_3 USER_FIELD_4

CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER

LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT





40 40 40 40 40

Effect on numbering You can set whether the user-defined attribute affects numbering or not. See Numbering settings. This is useful when you have members that are identical in all respects, apart from their user-defined attributes. If you want Tekla Structures to consider the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option yes in objects.inp, see Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101). In this case, Tekla Structures assigns different marks to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined attributes.

Consider attribute

You must also change the entry for the field in the Part attributes section of the objects.inp file for the user-defined value to be considered when numbering. Ignore attribute

If you want Tekla Structures to ignore the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option no in objects.inp. In this case, Tekla Structures assigns the same mark to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined attributes.

Only user-defined attributes of parts affect numbering. User-defined attributes of other objects, such as phases, projects, drawings, etc. do not affect numbering.

Interpreting objects.inp The main components of objects.inp are shown below. See also Fields in objects.inp (p. 102).

attribute or unique_attibute Attribute name Prompt Affects numbering Default value Type of values

Make sure Tekla Structures does not already use the attribute name you use. Consider using a prefix that ensures the name is unique, for example, your initials, or an abbreviation of your company name. Do not use spaces or reserved characters in attribute names.

www.cadfamily.com




101

The text you enter in the prompt section of the attribute is exactly what Tekla Structures displays in dialog boxes. Some default attributes have prompts like j_comment, meaning that the prompt comes from the joints.ail message file. For more information, read Messages (p. 89). To include an attribute in a report or template, add the name of the attribute to your layout in the Template Editor. When you run a report or create a drawing, Tekla Structures displays the current value of the attribute.

Fields in objects.inp The objects.inp file contains the following field names:

Field

Description

attribute

Regular attribute, which is copied with other part properties.

unique_attribute

Non-copyable attribute. The value of the attribute is never copied to another part. For example part checking status attributes are usually non-copyable.

attribute_name

Attribute name, used to find the attribute value

label_text

Text Tekla Structures displays in the dialog box

value_type

integer, float for numbers string for text option for lists date for date with small calendar date_time_min for date and time [12:00] with

small calendar date_time_sec for date and time [12:00:00] with small calendar field_format

Definition of the field format in the dialog box. Uses C program terminology:

• •

"%s" for strings "%d" for numbers

consider_in_number ing

See Effect on numbering (p. 101)

check_switch

none, check_max, check_min, check_maxmin

attribute_value_ma x

The maximum possible value for the attribute

attribute_value_mi n

The maximum possible value for the attribute

Customizing message files You can customize message files in Tekla Structures. Example

102

The message file by_number.ail contains both prompts and default text (or text strings) that Tekla Structures uses in drawings. If you want to change the text Tekla Structures uses for near side plates from N/S to NS, do the following:





1. 2.

Open by_number.ail using a standard text editor. Change the N/S into NS in the following section: string by_number_msg_no_675 { ... entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); };

3.

Save by_number.ail.

See below for an extract of theby_number.ail file:

by_number.ail string by_number_msg_no_675 { entry = ("chs", "(NS)"); entry = ("cht", "(N/S)"); entry = ("csy", "(N/S)"); entry = ("deu", "(vorn)"); entry = ("esp", "(L/C)"); entry = ("fra", "(AV)"); entry = ("hun", "(N/S)"); entry = ("ita", "(N/S)"); entry = ("jpn", "N/S"); entry = ("nld", "(VZ)"); entry = ("plk", "(N/S)"); entry = ("ptb", "(L/L)"); entry = ("ptg", "(L/L)"); entry = ("rus", "(N/S)"); entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); }; string by_number_msg_no_676 { entry = ("chs", "(FS)"); entry = ("cht", "(F/S)"); entry = ("csy", "(F/S)"); entry = ("deu", "(hinten)"); entry = ("esp", "(L/L)"); entry = ("fra", "(AR)"); entry = ("hun", "(F/S)"); entry = ("ita", "(F/S)"); entry = ("jpn", "F/S"); entry = ("nld", "(AZ)"); entry = ("plk", "(F/S)"); entry = ("ptb", "(L/P)"); entry = ("ptg", "(L/P)"); entry = ("rus", "(F/S)"); entry = ("enu", "(F/S)");};

Changing the language of the user interface You can change the language of theTekla Structures user interface. Preconditions

The languages between which you can switch are the languages you have chosen when installing Tekla Structures.

Usage

1. 2. 3. 4.

www.cadfamily.com

Click Tools > Change Language... Select the language in the Language list box. Click OK. Restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect.




103

The language you in which you install Tekla Structures will be the default language of the user interface.

See also

Languages and environments

Customizing parametric profiles The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles in Tekla Structures. You can customize this file to add more parametric profile names. See also The profile catalog (p. 117). Example

You want to use parametric plate profiles with a different name, PLTE. 1. 2.

Open the profitab.inp file in a standard text editor. Add the line: PLTE

3.

! PL

! +2 !

!

1 !

2 !

!

!

Save profitab.inp to the current model folder and close the file.

See also Project and firm folders (p. 96).

Interpreting profitab.inp The first block in this file is the column titles. It also contains an explanation of possible values.

Title

Description

Prefix

Prefix Tekla Structures uses for the parametric profile. See also Appendix A, Parametric Profiles.

Type

The parametric profile type, e.g. I profile.

SO

Sort order. The available options are:

• •

-1: Decreasing sorting order

•

0: No sorting order

•

2: Name increasing, value decreasing

•

-2: Name decreasing, value increasing

+1: Increasing sorting order

For example, if your input is PLT200*10 or PLT10*200 and you select 2, the result in the output (such as a report) for both cases is PLT200*10. If you select -2, the result for both cases is PLT10*200. Z

104

Unit of measure used when inputting data





Title

Description

MI

Minimum number of parameters you can use in the Select profile dialog box. For example, a rectangular hollow section has sub-types: h*t, h*b*t, h1*b1-h2*b2*t. You define SHS with a minimum of two and a maximum of two parameters. When you use the Prefix option in the Select profile dialog box, you will only have the option h*t. Using the same example, SHS300*200*5 will not be available either.

MA

Maximum number of parameters you can use in the Select profile dialog box. See MI above for example.

G3-NAME

Only used for user-defined parametric profiles. Used by Tekla Structures to find the generation component.

Z3-NAME

Only used for user-defined parametric profiles. Identifies the modeling tool name.

Save defaults You may find it useful to create a set of standard files for a new project, or to set up Tekla Structures to suit the way you work. You can copy these standard files to the project or firm folders for future use. See Project and firm folders (p. 96). Many dialog boxes Tekla Structures displays when you are modeling contain properties for objects (beams, columns, modeling tools, etc.). Typically they have a Standard option in the Load list box. By default Tekla Structures uses the settings in the Standard file when applying commands. Use Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults to save a set of Standard files in the current model folder. Tekla Structures creates the following files:

File

Dialog box

standard.asv

Autosave properties

standard.clm

Column properties

standard.cpl

Contour plate properties

standard.crs

Beam/orthogonal beam properties

standard.dia

Twin profile properties

standard.fms

Plotting frames

standard.fpl

Folded plate

standard.ler

Layer properties

standard.mvi

Model view properties

standard.num

Setup - Numbering

standard.prf

Project properties Numbering and coefficient information from the Options dialog box.

www.cadfamily.com




105

File

Dialog box

standard.prt

Beam properties

standard.scr

Bolt properties

standard.stp

Setup - Preferences

standard.wld

Weld properties

Creating standard files You can also create standard files not listed above. Simply change the properties of a file, then save it as standard (use lower case). Tekla Structures saves standard files to the current model folder. See System folder (p. 96) for more on using standard files. See also Project and firm folders (p. 96).

Customizing other files Tekla Structures also stores a number of files, all of which contain object properties, in the current model folder. Tekla Structures creates these files when you click Save or Save as in dialog boxes. Example

You change the standard column properties to create a new type of column you call custom1. When you click Save as, Tekla Structures creates the file custom1.clm in the current model folder.

See Appendix D, File extensions (p. 415), for a full list of files Tekla Structures creates in this way.

Creating AutoDrawings wizard files You can create your own AutoDrawings wizard files using any standard text editor. Use the existing wizard files as examples to construct your own. A typical AutoDrawings wizard file includes several sets of drawing requests containing drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object. Example

The AutoDrawings wizard file creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for that object, even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same wizard file.

Interpreting a wizard file

Wizard files consist of the following entries. Note the use of parentheses. set_drawing_type(assembly)

This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in parentheses. The options are:

106

Option

Creates

single

workshop drawings

assembly

assembly drawings

multi_single

workshop multi-drawings





Option

Creates

multi_single_with_layout

workshop multi-drawings with layout

multi_assembly

assembly multi-drawings

multi_assembly_with_layout

assembly multi-drawings with layout

cast_unit

cast-unit drawings

set_drawing_attributes(column)

This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings. The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses. set_filter(column_filter)

This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to create drawings.The filter name appears in parentheses. See also Selection filter. create_drawings()

Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter. See also

Using drawing wizards AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 113)

Unfolding parameters The unfolding parameters define the location of the neutral axis when a profile is unfolded. The neutral axis is a line which runs along the length of a profile where stress and strain are equal to zero. Tekla Structures uses these parameters to create NC files and to display unfolded profiles in single-part drawings. Set these parameters in the conversion file, unfold_corner_ratios.inp, located in the system folder. Here is an example of a simple conversion file: 1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 1 0 90 .7 1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 2 0 1000 .7 2 PL* S235JR 0 200 1 0 90 .6

The parameters must be in a certain order in the conversion file: 1.

Type

• •

2 is for plates modelled as polybeams (profile e.g. PLT)

2.

Profile (you can use wildcards, too)

3.

Material (you can use wildcards, too)

4.

Rotation/thickness min

•

for polybeams: the minimum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal axis

•

for plates: the minimum thickness of plate

5.

www.cadfamily.com

1 is for polybeams

Rotation/thickness max

•

for polybeams: the maximum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal axis

•

for plates: the maximum thickness of plate




107

6.

Flag

• • 7.

1 is for sharp folds 2 is for curved bends Angle/radius min

• • 8.

the minimum angle of sharp folds the minimum radius of curved bends Angle/radius max

• • 9.

the maximum angle of sharp folds the maximum radius of curved bends Ratio

•

defines how much the profile stretches or shrinks when unfolded. Ratio = (1 - the relative location of the neutral axis). If only the inner surface of the profile shrinks, the ratio is 1. If only the outer surface of the profile stretches, the ratio is 0. By default, the ratio is 0.5 for length calculation and 0.0 for bending radius calculation.

Tekla Structures applies the unfolding ratio if the profile properties are within the range indicated by the minimum and maximum values.

To define the rotation angle, set the work plane by the first three points of the polybeam. Set the rotation angle in the Rotation field in the Beam properties dialog box.

Using flat bars When you have completed the model, you can have Tekla Structures show plates as the equivalent flat bars for manufacturing. Tekla Structures displays the plates as flat bars in reports and drawings. To show plates as flat bars: 1. 2.

Set the variable XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION=TRUE. Indicate the prefix you want to use for flat bars using the variable XS_FLAT_PREFIX. For example, set XS_FLAT_PREFIX=FLAT.

To prevent Tekla Structures displaying the profile in metric units in the US Imperial version, add the flat bar prefix to the profitab.inp file as a parametric profile.

3.

Define materials, thickness, and width of available flat bars in the fltprops.inp file. See Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp (p. 109).

4.

By default, Tekla Structures only compares plate width with the available flat bar dimensions.

• •

108

To include plate length, set the variable XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO=TRUE. To define the tolerance between the actual and standard gusset width, set the variable XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.





•

To define the tolerance between the actual and standard stiffener width, set the variable XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.

Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp Use the fltprops.inp file to define flat bar length, width, and material. The file is located in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any standard text editor. You can also copy it to model, project, or firm folders. If Tekla Structures cannot find the fltprops.inp file, it searches for the file fltprops (without .inp extension). See also Folder search order (p. 94). The first row in the file contains flat bar material definitions (enclosed in quotes " ") followed by plate thicknesses. If you do not define a material, you can use all materials for all flat bars. The following rows define the widths of available flat bars. Units are millimeters. fltprops.inp 5,6,"S235",8,10,"S275J0",10,15 40,45 50,55 60,65 70,75 100,110 200,220

Using the fltprops.inp file above, Tekla Structures displays the following plates as flat bars:

Connections

Plate

Material

5x40, 5x45, 6x50, 6x55

All materials

8x60, 8x65, 10x70, 10x75

S235

10x100, 10x110, 15x200, 15x220

S275J0

Some connections use the fltprops.inp file to convert plates to flat bars after creating the connection: 40, 41, 42, 47, 71, 78, 101, 102, 105, 106, 111, 123, 130, 132, 161, 162, 163, 164.

Settings

The following variables affect flat bar lists:

• •

XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION

•

XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO

•

XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE

•

XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE

•

XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION.

XS_FLAT_PREFIX

Using market sizes Market size is used in custom components to select a suitable plate dimension (usually plate thickness) from the available market sizes. For example, a plate’s thickness should match the web of a beam.

www.cadfamily.com




109

To use market sizes, you must define a custom component using a custom component editor. 1.

In the Variables dialog box, add the function =fMarketSize(material, thickness, extrastep) for a parameter.

2.

Define the available material sizes in the marketsize.dat file. See Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat (p. 110) for instructions.

Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat Use the marketsize.dat file to define available thicknesses (or any other dimension) for each material grade. The file is located in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any standard text editor. A material grade element must begin each row followed by a comma-separated list of available plate thicknesses. These units are described in millimeters. marketsize.dat S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22 SS400,1.6,2.3,3.2,4.5,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38 DEFAULT,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38

Example If the following row is in the marketsizes.dat file: S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22 then the available market size plate thicknesses for S235JR plates are 6, 9, 12, 16 and 22 mm. So the function =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,0) would return 12, and =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,1) would return 16 (one size up). You can also use the function without entering any size up: =fMarketSize("SS400",7) which is the equivalent of =fMarketSize("SS400",7,0)

3.5 Log files Tekla Structures writes information to log files when you perform operations such as numbering or saving a model. This section describes these log files and how to interpret them.

All log files are located in the current model folder.

Topics

Tekla Structures log files (p. 110) Viewing log files (p. 114) Direct access to parts from log files (p. 114)

Tekla Structures log files This section contains information on the following log files in Tekla Structures.

110





File

Description

check_database.l og

Tekla Structures writes information to this log file when you use the Correct database command. If inconsistencies are found in a part, the part id is written in this log. You can then access the part using the technique described in Direct access to parts from log files (p. 114).

conflict.log

This file lists write conflicts. You can view this file automatically. A write conflict occurs in multi-user mode when more than one user changes an object.

drawing_cloning. log

History of cloning drawings.

drawing_history. log

History of drawing creation. See Drawing history log (p. 113) for more information.

dstv_nc.log

Tekla Structures writes information to this file about the assemblies processed each time you create NC files. If you use the NC file classifier, this log file contains additional information on the process, e.g. which machine you used, etc. Also contains error messages.

filetranerror.log

Only used for cold rolled components, e.g. Albion, Ayrshire, Hispan etc. Tekla Structures writes error messages to this file if transfer macros fail.

numbering.histor y

This file has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. See Numbering history log (p. 111) for more information.

save_history.log

Tekla Structures writes information to this file each time you save a model.

wizard.log

Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run a wizard. See AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 113) for more information.

TeklaStructures.log

Contains information on the entire Tekla Structures session (from opening the model to closing it), e.g. errors, which catalogs you are using, etc.

analysis.log

Tekla Structures writes information to this file when you run the analysis. Analysis log file contains also information on errors that occur during load distribution.

Numbering history log Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file numbering.history. The file has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. Tekla Structures places each session in a different block.

www.cadfamily.com




111

Interpreting numbering.history The header line of each block contains details of the user who carried out the numbering and the date. *** Numbering (kke): Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000

The next lines contain details of the numbering settings used: Full numbering Compare modified to old parts Compare new to old parts Tolerance: 1.000000

Then a list of defined series, prior to numbering. In this example, the first line means that in the series PL/1 the highest part position number is 1 and the highest assembly postion number is 0. PL/1 B/1 A/1 P/1 /1001

Max Max Max Max Max

Part Part Part Part Part

1 1 0 12 2

Max Max Max Max Max

Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly

0 0 14 0 0

If both the part and assembly numbers here are not zero and you have set the variable XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR to MAIN_PART, there may have been a conflict during numbering.

Tekla Structures then lists information on the parts and assemblies numbered. Column headings appear in this example, they do not appear in the file itself. Part/ assembly Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part

Numbering Position number ID series Old New 124228 series:P/1 P/9 -> P/13 1541381 series:/2001 /0 -> /2001 1541698 series:/2001 /0 -> /2002 1541760 series:/1001 /0 -> /1005 1541820 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006 1541879 series:/1001 /0 -> /1004 1541941 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006 1542095 series:/1001 /0 -> /1007 1542129 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542142 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542153 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542164 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542175 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542186 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003

Tekla Structures then shows an updated list of the defined series.

Assembly

/2001 Max Part 2 Max Assembly PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly P/1 Max Part 13 Max Assembly /1001 Max Part 7 Max Assembly 124236 series:A/1 A/11 -> A/15

0 0 0 14 0 0

The final line of the block shows the end of the numbering session. *** Operation finished Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000 Full numbering

112





If you remove or delete the file numbering.history, Tekla Structures generates a new file with the same name when you next run numbering. The new file does not contain a history of previous numbering sessions.

Overlapping part/assembly series Tekla Structures records the error message shown in the following example in the numbering.log when you do not have enough free numbers in the numbering series. Example

Assembly numbering series overlap: Position number 1 in series 0 overlaps with position number 1 in series 1.

See also Numbering.

Drawing history log Use the variable XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE in the Drawing properties category in the Advanced options dialog box, to define what information Tekla Structures writes in the numbering history log file. You can use all, or any combination of, these options:

• •

NEW

•

MODIFIED

DELETED

Separate the options using the _ character, for example, XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE=NEW_DELETED.

AutoDrawings Wizard log Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The log file contains information about errors, number of drawings created, commands used etc. You can configure whether or not Tekla Structures creates a log file and how it is displayed using the Advanced tab in the AutoDrawings dialog box. Create log options:

•

No

Tekla Structures does not create a log file.

•

Create

Tekla Structures creates a new log file and deletes the old one.

•

Append

Tekla Structures adds a new entry to the existing log file. Display log options:

•

No

Tekla Structures does not display the log,

•

With associated viewer

Tekla Structures displays the log file in an associated viewer (e.g. Notepad) when you run the wizard. You can edit the log file.

•

www.cadfamily.com

On dialog




113

Tekla Structures displays the log file in a dialog box when you run the wizard. You can not edit the log file.

Viewing log files You can configure how Tekla Structures displays log files. Check Tools > Display Log File > With Associated Viewer to show log files in a viewer associated with the file type, e.g. Notepad. Use Tools > Display log file to view the following log files in a dialog box:

• •

Tekla Structures log

•

Drawing history log

•

Model history log (save_history.log)

•

Clash check history log

•

Analysis history log

Numbering history log

You can also display log files on a toolbar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window by checking Tools > Toolbars > Message Panel.

Direct access to parts from log files There is a direct link from Tekla Structures log files to the model, so you do not have to search for parts mentioned in the log file. To view parts in log file entries: 1. 2.

Click the line in the log file which contains the part. Parts have the prefix ’id’. Tekla Structures highlights the part in the model view.

If multiple part ids or an assembly appear on one line in the log file, Tekla Structures highlights all the parts. You can also select parts on different lines of the log file simultaneously.

Access part pop-up menu You can also access the pop-up menu of a part straight from the log file: Right-click the part id in the log file. Tekla Structures displays the same pop-up menu that you see when you right click a part in the modeling view.

114





4

Catalogs

Catalogs are databases containing the information you would normally expect to find listed in design code tables, or printed reference material. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain project- or company-specific information.

Introduction

Catalogs are available for many environments, with region-specific elements. In this chapter

This chapter explains how to view and modify catalogs. You will also learn how to add userdefined information to existing catalogs. The final section includes some information on advanced techniques that may be of interest to experienced users.

Contents


How to use this chapter

• •

Things you should know (p. 115)

•

The material catalog (p. 130)

•

The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 134)

•

The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 142)

•

For the advanced user (p. 143)

The profile catalog (p. 117)

You will find it useful to read Things you should know (p. 115) before moving on to subsequent sections.

4.1 Things you should know This section describes features and processes that are common to all the catalogs. You should read this section before moving on to modifying the catalogs. Topics

Open a model first (p. 116) The filter (p. 116) Saving a modified catalog (p. 116) What is the difference between Update and OK? (p. 117)

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Catalogs

115

Open a model first You must open a model to view or modify the catalogs, as this action opens the related catalogs. Which catalog is used?

Several catalogs of each type (profile, material, bolt, etc.) can be stored simultaneously in different locations, so it is important to know which catalog you are using. When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the catalog files in a specific order, until they are found.

• •

current model folder

•

firm folder

•

profile folder

project folder

The physical location of the project, firm and profile folders are defined in the initialization file by the variables shown in the illustration below. XS_PROFDB only applies to the profile catalog. XS_SYSTEM applies to all other catalogs.

The filter The filter option appears in all the modify catalog dialog boxes.

Use it to specify which entries from a catalog should appear in the tree. The default filter string is the wildcard symbol (*). This displays all items in the catalog. Using filter strings

To display all parts with names beginning with A, enter A* in the Filter field. To display all parts with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures only shows the elements that satisfy your criteria. See Filter in the Modeling manual for more on filtering.

Saving a modified catalog This information only relates to profile and material catalogs. To save changes to a catalog:

116


Catalogs www.cadfamily.com



1. 2.

Click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changed catalog to the current model folder. Click Cancel to return to the Modify catalog dialog box.

3.

To exit without saving changes, click Cancel in the Modify catalog dialog box.

What is the difference between Update and OK? This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs. Summary

This table lists the various save and exit functions, together with a brief explanation of what each one does.

Button

Action Saves changes to the catalog in memory until you click OK. Saves changes to the catalog on the hard disk. Used to exit without saving changes. Not currently available in the bolt or plotter catalogs.

How it works

When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads information from the relevant catalogs on the hard disk and stores it in the computer’s memory. When you select a material or profile Tekla Structures reads the data from the catalog in memory and displays it in the dialog box. This is a much faster method than accessing the catalog stored on the hard disk. When you change data in the dialog box, the changes appear immediately, but the information is not saved to the catalog in memory until you click Update. Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog to the hard disk when you click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box and click OK in the save confirmation dialog box.

4.2 The profile catalog Introduction

Tekla Structures stores the analysis and design properties of standard and user-defined profiles in the profile catalog. Standard profiles are ones which can be obtained premanufactured. You can also create user-defined profiles from user-defined cross sections. Parametric profiles have a predefined, hard-coded shape, with one or more parameters to define the size of the profile. Tekla Structures calculates the cross-section shape each time you open the model. You can create parametric profile names and enter dimensions for them. See also Appendix A, Parametric Profiles, in the Modeling Manual. To view or modify profiles, click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Tekla Structures displays profiles in a tree structure. Profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA).

www.cadfamily.com




117

Different icons denote profile types, rules and profiles within the tree:

Icon

Used to show Profile type rule. Different icons show different types. Rule Individual standard profile Individual parametric profile

Pop-up menus allow you to modify the tree. Before you start

Read Things you should know (p. 115).

Topics

Working with rules (p. 118) Viewing or modifying the profile catalog (p. 122) Adding a profile (p. 122) Creating a cross section (p. 123) Modifying a cross section (p. 124) Deleting a cross section (p. 125) Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 125) Adding user-defined attributes to a profile (p. 127) Merging profile catalogs (p. 128) Exporting the profile catalog (p. 128) Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128) Importing from previous versions (p. 129) Importing the profile catalog (p. 129)

Working with rules What is a rule?

118

A rule filters the information in the catalog according to criteria set in the rule filter. For more information on how the filter works, read The filter (p. 116). For example, in the Modify profile catalog dialog box, profiles are grouped according to profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA) using rules.





To change how entries in the profile catalog are grouped, you will need to modify the rules in the profile catalog. Read Adding a rule (p. 121).

Defining the material of profiles Use the Modify profile catalog dialog box to associate profile types with certain material. You can define which profiles are available for steel parts, concrete parts, or both. This affects which profile types are shown in the Select profile dialog box. For example, if you create a steel part and click the Select... button next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box, certain profile types will appear:

www.cadfamily.com




119

To define the material of a profile type: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to modify the profile catalog. In the Modify profile catalog dialog box, select the profile type, for example L profiles.

3.

To associate the L profiles with steel, right-click and select Material > Steel from the popup menu. A check mark next to Steel on the pop-up menu indicates that L profiles are available for steel parts.

4.

To make the L profiles available also for concrete parts, right-click again and select Material > Concrete.

120





5.

To remove a check mark, select the profile type, right-click, and select Material and the option you want to make unavailable.

6.

Click OK to close the Modify profile catalog dialog box.

7.

Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the profile catalog.

Adding a rule To add a rule to the tree: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Add rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box.

3.

Type in the Rule name.

4.

Choose the Profile type to which the rule will be applied.

5.

Enter the Name filter string that will define the new rule. As a default the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning “all entries”. To group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that satisfy your criteria under a new rule.

For more information on filtering, see Using wildcards.

Adding a next level rule A next level rule creates a subgroup under an existing rule. Follow the instructions for Adding a rule (p. 121), but use the option Add next level rule.

Editing a rule To edit a rule: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Edit a rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box.

3.

Modify the rule as required. Read Adding a rule (p. 121) for more on rules.

4.

Click OK to return to the Modify profile catalog dialog box.

Organizing rules Tekla Structures lists profiles in alphabetical order, and rules in the order which you can specify. To change the order in which rules appear: 1. 2.

Click File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify... to display the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Right-click the rule and use the Move Up/Move Down options.

Deleting a rule To delete a rule from the tree:

www.cadfamily.com




121

1. 2. See also

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Delete a rule. The rule is deleted and you are returned to the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.

Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128)

Viewing or modifying the profile catalog To view or modify the profile catalog: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click an existing profile to view or modify it.

Information on profiles is separated into three tabs: General tab

The General tab has information on profile types and dimensions.

Analysis tab

The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is analyzed using the Finite Element Method.

User attributes tab

The User attributes tab is for viewing or entering user-defined attributes for profiles. Read A closer look at the export file (p. 143) for more information.

Adding a profile There are two ways to create a new profile:

• •

Copy an existing profile. Create a new profile from scratch.

Copy an existing profile The simplest way to create a new profile is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one, as in the following example.

Choose profile type and profile dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as possible. The profile type and profile dimensions (height, width, etc.) affect the connections applied, so a bad profile type, or missing values, may result in problems with connections. Remember that some connections only work for certain types of profiles. Always enter values for h and b, as these values can affect how Tekla Structures display profiles. 1.

Steps

2.

122

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Find a profile similar to the one you want to create and right-click. A similar profile might be one with the same profile type and subtype as the one you want to create.

3.

Click Copy profile.

4.

Change the profile name.

5.

Modify the profile properties.

6.

Click Update and then OK to save your profile.

7.

Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.





Creating a new standard profile Alternatively you can create a new profile. Steps

1. 2.

See also

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click anywhere in the tree structure and click Add profile. A new profile will be created with the name PROFILE (number).

3.

Change the profile name. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case in this field.

4.

Choose a profile type and profile subtype, then enter the profile properties.

5.

Click Update and then OK to save your profile.

6.


Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 125)

Creating a cross section Employ user-defined cross sections to create user-defined profiles.

Cross-section data is now stored in the profdb.bin, not the profcs.bin, as in previous versions.

Cross section with no inner contours To create a cross section with no inner contours: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Crosss Section Using Polygon. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon.

3.

Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used in a profile with user-defined cross sections.

4.

Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens automatically after the center point is picked.

5.

Click OK to save the cross section.

6.

Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.

Cross section with inner contours To create a cross section with inner contours:

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Polygon. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon.

3.

Pick the corners of the cross-section inner contour. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Repeat until all inner contours are picked. Click the middle mouse button.

4.

Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used in a profile with user-defined cross sections.

5.

Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens automatically after the center point is picked.

6.

Click OK to save the cross section.




123

7.


When creating multi-cross-section profiles, it is important to create cross sections with the same number of points, created in the same order.

Example

A pitched I profile needs two cross sections with the same center point height. You can create a pitched profile as illustrated below. The cross-section inner contour and outer contour can be picked either clockwise or counterclockwise.

See also

Modifying a cross section (p. 124) Deleting a cross section (p. 125)

Modifying a cross section To modify an existing cross section: 1.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Sectionto display the Modify Cross Section dialog box.

2.

Click on the cross section you want to modify.

3.

Modify the cross section point data.

4.

Click Update and then OK to save the cross section and exit the dialog box.

5.


Different types of chamfer You can use different types of chamfer in user-defined profiles. Click Modeling > profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section to open the Modify Cross Section dialog box. Number on the Point properties tab refers to each point picked when the cross section was created, in numerical order. The first point picked is Number 1, the second 2, etc. Click on the down arrow against Number to view or change the properties of each point.

124





Click on the cross section, then click the down arrow in Chamfer type to choose a chamfer type. The x and y values apply to the chamfer type. For example, for the chamfer to be equal on both sides of the angle, only enter a value for x, as in the illustration above. For an uneven chamfer, enter values for x and y.

Deleting a cross section To delete a cross section from the catalog: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section. Click a cross section.

3.

Click Delete.

4.

Click OK to exit the Modify cross section dialog box.

5.

Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile Only user-defined cross sections are used to create user-defined profiles. Create the cross sections needed before adding a standard user-defined profile.

Read Creating a cross section (p. 123) for more on cross sections.

Single crosssection profile

www.cadfamily.com

To create a user-defined profile using a single cross section: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog.... Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile.

3.

Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case.

4.

Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box.




125

Multi-crosssection profile

5.

Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box.

6.

Enter 1 for the Cross section number and 0.0000 for the Relative location.

7.

Click OK to save your profile.

8.


To create a multi-cross-section profile: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog.... Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile.

3.

Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case.

4.

Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box.

5.

Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box.

6.

Enter the Cross section number and the Relative location, assigning a new number and location for each one. Relative location values indicate the location of the cross section along the axis: 0.0 for starting end and 1.0 for second end.

7.

Use the Add button in the Modify profile catalog dialog box to create more cross sections.

8.

Click Update after defining each cross section in the profile.

9.

Click OK to save your profile.

10. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog. Example

In a pitched profile, Relative location values are 0.0, 0.5 and 1.0, for cross sections 1, 2 and 3.

Remember, cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.

Choose the profile type and dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as possible. Profile type and dimensions affect the connections applied, so the wrong profile type or missing values may result in problems with connections. Some connections only work for certain profiles. Always enter values for h and b as they affect how the profile is displayed.

126





The values h and b are used when calculating the height of a part in pixels. If the values are 0, the part is drawn as a line. These values are also used when setting the position of the part.

Adding user-defined attributes to a profile In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for profiles. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete using a user-defined attribute. To create a user-defined attribute for a profile: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click Definitions... on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog box.

3.

Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. The dialog box will now look like this:

4.

Click the text under each heading to define the attributes using the following fields:

Field

Comment

Profile type

Click the down arrow to indicate the profile types that the property will be applied to.

Quantity type

The type of information the user-defined attribute will contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.

Order

The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.

Property name

This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When this field is used in a template, PROFILE.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property name will appear. Example:PAINT_LAYER_THICKNESS

www.cadfamily.com




127

Field

Comment

Symbol

An abbreviation that can be used for the property, such as Ix, ct, etc.

Label

The property name is translated to the label in various circumstances.

Merging profile catalogs The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful technique when:

See also

•

Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain customized catalogs from the previous version.

•

Combining catalogs stored in different locations.

•

Sharing information from catalogs with other users.

Exporting the profile catalog (p. 128) Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128) Importing from previous versions (p. 129) Importing the profile catalog (p. 129)

Exporting the profile catalog To export the entire profile catalog: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click the Export button.

3.

Choose a location for the export file.

4.

Type in a name for the file. If you type in an existing filename, that file will be overwritten. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.

Use this method to export the entire profile catalog. If you want to export only part of your catalog, read Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128).

Exporting elements from the profile catalog You can also export a branch of the profile tree, i.e. all the profiles grouped under a rule, or a single profile. Branch

To export a branch of the profile tree: 1.

128

2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click the branch to be exported.

3.

Click Export profiles.

4.






5. Single profile

Type in a name for the file.

To export a single profile: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click the profile to be exported.

3.

Click Export profile.

4.


5.

Type in a name for the file. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.

Read A closer look at the export file (p. 143) if you are interested in the contents of the export file. You should also read this section if you are considering editing the export file.

Importing from previous versions You cannot import export files created with previous versions of the program. However, profile catalogs from previous versions are automatically converted when a model is opened in the new version. So, to create a suitable export file, open the relevant model in the new version and export the catalog.

Do not save your model in the new version, or you will not be able to open it in the older version.

Importing the profile catalog To import a profile catalog: 1. 2.

Open a model which uses the profile catalog to which you wish to import. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.

3.

Click Import.

4.

Indicate the location of the file to be imported. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.

Read Exporting the profile catalog (p. 128) for information on how to create an export file.

What happens to existing profiles? If an existing profile has the same name as the one being imported, the program will give you three options:

www.cadfamily.com




129

Option

What happens

Replace

The current profile is deleted, the profile in the file being imported is added.

Merge

Profile properties that are different in the file being imported are added to the existing profile, all the other properties remain unchanged. Use this option to import only certain attributes of profiles.

Leave

The existing profile is not replaced and the definition in the import file is ignored.

The merge option is a very useful one if you want to import certain elements of the catalog. For example, you could use it to import only the user-defined attributes of a profile.

User-defined fixed cross section definitions Each cross section definition has a unique name and ID number. If, during an import, a cross section is found in the existing profile catalog which has the same name, but different properties, the cross section being imported is renamed (an incremental number is added to the end of the existing name). The new name is also written to the Tekla Structures log file.

User-defined attributes If a user-defined attribute with a different definition already exists, you will be prompted to replace or leave the existing attribute.

4.3 The material catalog The material catalog contains information on material grades. Materials are displayed in a hierarchical tree, grouped according to material, e.g. steel and concrete. Topics

Viewing or modifying the material catalog (p. 130) Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade (p. 131) Adding a material type (p. 132) Adding a new material grade (p. 132) Deleting a material grade (p. 133) Defining your own symbols for materials (p. 133) Export and import (p. 134)

Viewing or modifying the material catalog To view or modify the material catalog:

130





1. 2.

Click Modeling > Material Catalog to view the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click an existing material to view or modify its properties.

Information on materials is contained on four tabs in the Modify material catalog dialog box.

General tab

The General tab has fields for three alternative names (or aliases) for the material. These are usually the material names used in different countries or standards. It also contains the profile and plate density values.

Analysis tab

The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is analyzed using the Finite Element Method.

Design tab

The Design tab has information on design-specific properties such as strengths, partial safety factors, etc. Click the correct design code in the Design code list box:

User attributes tab

In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for material grades. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete using a user-defined attribute.

Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade To add a user-defined attribute to a material grade: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to open the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click Definitions on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog box.

3.

Click Add to add a user-defined attribute.

4.

Click the text under each heading and use the list box to define each attribute.

The following fields can be used:

www.cadfamily.com




131

Field

Comment

Category

The material category to which the user-defined attribute will be applied.

Design code

The design code it comes under.

Material type Quantity type

The type of information the user-defined attribute will contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.

Order

The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.

Property name

This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When this field is used in a template MATERIAL.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property name will appear.

Label

The property name is translated to the label in various circumstances.

Units of measure Set units of measure for both input and output using Tools > Options > Options... > Units and decimals.

Adding a material type If the tree does not contain the material type you need, you can add material types. 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click a material (e.g. steel) and right-click to access the pop-up menu.

3.

Click Add material.

4.

Enter the material properties in the Add material dialog box.

5.

Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.

6.


Adding a new material grade The simplest way to create a new material grade is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one. Steps

1. 2.

Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click a material grade similar to the one you wish to create, right-click.

3.

Click Copy grade.

4.

Change the Material name.

5.

Modify the material grade properties.

6.


7.


Alternatively you can create a new material.

132





Steps

1. 2.

Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click a material type (e.g. steel), right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add grade.

3.

Change the material grade name in the Selected grade field.

4.

Enter the material grade properties.

5.


6.


Deleting a material grade To delete a material grade from the catalog: 1. 2.

Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click a material, right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Delete grade.

3.

Click OK to exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.

4.


For more on saving the catalog, read Saving a modified catalog (p. 116).

Defining your own symbols for materials You can replace existing material definitions with your own, which will then be displayed in drawings. Material definitions can contain text, numbers and symbols. Where are material definitions stored?

User-defined material definitions are stored in the file defined by the variable XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE. The suggested filename is material_symbol_table.txt. This file does not exist until you create it. Once this file is created and set for use in the Advanced options dialog box, Drawing properties category, using the variable XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE, all the named materials in the catalog will be replaced with the ones defined in this file. Each line of the file defines a material, using the syntax: Material_name

symbol_file.sym @ n

Syntax of the material file

www.cadfamily.com

Value

Description

material_name

The name of the material used in the material catalog.

symbol_file

The file name of the symbol to be used. This must have the suffix .sym. There is an example of a user-defined symbol at the end of this section.

n

The symbol number. This number is also displayed in the Symbol Editor.




133

Example

SM400A ud_mat.sym @ 13 A SM400B ud_mat.sym @ 13 B SM490 ud_mat.sym @ 11

When creating your own material definition file, ensure that materials with extended material names are listed before ones with similar, simpler names, or they will both be given the same symbol. For example, SM400B must be listed before SM400. This is an example of a user-defined symbol:

Export and import The export and import process is the same as for the profile catalog, which is described in Merging profile catalogs (p. 128).

4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs Bolts are used in a model as predefined assemblies made up of components such as bolts, washers, nuts, etc. The bolt catalog contains bolt assembly elements, such as bolts of different size and length, nuts, washers, etc. The bolt assembly catalog contains bolt assemblies. When bolt assemblies are used in a model, the program automatically handles bolt length, number of washers, nuts, etc. Topics

Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog (p. 135) Saving a modified bolt catalog (p. 137) Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies (p. 137) Creating studs (p. 139) Merging bolt catalogs (p. 141) Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 141) Importing the bolt catalog (p. 141)

134





Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog To view individual bolt elements, such as bolts, washers, and nuts: Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... to access the Bolt Catalog dialog box. Filter

The Filter option is used to limit the list of entries from the catalog which are displayed. Read The filter (p. 116) for more on filtering techniques.

Layout

The Modify bolt catalog dialog box contains a list box. Single click an entry on the list to access its properties. The following table explains the terms used for the properties of bolts, washers and nuts, in the Bolt catalog dialog box.

Term

What does it mean?

When is this value used?

add. dist

Length of the part of the bolt that protrudes from the nut

Bolt length calculation

top thick

Thickness of bolt head

Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)

thread len

The length of the threaded part of the bolt shaft

This is not used in bolt length calculation (value is 0) if the bolt is fully-threaded.

washer tol

Tolerance between the washer inner diameter and the bolt diameter

When searching for the correctsized washer for the bolt. Not used in bolt length calculation.

span size

Size of the wrench needed

Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)

top diam

Diameter of the hexagon

For information only

calc thick

Calculation thickness of a nut or washer

Used in bolt length calculation

real thick

True thickness of a nut or washer


inner diam

Inner diameter of a nut or washer


outer diam

Outer diameter of a nut or washer


An example of the properties of a typical bolt:

www.cadfamily.com




135

An example of the properties of a typical nut:

An example of the properties of a typical washer:

136





Saving a modified bolt catalog Click Update to save the changes in memory until OK is clicked. When you modify a catalog and click OK to exit a dialog box prompts for a choice between two options:

The first option saves the modified bolt catalog to the current model folder. The second acts like the Windows Cancel button and does not save the modified catalog.

Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies To view or modify bolt assemblies: Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... to access the Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box. Click an entry on the list to access its properties.

www.cadfamily.com




137

The Bolt assembly catalog dialog box contains two fields for assembly names, Short name and Standard, which are used in different areas of the program.

Field

Description

When is this value used?

Short name

This name is used in marking and reports. It is usually the commercial name for a specific bolt.

Drawing the bolt (e.g. on the screen)

Standard

This is the full name and is show in the list box in the Bolt properties dialog box invoked from the Model Editor.


The illustration below shows the possible components of the assembly. The program chooses the appropriate components when the assembly is used.

138





Does value for additional length affect all or individual diameters? Enter additional length value here. Click here to specify whether the value is absolute or relative to diameter.

The value given for additional length can affect either individual or all diameters of one bolt assembly. See the illustration above. The value for length can either be absolute or relative to diameter. See the illustration above. Defining additional length for bolt calculation

Use the Add. dist... button to control how much of the bolt protrudes from the nut. It is useful for performing a quick update of the entire bolt catalog. This value is used in bolt length calculation.

Clicking Add. dist updates the Add. dist values of all bolts which use the selected bolt standard and have the selected diameter.

For more information, read Bolt length calculation (p. 146).

Creating studs A stud is special type of bolt that is welded to steel parts to transfer loads between steel and concrete.

www.cadfamily.com




139

To create and use studs: 1.

Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... and create a stud bolt in the bolt catalog. Enter the following properties:

Property

Value

Name

Name for the stud bolt.

Type

Standard

This name is needed when creating bolt assembly for the stud.

Diameter

Shank diameter.

Length

Stud length.

Weight

Stud weight.

top thick

Head thickness.

top diameter

Head diameter.

2.

Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... and create a stud bolt assembly.

Select the standard for the stud bolt. Set all the other assembly component to NONE.

3.

140

To create studs in the model, use the Bolt command and select the stud assembly standard.





Merging bolt catalogs The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful technique when:

•

Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain a customized bolt catalog from the previous version. Read Upgrading to a new version (p. 141) for a specific example of this.

•

Combining bolt catalogs stored in different locations.

•

Sharing information from the bolt catalog with other users.

The export and import method for the bolt catalog is different to that used for the profile and materials catalogs.

Exporting the bolt catalog To export the entire bolt catalog: 1. 2.

Open the model containing the required bolt catalog. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog.

3.

Tekla Structures writes the bolt catalog to the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder.

This method exports the entire bolt catalog. To export only part of the bolt catalog, edit the export file to contain only the required elements.

Importing the bolt catalog To import the bolt catalog: 1. 2.

Open the model to which you want to import the bolt catalog. Copy the screwdb.lis file you want to import to the current model folder.

3.

Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file screwdb.lis from the current model folder. Tekla Structures does not replace entries in the existing catalog that have the same names as the entries in the import file.

4.

Check the status bar for error messages. To view errors, check the Tekla Structures log by clicking Tools > Display Log File > Session History....

Upgrading to a new version Example

This is an example of how to use import and export when you upgrade to a new version of Tekla Structures. This technique ensures that you retain any customization made to your existing catalog and that only catalog additions from the new version are merged. Basically you will export the new catalog to your existing one. This prevents Tekla Structures overwriting existing catalog entries, or creating duplicates. The following steps explain how to do this when changing from one version of the program to another.

www.cadfamily.com




141

Do not simply copy and paste the bolt catalog from a previous version over the one in the new version. This will result in additions to the new version being lost.

1. 2.

Open a model in the new version. Do not save the model, or you will not be able to use it in previous versions. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. The program will create the export file screwdb.lis in the current model folder.

3.

Open the same model in the previous version.

4.

Click File > Catalog > Bolts > Import. The program imports from the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder. Existing entries with the same name as in the imported catalog are not replaced.

5.

The merged catalog is now available in the previous version.

6.

To use the merged catalog in the new version, first rename the screwdb.db file in the new version folder \environments\*your_environment*\profil\.

Rename the screwdb.db file in the new version, before replacing it with the screwdb.db file from the previous version.

7.

Copy the screwdb.db file (which contains the merged bolt catalog) from the previous version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\ to the new version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\.

The bolt assembly catalog cannot be exported and imported.

4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog The reinforcing bar catalog contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It includes both the standard bending radius and the standard hook dimensions. This section explains how to add, delete and modify entries in the reinforcing bar catalog.

Read Reinforcement in the Detailing Manual for information on how to create reinforcing bars in Tekla Structures. This chapter also contains a detailed explanation of reinforcing bar properties.

The catalog is stored in the file ..\environment\*your_environment*\profil\rebar_database.inp. To modify the catalog, edit this file using any standard text editor.

142





4.6 For the advanced user The section provides addtional information on the following subjects. It is aimed at experienced Tekla Structures users. A closer look at the export file (p. 143)

Topics

Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file (p. 144) Importing part of the bolt catalog (p. 144) Units used in export and import (p. 145) Bolt length calculation (p. 146)

A closer look at the export file This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs and provides additional information on the export file discussed in Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128) and Export and import (p. 134). We will use a typical export file from the profile catalog as an example. Catalog export files have the file extension lis. Sections of the export file

The export file is divided into specific sections. The first line of the file will be (n is the version number): PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = n

Do not delete this line. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be canceled.

The next section defines the hierarchical tree structure used to display the contents of the catalog. The next section contains the profiles. Standard profiles

Most profile types are hard-coded into the program and look like this in the export file (partial entry shown):

PROFILE_NAME = "HEA120"; { TYPE = 1; SUB_TYPE = 1001; COORDINATE = 0.000; "FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" "ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" "ROUNDING_RADIUS_1" "FLANGE_THICKNESS" "WEB_THICKNESS" "WIDTH" "HEIGHT" User-defined fixed profiles

www.cadfamily.com

0.000000000E+000 0.000000000E+000 1.200000000E+001 8.000000000E+000 5.000000000E+000 1.200000000E+002 1.140000000E+002

User-defined fixed profiles can have more than one cross section. They look like this in the export file:




143

PROFILE_NAME = "TAN_HK_TEST_2_CS"; TYPE = 998; SUB_TYPE = 253; COORDINATE = 0.000; "EQUIVALENT_TYPE" 11 "FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000 "ECCENTRICITY_Y" 0.000000000E+000 "ECCENTRICITY_X" 0.000000000E+000 "ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000 "FLANGE_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000 "WEB_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000

The profile type for user-defined fixed profiles is 998. SUB_TYPE refers to the name of the cross section definition. When importing user-defined fixed profiles, the relevant cross section definitions must be in the same import file as the profile. The cross section definition appears like this in the import file:

CROSS_SECTION_NAME = "MY_OWN_PROFILE" POINT_NUMBER = 1; POINT_X = 200.00; POINT_Y = -200.00; CHAMFER_TYPE = 0; CHAMFER_X = 0.00; CHAMFER_Y = 0.00; POINT_NUMBER = 2; POINT_X = 200.00; POINT_Y = 200.00; CHAMFER_TYPE = 0; CHAMFER_X = 0.00; CHAMFER_Y = 0.00; User-defined parametric profiles

The geometry of user-defined parametric profiles is defined in the file ..\environments\country-independent\inp\sections.clb. A user-defined parametric profile can only be imported if it is defined in this file. As this type of profile is user-definable, different users may have different definitions.

Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file There are a few rules to follow when editing the export file.

You will find it very useful to familiarize yourself with the different sections of the export file by reading through A closer look at the export file (p. 143).

•

Do not delete the line PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = 2. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be canceled.

•

The hierarchical tree structure can always be deleted.

Importing part of the bolt catalog To only import part of a bolt catalog: 1.

144

Follow the steps in Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 141) to create an export file.





Make a copy of the export file and give it a different name before you edit it, so that it easier to go back and try again if you do not get it right first time.

2.

Edit the file using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Notice that each item in the catalog is listed on a separate line. Delete the unwanted lines from the file.

3.

Do not delete these lines: STARTLIST and ENDLIST.

4.

Save the file with the same name and file extension. The filename must be screwdb.lis.

5.

Follow the steps in Importing the bolt catalog (p. 141) to import the catalog.

Units used in export and import This list of units Tekla Structures uses when exporting and importing only relates to the profile and material catalogs. You will find it useful if you want to write your own import routines for large amounts of data.

Type

Unit (no unit if blank)

Boolean Integer String Ratio Strain

www.cadfamily.com

Angle

degree

Length

mm

Deformation

mm

Dimension

mm

Radius of inertia

mm

Area

mm2

Reinforcement area

mm2

Transverse reinforcement area

mm2/m

Area/unit length

mm2/m

Volume

mm3

Section modulus

mm3

Moment of inertia

mm4

Torsion constant

mm4

Warping constant

mm6

Force

N

Weight

kg

Distributed load

N/m

Spring constant

N/m




145

Type

Unit (no unit if blank)

Mass/length

kg/m

Surface load

N/m2

Strength

N/m2

Stress

N/m2

Modulus

N/m2

Density

kg/m3

Moment

Nm

Distributed moment

Nm/m

Rotation spring constant

Nm/rad

Temperature

K (oC)

Thermal dilation coefficient

1/K (1/oC)

Factor

Bolt length calculation The diagram below shows how Tekla Structures calculates bolt length. A full explanation follows the diagram.

146





Bolt length calculation uses values from the bolt and bolt assembly catalogs. The following illustration from the Bolt properties dialog box shows the values used in bolt length calculation.

www.cadfamily.com




147

Checkboxes indicate if the component is used in the assembly. Washer (1) Washer (2) Washer (3) Nut (1) Nut (2) If unchecked, only a hole will be created Explanation

1.

The minimum possible length of the bolt is calculated as follows: washer (1) thickness + material thickness + washer (2) thickness + (if checked) washer (3) thickness + nut (1) thickness + nut (2) thickness +

148





extra length 2.

Tekla Structures searches for the closest match in the bolt catalog.

3.

The number of fitting washers required (must not exceed 10) is calculated so that the length of the shaft is less than: nut (1) thickness + material thickness + nut (2) thickness + washer (1) thickness + washer (2) thickness + (number of fitting washers*washer (3) thickness)

4.

Tekla Structures checks that the bolt found in step 2 is longer than: extra length + nut (1) thickness + material thickness + nut (2) thickness + add. dist (from bolt catalog) + washer (1) thickness + washer (2) thickness + (number of fitting washers * washer (3) thickness)

5.

If the selected bolt does not fulfill the criteria in step 4, Tekla Structures returns to step 2, otherwise it continues on to step 6.

6.

The program checks that the selected bolt satisfies all the following conditions

•

Can the thread be inside the material to be connected? Even if this is not allowed, the calculation always allows 3 or 4 mm of thread to be inside the material, depending on bolt diameter. If bolt diameter ≥ 24 mm, it allows 4 mm, otherwise it allows 3 mm.

•

Shaft length must be more than: material thickness + extra length + washer (1) thickness maximum thread in material allowed (if thread in material = no) = 3 mm or 4 mm

•

Shaft length is calculated as: Screw length - screw thread length - thread end.

•

www.cadfamily.com

Thread end is the part of the bolt between the shaft and the thread. It is calculated as follows:

Diameter of bolt (mm)

Thread end (mm)

>33.0

10.0

>27.0

8.0

>22.0

7.0




149

150

Diameter of bolt (mm)

Thread end (mm)

>16.0

6.0

>12.0

5.0

>7.0

4.0

>4.0

2.5

≤4

1.5

7.

If the selected bolt does not satisfy all the above conditions, Tekla Structures returns to step 2 and tries the next longest bolt.

8.

If the variable XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON is set, the epsilon thickness is added to, or subtracted from, the material thickness, to avoid inaccurate bolt length calculation. As an example, if this value were not taken into account, where the calculated length was 38.001 mm, a 39 mm bolt might be selected. If no value is set, a default value of 0.1 is used.





5

AutoConnection

Introduction

You can use AutoConnection to select and apply a connection to parts in a model, using standard connection properties. AutoDefaults allows you to modify standard connection properties and save them for use in specific circumstances. You can define rule groups and rule sets for both AutoConnection and AutoDefaults to use for different conditions within the model.

In this chapter

This chapter introduces AutoConnection, which you can use to automatically create connections in a model. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define connection properties. You can also use AutoDefaults to define connection properties and apply them to a single connection.

Test model

Before using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults in a working model, we recommend that you create a test model, and create all the connection conditions in it that you need for a particular project. You can then use this test model to check the rules and properties of various connection types. It also acts as a quick reference for connection information.

Contents

This chapter concentrates on the following topics:

• •

AutoConnection setup (p. 151)

•

AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 159)

AutoDefaults setup (p. 155)

5.1 AutoConnection setup Introduction

Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar connections for similar framing conditions.

Topics

AutoConnection setup (p. 152) AutoConnection rule groups (p. 153) AutoConnection rule sets (p. 153) Rules.zxt (p. 155) Changing a connection (p. 155)

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 AutoConnection

151

AutoConnection setup With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model. For example, you can create separate rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers, and even individual models. By using a rule group to select connections and connection properties, you can create connections automatically, without having to select each connection and define its properties individually. Tree structure

To access the AutoConnection Setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree structure:

Icon

Type

Description

Rule group

The 1st level in the tree shows the rule groups. These are user-definable. They help you to group the rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, and models.

Framing condition

The 2nd level shows the different predefined framing conditions (connection types). Tekla Structures creates them automatically and you cannot change them. The framing conditions include the following: beam to beam web, beam to beam flange, beam to column web, beam to column flange, beam splice, and column splice.

152


AutoConnection www.cadfamily.com



Icon

Type

Description

Rule set

Under each framing condition you can create rule sets to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model.

Connection

The connection to apply if the rule set criteria are met.

To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in the branch containing the connection. If you do not want to apply a connection for certain rules sets, right-click the connection name and then select No connection from the pop-up menu.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest. Restrictions

See also

AutoConnection has the following restrictions:

•

You can have a maximum of two secondary parts in the connection (for example, you cannot use complex gussets with several secondaries). AutoConnection uses profile height and ID number as the criteria for determining 1. secondary and 2. secondary parts.

•

AutoDefaults only affects connection parts (clip angles, shear plates, end plates, …), bolts, and welds. AutoDefaults cannot change beam profiles or the connection number.

For more information on rules, see AutoConnection rule groups (p. 153) and AutoConnection rule sets (p. 153). For more information on how to use AutoConnection, see Using AutoConnection.

AutoConnection rule groups Before using AutoConnection, you need to define rule groups, so that you can group the rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, etc. To create a new rule group: 1. 2.

Open your test model. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings.... Right-click an existing rule group, and select New rule group from the pop-up menu.

3.

Double-click the group New and rename it. Give it a distinctive name.

Give the rule group a name that reflects the group of connections that you want to create. For example, use the fabricator's name, the project name, or any name that will clearly identify the connection rules that you want to use for a specific model. When you create a new rule group, Tekla Structures automatically adds the framing conditions branches under it (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange etc.).

AutoConnection rule sets Each framing condition can contain rule sets, which you can use to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model. You only need to create AutoConnection rule sets if you plan to use different connections to connect similar framing conditions.

www.cadfamily.com




153

For example, you have beam to beam connections, some require clip angles, others need shear tabs. In this case, you need to set up rule sets to determine where each connection type should be used. Creating a rule set

Creating a subrule set

To add a new rule set under a framing condition: 1. 2.

Right-click the framing condition. A pop-up menu appears. Select New rule set. A New entry appears in the tree.

3.

Give the new rule set a descriptive name.

1. 2.

Right-click an existing rule set. A pop-up menu appears. Select Create additional rule sets. A New entry appears in the tree.

3.

Give the new subrule set a descriptive name.

Creating a new rule set or subrule set only adds a rule set to the setup tree. You need to define its contents separately. See Editing a rule set. Editing a rule set

You can edit the contents of a rule set (for example, change the name or add rules to it): 1. 2.

Right-click the rule set. A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.

3.

Select a rule from the Available rules list.

4.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set.

5.

In the right pane under Rules in rule set, fill in the acceptable values for the rule. You can either define an exact value, or minimum and maximum values.

6.

The name you enter in the Rule set name field is shown in the setup tree.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest. You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking the rule set and selecting Move Up or Move Down. For more information on rules, see AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 159).

154





Rules.zxt When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes subfolder in the current model folder and saves the AutoConnection information in a zipped text file called rules.zxt. You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available for other models (see also Project and firm folders (p. 96)). Each time you modify AutoConnection setup you need to recopy this file to the firm and/or project folders. When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the new setup.

We do not recommend that you edit the rules.zxt file using a text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest way to unpack the zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to zip the file after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unzipped file.

Changing a connection To change the connection in a rule set, use the Connection Browser dialog box which lists all the Tekla Structures connections available in the connection toolbars. To open the Connection Browser:

Deleting an item

1. 2.

Right-click a connection in the AutoConnection Setup tree. A pop-up menu appears. Select Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box.

3.

Select a connection and click OK to update the tree.

Use the Delete rule set command in the pop-up menu to delete a rule set from the Setup tree. This also deletes its subrule sets.

5.2 AutoDefaults setup Introduction

Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties.

Topics

AutoDefaults setup (p. 156) Connection properties files (p. 157) Defaults.zxt (p. 158) Priority of rule sets (p. 158) Editing connection properties (p. 158) For more information on how to use AutoDefaults, see Using AutoDefaults.

www.cadfamily.com




155

AutoDefaults setup With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different predefined connection properties. When you modify connections (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults setup. Use AutoDefaults to modify standard connection properties and save the modified properties for use in specific situations. Tree structure

To open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree structure:

Icon

Type

Description

Rule group

The 1st level in the tree contains rule groups. The rule groups are user-definable. They help you to group rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, and models.

Connection page

The next two levels show all the connections available on the toolbars. They are predefined and you cannot change them.

Connection

Rule sets

Rule set

Under each connection you can create rule sets to specify which connection properties to use when specific conditions within the model are met.

Connection properties file

Every branch in the tree ends with connection properties file(s) (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that you want to use again. See Saving connection properties (p. 157).

You define AutoDefaults rule sets in the same way as AutoConnection rule sets. See AutoConnection rule sets (p. 153). Tekla Structures saves the AutoDefaults rules in the defaults.zxt file in the current model folder. You may want to copy defaults.zxt and all the connection properties files

156





associated with it (for example, sec_0-190.j141) to the firm or project folders to use in other models. See Defaults.zxt (p. 158).

Connection properties files By default, each connection has a standard properties file which defines the standard properties for the connection (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that you want to use again in separate properties files and give them a distinctive name.

Saving connection properties To save connection properties for later use in similar conditions within the model, you can save them in a properties file: 1. 2.

Set the properties you want to save (for example, bolt, profile, material properties). In the Save as field, enter a distinctive name for the connection properties. Enter the same name in the Connection code field and click Save as.

When you save connection properties to use with AutoDefaults, it is a good idea to enter the same name in the Save as and Connection code fields on the General tab. This means you can easily check later which properties Tekla Structures used in specific situations. Tekla Structures does not automatically show the AutoDefault values in the connection properties fields. Tekla Structures creates the properties file in an Attributes subfolder in the current model folder. The filename consists of the name you entered in Save as and the extension .jXXX, where XXX is the connection number (for example, sec_0-190.j141).

Access to properties files To view the list of properties files for a certain connection:

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

In the AutoDefaults Setup tree, select a properties file (for example, standard.j144). Right-click the selected properties file. A pop-up menu appears.

3.

Click Select connection parameters.... Tekla Structures displays the Attribute File List dialog box, containing the existing properties files for the connection.




157

Defaults.zxt When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes sub-folder in the current model folder and saves the AutoDefaults setup in a zipped text file, defaults.zxt. You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available in other models. See also Project and firm folders (p. 96)). Each time you modify the AutoDefaults setup, you need to recopy this file to the firm, or project folders. When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the new setup.

We do not recommend that you edit the defaults.zxt file using a text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest way to unpack the .zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to repack the file after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unpacked file.

Priority of rule sets Tekla Structures processes AutoDefaults rule sets in the order in which they appear in the tree, so you can control the selection of properties. Usually, one framing condition, profile type, and orientation can have several property combinations, for example, a different profile height. Example

For example, if you have properties files and rules for maximum profile heights of 150, 160, 170 and 190 mm, and AutoDefaults is selecting properties for a height of 158 mm, three properties files are valid. AutoDefaults selects the first one to match (in this case, 160 mm). Where there is no match, you will need a default rule and properties file.You should set the default rule so that it does not define the profile height and is the last item in the branch. In this way the default rule will always be the last one to match and any properties file that matches the profile height will override it.

Editing connection properties To edit connection properties in the AutoDefaults Setup tree: 1. 2.

Right-click a connection standard.j file (for example, standard.j144). A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit connection parameters to open the connection dialog box.

3.

Set the properties as you would when manually creating connections.

4.

Type a descriptive name for these properties in the Save as text box and click Save as. Use a name that distinguishes these as AutoDefaults setup.

5.

Click Cancel to close the dialog box and return to the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.

If you click OK to close the dialog box, you need to load the default properties next time you use this connection. This ensures that AutoDefaults can modify the properties.

6.

158

Right-click the standard.j again. Click Select connection parameters....





7.

The Attribute File List opens. It contains the properties that have been set and saved in the connection dialog box.

8.

You can now apply any of the properties that have been saved in a rule set.

5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules Introduction

You can use the rules listed in the sections below to accurately select connections and connection properties when using AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Using these rules you can create your own standards to apply project or company defaults.

General

The general rules are:

• •

www.cadfamily.com

Profile name: the name in the Name field in the Profile catalog dialog box. Profile type: use the following table to find the correct number:

Profile type

Number

I

1

L

2

Z

3

U

4

Plate

5

Round bar

6

Pipe

7

Square pipe

8

C

9

T

10

ZZ

15

CC

16




159

Orientation

Profile type

Number

CW

17

Polygon plate

51

•

Number of secondaries.

•

Number of primaries.

•

Material name.

Depending on the relative angle a beam, the connections can be classified as:

•

Sloped angle (relative to primary part cross section) The longitudinal axis of the secondary part follows the slope of the longitudinal axis of the primary part.

•

Skewed angle (relative to primary part longitudinal axis) The longitudinal axis of the secondary part is skewed according to the primary part cross section. The angle is the smaller of the angles between the longitudinal axis of the secondary part and the primary part Z or Y axis.

•

Cant angle For rotated secondary parts.

Sloped, skewed, and cant angle value can be 0 - 90 degrees. Do not use negative values.

Dimensions

160

• •

Profile depth Web depth





For profiles with an upper and lower flange, web depth is: h - t1 - t2 - 2*r1 Or, if t2 is zero: h - 2*t - 2*r1 For profiles with one flange, web depth is h - t - r1 - r2.

Forces and strengths

•

Web thickness

• • •

Flange thickness

•

Bending moment

Shear force Axial force

Combining and iterating properties AutoDefaults includes these features:

Using these features

www.cadfamily.com

Feature

Description

Combining

You can save connection properties files covering different groups of properties, then use these files to define many rules. For example you can have one file for bolt properties and another for profile properties. Tekla Structures combines the files when it runs AutoDefaults.

Iterating

Tekla Structures tests properties until the connection symbol is yellow or green. Iteration changes connection properties automatically if connection fails, even if the rules would match. If Connection Check is set on, the iteration results in connection properties that have passed the check.

To use either of these features for a rule set: 1. 2.

Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefault Settings... Browse the tree and right-click a rules set.

3.

Select Edit rule set...

4.

Set Parameters files selection to one of the following options:

Option

Description

Use combination of first parameters

Tekla Structures uses the properties files it finds in the first matching sub-rule set and does not check other rule sets.

Iterate until the connection symbol is green

Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds matching properties that leave the connection symbol green.




161

Option

Description

Iterate until the connection symbol is yellow

Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds matching properties that leave the connection symbol yellow.

Use combination of all parameters

Tekla Structures checks all rule sets and uses properties files in all matching rule sets. The order of properties files is important, since the last overrides.

The order of files in the tree is important. When Tekla Structures combines the properties files, the most recent files (the lowest in the tree) override previous ones. If you leave properties blank, Tekla Structures does not override previous properties with blank properties.

Limitations Tekla Structures cannot iterate properties files directly. Use a single iteration rule set with sub rule sets. You cannot have many parallel iteration rule sets. Use a single iteration rule set and place it just before the default rule set. Place the combination rule sets above the iteration rule set in the tree. Combination rule sets can only be one level deep. Tekla Structures disregards empty rule sets, so include at least one rule in each rule set. See also

Combining properties (p. 162) Iteration with connection check (p. 163)

Combining properties The AutoDefaults combine feature combines separate properties files into one file. This means you define fewer files, because you use one file for several rules. If files contain different values for the same property, Tekla Structures uses the last property it finds. See the image below.

162





See also

Combining and iterating properties (p. 161)

Iteration with connection check This example shows how you can use the iteration feature of AutoDefaults. In this example iteration sets the number of bolts according to the result of the connection check. When using this rule group for a connection in the model, AutoDefaults sets the number of bolts until the connection symbol is green.

www.cadfamily.com




163

The iteration rule forces Tekla Structures to tests sub rules until the connection symbol is green in the model. Creating iteration rules

First, create connection properties files for each number of bolts. See Editing connection properties (p. 158). 1. 2. 3.

Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings... Right-click the tree and select New rule group. Click the rule group and rename it to "Iteration example". Browse the tree and find connection 144. Right-click it and select Create additional rule sets....

4.

Right-click the rule set and select Edit rule set..., to open the AutoDefault rules dialog box.

5.

Change the Rule set name to "ITERATION".

6.

Set Parameters file selection to Iterate until the connection symbol is green.

7.

Click OK.

8.

To create a rule set "2 bolts", right-click the first rule set and select Create additional rule sets....

9.

Right-click the new rule set and select Edit rule set.... AutoDefault rules dialog box appears.

10. Select rule Secondary 1 depth and set the minimum and maximum depth values for two bolts. 11. Set Parameters file selection to Use combination of first parameters. 12. Click OK. 13. Right-click the connection properties file standard.j144, and click Select connection parameters.. to open the Attribute File List dialog box. Select the properties file for two bolts and click OK. 14. Repeat steps 8 to 13 for other rule sets. Using rules and check together

You can use the connection check result when applying AutoDefaults with iteration. If a rule matches, but connection do not pass the check and symbol remains red, AutoDefaults continues testing other rules and properties until the connection symbol is green. To apply a rule group and connection check for a connection:

164





1. 2.

Open the connection properties dialog box. Load the properties.

3.

Click General tab and set AutoDefaults Rule Group to the "Iteration example" you created.

4.

Click Design type tab and set Connection check to Yes.

5.

Enter the load from secondary members in the fields Shear, Tension, Moment.

6.

Click OK to create the connection.

To see which rules AutoDefaults used, right-click the connection symbol, and select Inquire.

Checking

To see which values AutoDefaults set, double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box, select , then click Load.

Reaction forces and UDL You can save reaction forces:

• •

In the user-defined attributes of a part (for AutoConnection and AutoDefaults). On the Design tab in the connection dialog box (for AutoDefaults).

Using reaction forces

When you use reaction forces in a rule and AutoDefaults is activate, Tekla Structures first searches for reaction forces in the corresponding connection’s properties. If they do not contain reaction forces, Tekla Structures searches the user-defined attributes of the secondary part of the connection. If Tekla Structures finds no forces there, you cannot use reaction force rules.

Shear force calculation

Shear force calculation is the exception. If you have not given any reaction force values, shear force is calculated using the UDL shear force routine. The UDL calculation is based on the AISC ASD Specification and is mainly intended for use with imperial units. It uses the yield stress value, profile dimensions, and UDL percentage to calculate the maximum allowable shear force. Tekla Structures compares the result with the Shear force rule in AutoDefaults.

• •

Yield stress is defined in the material catalog.

•

UDL percentage is taken either from the connection dialog box or from a variable.

Profile dimensions come from the profile catalog.

UDL for AutoConnection

To switch on UDL calculation for AutoConnection:

UDL for AutoDefaults

To switch on UDL calculation for AutoDefaults:

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

• •

On the Design tab in the connection dialog box, set the field Use UDL to Yes. Enter the UDL percentage in the UDL % field. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a default percentage (set using the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT).

Set the variable XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL to TRUE. Use the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT to set the UDL percentage.




165

166





6

CNC

Introduction

CNC (Computer Numerical Control) refers to the operation of a machine tool via motors, switches, and so on, with a computer controlling the manufacturing process. During the manufacturing process a machine tool or machining center cuts or shapes the piece of material.

In this chapter

This chapter describes how to export CNC data from Tekla Structures models for use by machine tools. We explain how to export the data in different formats, such as DSTV, Peddimat, and DXF. We describe how to generate pop-marks in NC files. Pop marks are small holes that help the shop assemble individual parts to form an assembly. Then we explain how to generate hard stamps in NC files. Hard stamps are text marks that can contain various kind of information about parts. Finally we explain the plate nesting procedure.

Contents


• •

NC files (p. 167)

•

DXF (p. 175)

•

Peddimat (p. 176)

•

Pop-marks (p. 178)

•

Hard stamps (p. 181)

•

Plate nesting (p. 183)

DSTV (p. 174)

6.1 NC files After you finish detailing in Tekla Structures, you can deliver the results to the next phase. You can use CNC links to send the information directly to automatic cutting and welding machines, or produce data for MIS systems (management information systems). Formats

Tekla Structures produces NC files in the following formats: 1. 2.

DSTV Peddimat For DOS

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 CNC

167

For Windows 3.

Daito

4.

DXF

Tekla Structures creates the files from completed regions of the Tekla Structures model. Tekla Structures translates part length, hole positions, bevels, notches, and cuts into sets of coordinates that sawing, drilling and profile burners can use to create the part in the shop. DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association. Often NC machines can use these files directly to punch, drill, and copy parts. For other machines you may need to translate DSTV files to suit the specific machine. If you need machine-specific files, you may have to post-process the NC files Tekla Structures produces, using an NC Translator program.

Tekla Structures model NC files NC software NC machine Finished machined part To define NC settings and create NC files, go to File > CNC > NC files... Topics

Setting up NC files (p. 168) Pop-mark settings (p. 179) Defining destination machines for parts (p. 170) Defining hole properties (p. 172) Creating NC files (p. 172) Defining the output format and folder (p. 173)

Setting up NC files Use the NC file settings dialog box to edit machine-specific settings, such as the file format. This helps you sort NC files into machine-specific folders. You can also specify that different

168


CNC www.cadfamily.com



parts be machined by different NC machines, for example, plates by one machine, drilled parts by another, etc.

NC file settings Plates Plasma cut Drilled parts To set up NC files: 1. 2.

Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... Click Add to open the NC file settings dialog box, which contains several tabs:

Tab

Description

More information

Files and part selection

Output format, the profile types that machines can handle, and maximum hole diameters

Defining the output format and folder (p. 173)

Slot conversion options, standard tooling for Peddimat

Defining hole properties (p. 172)

Hard stamp options

Hard stamp properties (p. 181)

Holes and cuts

Hard stamp

Defining selection criteria (p. 170)

Defining Peddimat standard tooling (p. 177)

Tekla Structures saves the settings files in the attributes folder under the current model folder. See also

Pop-mark settings (p. 179) Defining destination machines for parts (p. 170) Creating NC files (p. 172) Fittings affect NC data (p. 174)

www.cadfamily.com




169

Defining destination machines for parts To define the limits of an NC machine: 1. 2.

Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Files and Part selection tab. In the Selection criteria for parts section, use the Maximum size and Profile type fields to define the limits of the NC machine, for parts and profile types. Larger parts will be sent to the next machine.

Tekla Structures uses DSTV standard names for profile types: I, U, L, M, R, B, CC, T, SO. See also Profile type (p. 171). Inner corners shape

Use the options in the Holes and cuts tab, Inner corner shape list box to define the shape of the inner contour, which can be radial, tangential or square. Inner contours are always rounded. Enter a radius for rounding in the Radius field.

See also

Creating NC files (p. 172)

Defining selection criteria Each NC file setting is meant for one NC machine. The selection criteria determine the part types and maximum sizes the machine is meant to or able to process. To define the selection criteria:

170

1. 2.

Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... The NC Files dialog box appears. Select a setting from the list and click Edit.... If the list is empty, click Add... to create new settings.

3.

In the NC file settings dialog box, define the selection criteria.





Maximum size The maximum size options define the maximum length, width, and height of the parts the machine can handle. Larger parts are sent to other machines.

Profile type The machine can handle all the profile types which have the option Yes in the Profile type list. Profile types are named according to the DSTV (p. 174) standard:

www.cadfamily.com

DSTV profile type

Description

I

I profiles

U

U and C profiles

L

Angle profiles

M

Rectangular tubes

R

Round bars and tubes

B

Plate profiles

CC

CC profiles




171

DSTV profile type

Description

T

Tee shaped profiles

SO

Z profiles and all the other types of profile

The DTSV standard does not support curved beams, so Tekla Structures does not support them, either.

Round tubes

By default Tekla Structures unwraps round tubes as plate profiles and uses the plate profile type B in the NC file header data. To change this, use the variable XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC.

Maximum size of holes The Maximum size of holes list defines how large holes the machine is able to drill. Parts containing larger holes are sent to other machines. The hole size is connected to material thickness (or plate thickness). Each row contains the maximum hole diameter and material thickness. Row 60 45 means that when the material thickness is 45 mm or smaller, holes of a diameter of 60 mm and smaller will be drilled. The remaining rows serve the same purpose.

Defining hole properties Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Holes and cuts tab. You have the following options: Slotted holes

Options that define slotted holes:

• •

Ignore slots: deletes slotted holes

•

Four small holes, one at each corner: drills 4 smaller holes, one at each corner

•

Internal contours: flame-cuts the slots as internal contours

•

Slots: leaves slots as they are.

A single hole in the center of the slot: drills a single hole in the center of the slotted hole

Maximum hole diameter

Holes and slotted holes that are larger than the maximum hole diameter are manufactured as internal contours.

Maximum size of holes

Use the Maximum size of holes section of the Files and part selection tab to define the maximum hole diameter for different plate thicknesses. Once you have finished defining NC settings, click OK to save your changes and close the NC file settings dialog box.

See also

Creating NC files (p. 172)

Creating NC files To create NC files: If necessary, define the NC file settings. See Setting up NC files (p. 168). 1.

172

Go to the NC files dialog box, or click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to open it.





2.

Select the Create checkboxes in the NC file settings section to indicate which NC file settings to use.

3.

Against the Create files for field, select a checkbox to indicate the parts you want to create NC files for:

• • 4.

All parts Selected parts Click Create to create the NC files.

Tekla Structures does not create NC files for curved beams.

See also

Setting up NC files (p. 168) Defining the output format and folder (p. 173)

Defining the output format and folder Format

Folder

Use the options in NC file settings > Files and part selection, File format field to select the file format. For more information on formats, see:

• •

DSTV (p. 174)

•

Peddimat (p. 176)

DXF (p. 175)

By default Tekla Structures creates NC files in the current model folder. To change this: 1. 2.

Go to the Files and part selection tab. Click the Browse button next to the File location field.

3.

In the Set file location dialog box, locate the correct folder. If the folder does not exist, use the Create New Folder button to create it.

You must select a file in the destination folder to get the folder selected in the File location field. It does not matter which file you select. If there are no files in the folder, create one there, for example an empty .txt file.

4. Relative paths

Click OK. Tekla Structures displays the folder path in the File location field.

You can also enter a folder name or a relative path directly in the File location field. The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is set to C:\NC.

File location

NC files are created to C:\NC

www.cadfamily.com

.\

C:\NC\ModelName

.\MyFiles

C:\NC\ModelName\MyFiles

C:\TEMP

C:\TEMP




173

The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is NOT set.

File location

NC files are created to model folder

See also

.\

model folder

.\MyFiles

model folder\MyFiles

C:\TEMP

C:\TEMP

Setting up NC files (p. 168) Creating NC files (p. 172)

6.2 DSTV DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association. The data for NC output comes from the model. We recommend that you complete detailing and create drawings prior to producing NC output. To create DSTV files: 1. 2.

Select the parts from which you want to create NC files. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box.

3.

Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box.

4.

Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select DSTV.

5.

In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the settings.

6.

Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.

7.

Go to the NC File settings section of the NC files dialog box and select the DSTV file settings you created.

8.

Select the Selected parts checkbox.

9.

Click Create.

This will create nc1 files for all selected parts and put them in the model folder. The filename consists of a position number and the extension nc1. See also

Pop-marks (p. 178) Setting up NC files (p. 168) Defining the output format and folder (p. 173)

Fittings affect NC data When creating NC files in DSTV format, the method you use to cut the end of the beam affects beam length in the NC file. The illustration below shows the default length when you have fitting and line cuts.

174





Fitting affects the length Line cut does not affect length Line cut Fitting The overall length of a beam will be the fitted net length of the beam. This means that Tekla Structures always takes the fitting into account when calculating beam length. For lines, polygons, or part cuts, the cut does not affect beam length, but the overall length in the NC/ DSTV file will be the gross (initial modeled) length of the beam. Shortest length

If you want to use the shortest possible length in the NC file, you can change this so that the cut affects part length: 1. 2.

Open the Advanced options dialog and enter 1 in the Value field for variable XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH in the CNC category. Restart Tekla Structures.

If you want to include both net and cross length into NC file header data, set the variable XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH.

Net and cross length

6.3 DXF This section explains how to create NC data in 2D DXF format. Preconditions

Before running a DXF conversion, you must first create NC files in DSTV format. For more information, see DSTV (p. 174). You can then use a separate Tekla Structures program, dstv2dxf.exe to convert the files to DXF format. The program converts NC DSTV files to 2D DXF files. Tekla Structures only writes one side of a part (front, top, back or bottom) to file, so this export format is most suited to plates.

Topics

www.cadfamily.com

Converting DSTV files to DXF (p. 176)




175

Converting DSTV files to DXF The most convenient way to convert DSTV files to DXF files is to use the macro Convert_DSTV2DXF, located in Tools > Macros.... You can also use a dstv2dxf converter to convert DSTV files to DXF files. To start the conversion: 1. 2.

Save the *.nc1 file(s) in the dstv2dxf folder. Double-click the suitable dstv2dxf conversion .bat file (for example tekla_dstv2dxf_metric_conversion.bat) in the TeklaStructures/ 14.0/nt/dstv2dxf folder.

3.

The converter converts the files to dxf format in the same folder.

If you need to adjust the conversion settings, edit the settings in the file dstv2dxf.def and restart the conversion. For more information on settings, see the document DEF File Description.pdf in the same folder.

6.4 Peddimat This section explains how to create NC files in Peddimat format. The files you create can be downloaded straight to the CNC machinery software. Topics

Creating NC files in Peddimat format (p. 176) Output formats for Peddimat (p. 177) Setting up NC files (p. 168) Defining Peddimat standard tooling (p. 177)

Creating NC files in Peddimat format To create NC files in Peddimat format: 1. 2.

Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box. Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box.

3.

Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select the approriate Peddimat option.

For more information on the Peddimat options, see Output formats for Peddimat (p. 177).

See also

1. 2.

In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the file. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.

3.

Go to the NC files dialog box, select the Peddimat file settings you created.

4.

Select the All parts checkbox.

5.

Click Create.

Output formats for Peddimat (p. 177) Defining Peddimat standard tooling (p. 177)

176





Output formats for Peddimat To set the Peddimat format, go to NC file settings > File and part selection. This table shows the available output formats for NC files for Peddimat machines:

See also

Option

Description

Peddimat for Windows

Supports standard Peddimat for Windows

Peddimat for Windows (one cope file)

Supports Peddimat for Windows with a single file containing all copes

Peddimat for Windows (two cope files)

Peddimat for Windows with two cope files. The copes at the right and left ends of the part are written to two separate files

Peddimat for Windows (without copes)

Peddimat for Windows without cope files

Peddimat for DOS

Supports Peddimat for DOS

Creating NC files in Peddimat format (p. 176) Defining Peddimat standard tooling (p. 177)

Defining Peddimat standard tooling You can define standard tooling before creating NC files in Peddimat format. Standard tooling minimizes the number of tool changes in the workshop. To define standard Peddimat tooling diameters, go to the Holes and cuts tab in the NC file settings dialog box. Example

The following example first shows the tooling from Peddimat for Windows, then the settings in Tekla Structures:

To ensure that the part origin is calculated correctly, even if the part is coped and mitered, select Calculate part origin without copes on the Holes and cuts tab. See also

www.cadfamily.com

Setting up NC files (p. 168)




177

6.5

Pop-marks Tekla Structures can generate pop-marks in NC files to help position parts that will be manually welded to the main part. Pop-marks are usually made using a drilling machine. To include pop-marks in the NC file, you have to define a list of part names to pop-mark in the Pop-mark settings dialog box. To access the dialog box, select File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... > Pop-marks...

You can save the pop-mark settings in a .ncp file, which Tekla Structures saves in the attributes folder under the current model folder by default. Tekla Structures only creates pop-marks for parts for which you have defined properties. The Pop-marking options tab in the Pop-mark settings dialog box contains options for controlling the settings for marks in the back of parts, and other additional options. For more information on these settings, see Pop-marking options (p. 180). To have Tekla Structures create pop-marks when creating NC files, select the check box in NC files > NC file settings: > Pop-marks.

Pop-marking also affects numbering. For example, if two parts have different pop-marks, or one part has popmarks and the other one does not, Tekla Structures gives the parts different numbers. See What affects numbering.

Creating pop-marks To create pop-marks in an NC file: 1. 2.

Define and save the pop-mark settings in the Pop-mark settings (p. 179) dialog box. To display pop-marks in a model view, select Pop-marking options > Show pop-marks in the model.

3.

Create the NC files. Remember to select the Pop-marks checkbox in the NC files dialog box.

Pop-marks are written in the NC file BO block as 0 mm diameter holes. Tekla Structures displays thick red lines for each pop-mark pair in the model view which was last updated.

178





Topics

Pop-mark settings (p. 179) Pop-marking options (p. 180)

Pop-mark settings The Pop-mark settings dialog box includes pop-mark settings that define:

• •

Which parts are pop-marked Where the pop-marks are created

Tekla Structures saves the settings file .ncp in the attributes folder under the current model folder. Tekla Structures looks for this file in the current model folder, then uses the standard folder search order. See Folder search order (p. 94). You can use wildcards (* ? [ ] ) in the Main part name and Secondary part name fields in the Pop-mark settings dialog box. For example, HE* matches all parts with a profile name that begins with the characters "HE". For more information on wildcards, see Using wildcards.

The order of the lines in the dialog box is important. Tekla Structures uses the match it finds, so you should put the most limiting definition first, and the most generic one last.

Pop-mark settings

www.cadfamily.com

Option

Description

Main part profile type

The main part profile types to pop-mark. The list box contains profile types corresponding to the DSTV standard.

Main part name

The main part profile names to pop-mark. You can enter several part names separated by commas.

Sec part profile type

Secondary part profile type.

Secondary part name

Secondary part name. You can enter several part names separated by commas.




179

Option

Description

Pop-mark location

Defines how the secondary part is projected onto a main part.

•

Left side: The left side of the secondary part is marked on the main part. The left side is the side of the secondary part that points in the negative direction of the main part local coordinate system.

•

Right side: The right side of the secondary

part is marked on the main part.

•

Both sides: combines Left side and Right side.

•

Center: Center of the secondary part.

•

Left side holes: Marks the main part with the hole positions on the left side of the secondary.

•

Right side holes: Marks the main part with the hole positions on the right side of the secondary.

•

Both side holes: combines Left side holes and Right side holes.

•

Middle line: Marks two points on the middle

line of the secondary part x axis. Edge distance

Minimum distance from a pop-mark to the edge of the main part. Tekla Structures does not create pop-marks inside this distance. If a pop-mark is inside the defined edge distance, Tekla Structures moves it (with the exception of Center).

Move to flange

Moves pop-marks to the main part flange.

Secondary popmarks

Creates pop-marks into secondary parts.

Pop-marking options Options for marks in the back

Other options

Use the options for marks in the back face of parts to set the NC machine to:

• •

Rotate the part if there are items on the back of it and none on the front.

•

Rotate the part and drill pop-marks through to the back if there are no items on the front but some in the back or more pop-marks on the back than on the front. The hole diameter must also be defined.

• •

No pop-marks on overlapping holes deletes a pop-mark if a hole overlaps it.

Drill the pop-marks through to the back, if there are no other items there. The hole diameter must also be defined.

Pop-mark centres of studs adds pop-marks to the center point of studs. Uncheck this

option to prevent studs from being pop-marked.

•

180

Show pop-marks in the model displays pop-marks in model views.





Examples

The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to mark the center point of all round secondary profiles on a main part, and not to create pop-marks closer than 10 mm to the main part edge.

The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to project the hole locations in secondary plates onto a main part:

6.6 Hard stamps Tekla Structures can output DSTV files that include hard stamps for the workshop to apply to main and secondary parts. Hard stamps are text marks that contain information about parts and assemblies, for example, project and lot number, phase, or part and assembly position.

Creating hard stamps To include hard stamps in a DSTV file: 1. 2.

In the NC file settings dialog box, go to the Hard stamps tab. Select the checkbox Create hard stamp.

3.

In the Available elements list, select the elements to include in the hard stamp.

4.

Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.

Example

This example shows a hard stamp that contains the elements Phase, Part position, Material, and Text.

See also

For more information on hard stamp settings, see Hard stamp properties (p. 181), XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP (p. 383) and XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK (p. 345).

Hard stamp properties Use the options on the Hard stamp tab to define the properties of hard stamps on main and/or secondary parts, including:

• •

www.cadfamily.com

Information contained in hard stamps (p. 182) The order in which the different elements appear




181

•

Text height and case

•

Position of hard stamps (p. 182)

•

Hard stamps for secondary parts (p. 182)

Information contained in hard stamps You can include the following information in hard stamps:

Element

Description

Project number

Adds the project number to the hard stamp.

Lot number

Adds the lot number to the hard stamp.

Phase

Adds the phase number to the hard stamp.

Part position

Prefix and position number of the part

Assembly position

Prefix and position number of the assembly

Material

The material of the part.

Finish

The type of finish.

User-defined attribute

Adds a user-defined attribute (user fields 1-4) to the mark.

Text

Opens a dialog box where you can add userdefined text to the hard stamp.

If you include part position and/or assembly position in the hard stamp, they affect the DSTV filename as follows:

• •

Part position: P1.nc1, P2.nc1

•

Assembly and part position: A1-P1.nc1, A2-P2.nc1

Assembly position: A1.nc1, A2.nc1

Position of hard stamps Use the options in the Position along the part and Position in depth of part list boxes to define the position of hard stamps on parts. The options are:

• •

Middle, Middle

•

Middle, Right

•

Bottom, Middle

•

Bottom, Left

•

Bottom, Right

•

Top, Middle

•

Top, Left

•

Top, Right

Middle, Left

Hard stamps for secondary parts To create hardstamps also for secondary parts, set XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP to TRUE in Tools > Advanced options > CNC.

182





Tekla Structures does not create hard stamps for plates.

6.7 Plate nesting Tekla Structures Plate Nesting finds the best layout pattern for cutting plates from the available metal sheets. Tekla Structures Plate Nesting uses DSTV NC files to create the nesting tasks and the nesting layout. The results are DXF drawings, which you can view using the Result Viewer. You need to have the Plate Nesting module acquired in your Tekla Structures license entitlement in order to do plate nesting. The plate nesting functionality is automatically available in Tekla Structures if acquired. Phases

Plate nesting has following phases: 1. 2.

Create NC files. See DSTV (p. 174). Creating nesting tasks (p. 183)

3.

Editing nesting tasks (p. 183)

4.

Nesting tasks (p. 185)

5.

Viewing nesting results (p. 186)

Creating nesting tasks First you need to create NC files of the parts to nest. For more information, see DSTV (p. 174). Then follow these steps: 1. 2.

Click File > Export > CNC > Define Nesting Tasks... to display the Tekla Structures Plate Nesting - DSTV2TASK dialog box. Set DSTV Directory to point to the NC files folder.

3.

Enter a name for the task group.

4.

Select the NC files you want to nest from the upper list, then click Add.

5.

Click Start.

6.

Tekla Structures prompts you ...directory does not exist. This is just for information. Answer OK to these prompts.

7.

To preview the parts, highlight them on the Created Parts list.

8.

Close the dialog box.

Tekla Structures groups the selected NC files into nesting tasks. Each task consists of parts with the same material thickness and grade. Next step

Editing nesting tasks (p. 183)

Editing nesting tasks This is the second phase in plate nesting, where you set the manufacturing information or nesting tasks.

www.cadfamily.com




183

Next step

1.

Select File > Export > CNC > Edit Nesting Tasks to display the Tekla Structures Plate Nesting - TaskEdit dialog box.

2.

Click Browse to select the task.

3.

Enter additional manufacturing information.

4.

To define the stock required, click Define Stocks. For more information, see Defining stocks (p. 184).

5.

To preview the plates in the task, click Define Parts.

6.

To save the settings, click Save.

7.

Click Yes, when Tekla Structures prompts you that the task file already exists. The Save Task Information dialog box appears.

8.

Click OK to save the selected settings for the other tasks in the group.

Nesting tasks (p. 185)

Task properties The following illustration shows cutting cap and edge allowances: Cutting Cap defines the cutting gap between nested parts to allow for tool size. Edge allowance defines the clearance around the edge of a stock sheet to allow for trimming or

clamping.

Left Cutting Cap Bottom Bridge width

Defining stocks You need to define the stock to use for nesting tasks. See Editing nesting tasks (p. 183). The stock sheet information includes the number of distinct stocks, the sheet size, and quantity. 1.

184

Click Define stock to display the Stock sheet specification dialog box. This is where you define the stock sheet information, including the number of distinct stocks. You also need to prioritize stock sizes. See also Stock properties (p. 185).





2.

To define which stock to use, select a stock from the Available Stocks list, then click Add to display the Stock specification - Add dialog box.

3.

Set the stock properties and click OK. The stock appears in the Selected Stocks list.

4.

After selecting the stock you require, click OK to return to the TaskEdit dialog box.

Stock properties You can define the following properties for stock:

•

Width and Length

The width and length of the stock sheet. In the imperial version of Tekla Structures, you can either enter feet and inches, or just inches.

•

Quantity

Quantity of stock sheets of a particular size to use for the task. You can use a maximum of 9999 for each stock size.

•

Stretchable

You can use this option for tasks nesting more than one part. For stock sheets in reels or rolls, Tekla Structures Plate Nesting can stretch the sheet length to best fit all the parts.

•

Priority

Defines the order in which Tekla Structures Plate Nesting uses the stock sheets. 1 has the highest priority, 99 has the lowest.

Nesting tasks After you create tasks and edit the plates, you can run the nesting program. In this phase, Tekla Structures Plate Nesting optimizes the layout of plates on the stock sheets and saves the layout in DXF files. 1.

www.cadfamily.com

2.

Click File > CNC > Plate Nesting > Nesting… to display the Tekla Structures Plate Nesting - NestPRO dialog box. Select the tasks to nest, then click Add.

3.

Click Start to start the nesting process.

4.

When the nesting process ends, close the dialog box.




185

Error

If you get the error messages Not all shapes are nested. Insufficient stock, you need to create the required stock and run the nesting again, because the available stock was not large enough.

Next step

Viewing nesting results (p. 186)

Viewing nesting results To view the nesting process results you need to start the Result viewer: 1. 2.

Click File > Export > CNC > View Nesting Resultsto display the DWG Viewer window. Click File > Open.

3.

Select the task file and click OK.

Zoom in or out in Result viewer window using the Ctrl key and the mouse wheel.

186





7

Introduction

Import and export

Tekla Structures includes several tools you can use to import and export models and the information they contain. You can:

• •

Import data from other software and use it to create models and reports. Export data from Tekla Structures to use in manufacturing information systems and structural analysis programs.

In this chapter

This chapter explains how to import and export data in Tekla Structures, and describes the formats and tools available. The first section covers the basics of import and export. The final two sections give more details about the import and export options.

Assumed background

You should have some experience of modeling in Tekla Structures.

Contents


• •

Import and export basics (p. 187)

•

Importing models (p. 194)

•

Exporting files (p. 219)

•

Reference models (p. 271)

•

Tekla WebViewer (p. 278)

Conversion files (p. 192)

7.1 Import and export basics This section gives you an overview of importing and exporting data in Tekla Structures, as well as step-by-step instructions. It includes the different import and export formats available in Tekla Structures. It also describes the conversion files you can use to import profiles and materials. Topics

Using import and export (p. 188) Available formats (p. 188)

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Import and export

187

Re-importing a model (p. 197) Revision control options (p. 197) Creating reports of import (p. 198)

Using import and export You can use import and export in Tekla Structures for several purposes:

•

Import 2D or 3D models created by other software, then detail them using Tekla Structures. Once detailing is complete, export the model and return it to the architect or engineer for review.

•

Export Tekla Structures models to use in analysis and design (several formats). Then import the design and analysis results back to the Tekla Structures model.

•

Export data for use in the fabrication phase:

•

You can export CNC data (Computer Numerical Control) for use by automated cutting, boring and welding machinery,

•

MIS (Manufacturing Information Systems) so that fabricators can track project progress.

Available formats The following tables list many of the different software and formats you can use in Tekla Structures to import and export data. Locate the software in the first column (Software). Read across the columns to locate import and export tools (for example, DWG/DXF, FEM). Each cell displays the import and export formats (for example, Calma, XML, SDNF). You may also be able to exchange data with software not listed here.

Importing into Tekla Structures Import tool –> Software

DWG/ DXF

ArchiCAD

2D, 3D

AutoCAD

2D, 3D

BUS Cadmatic

FEM

CIMsteel

XML BUS

2D, 3D

Calma ESA Prima WIN

Calma DSTV

ETABS

188

CAD

CIS2

SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles)


Import and export www.cadfamily.com



Other

Import tool –> Software

DWG/ DXF

FEM

FabTrol

CIMsteel

CAD

CIS2

FrameWorks

FabTrol XML, SteelFab SDNF

GT Strudl

Other

CIS2

DGN (as Reference models (p. 271)) MicasPlus

IFC schema edition

IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 (as Reference models (p. 271))

MicasPlus

MicasPlus

MicroStation

DGN (as Reference models (p. 271))

ModelDraft Multiframe

2D, 3D

Nastran

STAAD

PDMS

SDNF

PDS


Plantview

Plantview

PowerFrame

DSTV

RAMSteel

CIS2

Revit

IFC 2X3

ROBOT RSTAB

DSTV 2D, 3D

SACS

CIS2

DSTV

STP

SACS

SDNF

SAP 2000


SDS/2

CIS2

SESAM S-frame

www.cadfamily.com


SDNF

SACS 2D, 3D

S-frame




189

Import tool –> Software

DWG/ DXF

FEM

CIMsteel

SAP2000

CAD SDNF

SmartPlant

CIS2


SPACE GASS

SDNF

Speedikon

HLI

STAAD

Other

2D, 3D

Stan 3d

STAAD Stan 3d

StruCad

SDNF DGN (as Reference models (p. 271))

Structural for MicroStation TriForma TriForma

CIS2

Exporting from Tekla Structures Export tool –> Software

DWG/ DXF

ArchiCAD

2D, 3D

AutoCAD

2D, 3D

FEM

CAD

Cadmatic

XML

Calma

Calma

FabTrol

CIS2 (Manufacturing)

FrameWorks Plus

CIS2

MIS

EJE

MIS

EPC

MIS

ESA Prima WIN

CIS2


DSTV

Eureka LPM

CIS1 & 2

Fabtrol

CIS2

FrameWorks

CIS1 & 2

GT Strudl

SDNF, PML

STAAD



Other

XML

ETABS FEM

190

CIMsteel



3D DGN

Export tool –> Software

DWG/ DXF

FEM

CIMsteel

CAD

IFC schema edition

IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3

MicroSAS

MicroSAS

MicroStation

3D DGN

ModelDraft Multiframe

PML 2D, 3D

Nastran

STAAD

PDS

SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles with end codes)

PDMS

SDNF

Plantview

Plantview

PowerFrame

CIS2

Revit

IFC 2X3

ROBOT

DSTV 2D, 3D

DSTV

SAP 2000

CIS2

SCIA

SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) SCIA

SDS/2

CIS2

SmartPlant

CIS2

DGN

SPACE GASS

SDNF

Speedikon

HLI

STAAD

2D, 3D

STAAD

Steel 2000 Steelcad

MIS 2D, 3D

SDNF

StruCad

SDNF

Structural for MicroStation TriForma TriForma

www.cadfamily.com

DGN

DSTV

RAM

RSTAB

Other

3D DGN

CIS2




191

7.2 Conversion files About conversion files

Conversion files map Tekla Structures profile and material names with names used in other software. Conversion files are simple text files, containing the Tekla Structures name in the first column, and the name used in the other software package in the second column. Columns are separated by a space. All parametric profiles must be entered in the profile conversion file. You can use the same conversion file both when importing and exporting models. You can specify the location of conversion files in most of the import and export tools.

•

If you leave the field blank, Tekla Structures looks for the conversion file defined by the variable XS_PROFDB, in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.

•

If you enter a conversion file name without a path, Tekla Structures searches for the file in the current model folder.

Tekla Structures includes several conversion files in the standard installation, and you can also create your own. See Creating conversion files (p. 192). Conversion files are located in the \environments\environment\profil folder. All conversion files have the extension cnv.

Converting twin profiles Tekla Structures also includes twin profile conversion files. Tekla Structures reads the twin profile conversion file before the profile conversion file, so you should include the profiles from the original model in the import. The twin profile conversion file is a text file containing the profile prefix (characters only) and the distance between the profiles in mm, separated by a space character. Tekla Structures converts all profiles with the specified prefix to twin profiles. Additional information

Creating conversion files (p. 192) Locating conversion files (p. 193) Sample conversion files (p. 193) Troubleshooting (p. 193) Importing models (p. 194)

Creating conversion files You can also create your own conversion files. To create a new conversion file: 1.

192

Open an existing conversion file using any text editor (e.g. Wordpad). See Locating conversion files (p. 193).





2.

Use Save as to give the file a new name.

3.

Edit the file, entering profile names recognized by Tekla Structures in the first column, and the corresponding name recognized by the other software in the second column. See Sample conversion files (p. 193).

Locating conversion files Standard conversion files are located in the profil folder for the environment you are using (for example, \environments\usimp\profil). Tekla Structures searches for profile conversion files:

• •

In the current model folder Using the path indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.

Sample conversion files Here are some sample conversion files for reference:

! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> SDNF ! ! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same ! as Tekla Structures-name. ! Tekla Structures-nameConverted-name C10X15.3C10X15.3 C10X20C10X20 C10X25C10X25 C10X30C10X30 C12X20.7C12X20.7 C12X25C12X25 C12X30C12X30 C15X33.9C15X33.9 C15X40C15X40 C15X50C15X50 C3X4.1 C3X4.1

! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> DSTV ! ! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same ! as Tekla Structures-name. ! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name C10X15.3 C10X20 C10X25 C10X30 C12X20.7 C12X25

C10X15.3 C10X20 C10X25 C10X30 C12X20.7 C12X25

Troubleshooting If you have problems importing a model, check the following:

www.cadfamily.com




193

Examples

• •

Are there any error messages in the Tekla Structures log file?

•

Are there are blank material definitions (" ", empty quotation marks) in your input file?

•

In your input file, see if profile position strings contain a space character (e.g. "Hand Rail" or "Thread 13").

Is the input file located in the current model folder?

Errors and corrections are highlighted in the following examples. Incorrect input file 00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread 4" 1 "TREAD4.5" "" 0.000000 0 0 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143 15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Correct input file 00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread_4" 1 "TREAD4.5" "A36" 0.000000 0 0 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143 15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.3 Importing models This section explains the basics of how to import a model created by a different system into Tekla Structures. It also contains details of the specific information you need to include for each type of import file. Topics

Import tools (p. 194) Overview of importing models (p. 195) Re-importing a model (p. 197) Creating reports of import (p. 198)

Import tools Use the following tools to import different file types into Tekla Structures:

194

• •

Importing DWG/DXF files (p. 199)

•

CAD import (p. 200)

•

CIS import (p. 199) (CIMsteel)

•

Steelfab import (p. 215)

•

Fabtrol XML import (p. 215)

FEM import (p. 202)





•

S-Frame import (p. 216)

•

MicasPlus import (p. 216)

•

Eureka LPM import (p. 216)

•

Model dump import (p. 206)

•

ASCII import (p. 206)

•

ASCII format description

•

Attribute import (p. 211)

Overview of importing models These steps explain the basics of how to import a model into Tekla Structures. You will also need to refer to other sections for information specific to a particular import type. See also Import tools (p. 194). To import a model: 1. 2.

Open Tekla Structures and create a new model. Click File > Import.

3.

Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New import model dialog box.

4.

Select the import type in the Type list box. See also Re-importing a model (p. 197).

5.

Enter a name for the import model in the Name field. The default name is import model. Tekla Structures uses the model name for revision control. For more information, see Revision control options (p. 197).

6.

Click Properties... to open a dialog box where you can define the settings for the import file type you selected.

7.

On the Parameters tab, enter a file name in the Input file field, or use the browse (...) button to set the path to the file.

8.

Enter values in the Origin fields if you want to import the file to a specific origin.

9.

Click OK to return to the New import model dialog box.

Finishing the import To complete the import: 1.

www.cadfamily.com

Click OK to open the Import models dialog box.




195

2.

Select the model to import.

3.

Click Import.

4.

Tekla Structures displays the Import model info dialog box. Select which version of parts to import.

5.

Click Accept all.

6.

Tekla Structures prompts Do you want to save the import model for subsequent imports? Click Yes.

7.

196

Tekla Structures displays the import model in a model view.





Re-importing a model If you need to re-import a model: Follow steps 1 to 4 in Overview of importing models (p. 195), but enter a new name in the Name field. If you use the same name as in the original import, Tekla Structures generates the warning Illegal name for import model. Tekla Structures uses this name to track revisions in the model. See also Revision control options (p. 197).

Revision control options You have the following options to specify the actions Tekla Structures takes when importing changed objects:

www.cadfamily.com




197

•

The left-hand column, Previous plan, lists the state of objects in your model, compared with the state of objects in the file to be imported. They can be New, Modified, Deleted, or Same.

•

Tekla Structures compares the state of objects being imported with those in your model. They can be Not in model, Different, or Same.

•

Use the list boxes in the rows under Not in model, Different, or Same to specify the actions to take when importing changed objects. The options are No action, Copy, Modify, or Delete.

You can only use Delete to delete objects that have been deleted from your model, not the imported model.

Creating reports of import Some of the import tools give you the option to create a report of the import. By default, Tekla Structures does not create reports when you import files. You specify the following information using the Report tab:

198

Field

Description

Create report

Select Yes to create a report of the imported model objects.

Display report

Select Yes to display the report file in the List dialog box.

Report template

Enter the path of the report template, or use the browse (...) button to locate it.

Report file name

Enter the path for the report file, or use the browse (...) button to locate it.





Importing DWG/DXF files The DWG/DXF import tools import 3D or 2D models, in DXF or DWG. You can import the file as parts and plates, or reference lines. To import DWG/DXF files, click File > Import > DWG/DXF.... You will need to include the following additional information about the import file:

•

Create:

•

Reference lines displays parts in the model using their reference lines in the original

model.

•

Parts displays the full profile of parts in the original model, based on the profile sizes in the Beam profile and Plate profile fields. You can only use metric profiles with this

option.

•

Check Use 2D import to import a two dimensional representation of the original model. This is useful when you use the reference line option. Leave Use 2D import blank to import the model in 3D.

CIS import See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select CIS Analyse model import from the Type list box. Use the following fields on the Parameters tab to specify CIS information when importing files:

Field

Description

Model type

Analysis or Design model.

CIS version

Use to select the CIS version:

•

CIS/1 imports files compatible with the

CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration.

•

CIS/2 imports files compatible with the

CIMsteel CIS/2 (STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.

www.cadfamily.com

Combine members

Defines whether or not the elements of a single part in the CIS file are combined to form another part in Tekla Structures. For example, if a beam in a CIS file is divided into more than one element, and you select Yes, the elements are combined to form one beam in the model. Using No means every element of the beam in the CIS file forms a single beam in the model.

Max length for combining

Only applied if you select Yes in the Combine members list box. Defines the maximum length for combining the elements in the CIS file. Elements are combined into one part only if their combined length is less than this value.




199

ETABS

Field

Description

Ignore offset

CIS/1 and CIS/2 analysis models can include member offsets (nodes are not exactly at the beam’s end points). With the default Yes, Tekla Structures uses these offsets to locate the physical members. With No, Tekla Structures determines the location using the node locations.

Ignore forces

Use to define how forces are imported. With No , Tekla Structures imports absolute values of maximum forces to parts’ user-defined attributes Shear, Tension and Moment. With Yes, Tekla Structures does not import forces.

To import from or export to ETABS software, you need to add two lines to the material conversion file for each Tekla Structures material grade. The first line is for exports, the second for imports. This example shows the lines needed for Tekla Structures material grade A36. A36 S\MAT\ASTM\GRADE36\ASTM_A36\1994 A36 steel_yield_strength_36.00

CAD import The CAD import tool supports several different formats to import models. See CAD import file types (p. 200). Tekla Structures imports a maximum of 10,000 parts using this option. If the number of parts exceeds this, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not import the model. In addition to following the steps in Overview of importing models (p. 195), you will need to include the following information about the import file:

CAD specific information Use the Plantview tab to select a material grade.

Creating log files In CAD import, the SDNF tab gives you the option to create a log file. If the import fails, examine the log file to find out why. The options in the Create log file list box are:

•

Create writes a new log file, and deletes the previous log file, each time you import the

model.

•

Append (default) adds the log information at the end of the existing log file.

You can also decide how the log file is displayed:

• •

With an external viewer (e.g. Notepad).

•

In a dialog box. (This creates a separate list dialog box in which the file can only be viewed.)

Not viewed.

CAD import file types You can import the following file types into Tekla Structures, using the CAD import tool.

200





Option

Imports from

SDNF

Several different CAD systems. See SDNF specific options (p. 201).

Steel Detailing Neutral File Calma

Calma plant design system

HLI

IEZ AG Speedikon software

High Level Interface Plantview

Plantview design system

SDNF (PDMS)

Cadcentre 3D plant design software

Plant Design Management System XML

ArchiCAD modeling system

SDNF specific options The SDNF tab contains the following options for SDNF imports:

Field

Description

Part Pos_No

Enter a prefix and a start position number. Relates to Position number type below.

Apply cuts and fittings

Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the

import. Consider offsets

Use No (default) to position part creation points at part end points; Yes creates offsets.

SDNF log files

Creates the log file SDNF_import.log in the current model folder. See also Creating log files (p. 200).

Position number type

The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included in a part’s user-defined attributes, or as position numbers. You have the following options:

•

Part position

The identifier becomes the part’s position number. Do not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.

•

Universal ID

The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the part. To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add them to the objects.inp file. For more information on defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 98).

www.cadfamily.com




201

If you want to import information, which Tekla Structures parts do not have, you can use the SDNF extension line in the SDNF file to be imported, and the REVISION_NUMBER user-defined attribute in Tekla Structures.

FEM import The FEM (Finite Element Method) import tool supports several formats and provides several options for importing models. See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select FEM Import from the Type list box.

FEM specific information The FEM import formats are listed in the table below. You will need to include the following information for FEM imports:

• •

Use Part to enter the part position and start number for the model import.

•

To combine several elements in the FEM model into one part in Tekla Structures, set Combine members to Yes. For example, if a beam in an FEM model consists of more than one element, Tekla Structures combines the elements to form one beam in the Tekla Structures model. With the option NoTekla Structures creates a beam for each element in the FEM model.

•

Use Maximum length to define the maximum length for combining parts. Tekla Structures combines elements into one part only if their combined length is less than the value you enter here.

Use Assembly to enter the assembly position and start number for the model import.

FEM import file types Use the following table to select the type of file to import:

File type

Use to import models created in

More information

DSTV

DSTV format

DSTV files (p. 203) Yield stress in FEM import (p. 205)

(Deutsche StahlbauVerband) SACS

SACS modeling and analysis software.

Yield stress in FEM import (p. 205)

S-Frame

S-Frame modeling and analysis software.

S-Frame import (p. 216)

Monorail

Monorail system

Staad

STAAD modeling and analysis system

STAAD files (p. 204)

Stan 3d

Stan 3d analysis software

Stan 3d files (p. 204)

Bus

BUS 2.5 analysis software

Bus import (p. 205)

(Structural Analysis And Design)

202





Only the options relevant to the selected type have any effect on the imported model.

DSTV files This FEM import tool imports models in the DSTV format. See basic information on FEM import (p. 202). Fill in the following information if you have selected the DSTV import type on the Parameters tab:

• •

On the DSTV tab, select the DSTV version to import. If the DSTV file to be imported contains a static and/or a CAD model, you can choose which one to import: Answering Yes to Import static elements imports the static model. Answering Yes to Import other elements imports the CAD model. For more information, see Model dump import (p. 206).

About DSTV There are three different sub-model types in DSTV:

•

Static models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and static data (model, restraints, results).

•

CAD models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and CAD data (elements, eccentricity).

•

NC3D model contains general data (profiles, materials, grid lines), CAD data (elements, eccentricity), and construction data (holes, chamfers).

Sub-models contain four different data levels:

Static data General data CAD data Construction data NC 3D model

www.cadfamily.com




203

CAD model Static model Different programs produce different DSTV files. For example, the DSTV file produced by RSTAB static software only contains a static model. Tekla Structures exports either the static model (CROSS_SECTION), or the CAD model (MEMBER_LOCATION).

STAAD files This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the STAAD modeling and analysis system. See basic information on FEM import (p. 202). Fill in the following information if you have selected the Staad import type on the Parameters tab:

•

On the Staad tab, enter a material grade, or use the browse (...) button to locate a grade.

Tekla Structures supports the following STAAD table type specifications:

• •

ST (single section from the standard built-in tables)

•

ST TUBE (parametric)

•

RA (single angle with reverse Y_Z axes)

•

D (double channel)

•

LD (long leg, double angle)

•

SD (short leg, double angle)

•

TC (beams with top cover plates)

•

BC (beams with bottom cover plate)

•

TB (beams with top and bottom cover plates)

ST PIPE (parametric)

You can import the types CM and T, user-provided steel table types (UPT), and other nonstandard profiles, if you have defined them in the profile conversion file. You must use the underline character in the STAAD name (e.g. UPT_1_W10X49). Tekla Structures automatically converts twin profiles in this import routine.

To make a STAAD input file compatible with the Tekla Structures STAAD import, in STAAD, use the option to save the input file using the option Joint coordinate format (Single). This creates a line for each coordinate in the input file.

Stan 3d files This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the Stan 3d analysis software. See basic information on FEM import (p. 202). Fill in the following information if you have selected the Stan 3d import type on the Parameters tab:

204





•

Before importing Stan 3d models, set the work plane orientation to global in Tekla Structures.

•

Define the profile conversion file (prfexp_stan_3d.cnv) in the Conversion tab. You have two options for mapping profile information:

•

Map section data (for example C1, FG, G1) to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.

•

Add full profile information in the comment field in the Stan 3d model. Then map the comment to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.

Tekla Structures looks at the comment field first. If it is empty or missing, Tekla Structures uses the section data.

•

On the Parts tab, enter the part position and start number for the model import.

•

On the Stan 3d tab, enter the material for all imported members in the Material field.

•

Specify the scale of the import model. You can import Stan 3d without specifying the scale, as long as both the Tekla Structures model and the import are in millimeters. If the Stan 3d file is in millimeters, use a scale of 1. If the Stan 3d file is in meters, use a scale of 1000.

•

The default mapping for imports is:

• • •

Stan 3d’s Member Type to Tekla Structures’s Class. Stan 3d’s Section Name to Tekla Structures’s user-defined attribute Prelim mark. Tekla Structures displays the number of parts not imported due to missing conversion information in the application window.

Bus import This FEM import tool imports basic steel structures from the BUS 2.5 analysis software input file. See basic information on FEM import (p. 202). On the Parameters tab, select the Bus import type, and then fill in the following information:

•

On the Conversion tab, enter the name of the profile and material conversion files (prf_expbus.cnv and mat_expbus.cnv) , or use the browse (...) button to locate them.

•

On the Parameters tab, enter the name of the input file (or use the browse (...) button to locate it), and the X, Y, and Z values.

•

On the Bus tab, enter the position number, material, name, and class of the parts to import. Use Beams behind plane to indicate the position of girders and cantilevers. The option Yes aligns the tops of all beams at the floor level.

Yield stress in FEM import The Default yield stress limit field is used for SACS import file. The Default material when yield stress < limit field is used for SACS import file. Define the material to use if yield stress is less than the limit.

www.cadfamily.com




205

•

Use the Default material when yield stress >= limit for SACS or DSTV import files. For SACS, this field defines the material to use if yield stress is greater than, or equal to, the limit.

•

For DSTV you can enter the material grade here, if it is not contained in the import file.

Model dump import The import model dump tool reads an ASCII file of a model dump to create a new model in Tekla Structures, including any views and drawings. When to use

If you have fatal problems with the model (e.g. cannot save the model, or cannot delete ghost parts), using a model dump is one way of saving your work.

Steps

To import a model dump: 1. 2.

Open Tekla Structures and create a new model. Copy the model dump file (e.g. model.dmp) from an existing model folder into the new model folder.

3.

Click File > Import > Model dump.

4.

Save and close the model, then reopen it to see the model.

You can only import a model dump into a newly-created model. A model dump can only be imported once into one model. You can import the same model dump into several new models. Do not use import model dumps in multi-user mode. See also Exporting a model dump (p. 237).

ASCII import This tool imports a model in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Some plant design systems export ASCII files (e.g. ModelDraft, PDS, PDMS). To import an ASCII model:

Steps

See also

1. 2.

Create a new model in Tekla Structures. Create a new 3D view.

3.

Copy the ASCII file into the model folder.

4.

Name the file import.asc.

5.

Select File > Import > ASCII. Tekla Structures displays the main members created from the ASCII file in the model.

ASCII format description (p. 206)

ASCII format description Profiles and polygon plates can be exported and imported using the ASCII format described in this section. Each part is described by 8 lines. These lines are repeated for each part to be transferred. Units are always in millimeters, blanks are used as separator. Below is an example of a beam part description:

206





import.asc 4169 HEA300 1 290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000 A/6 BEAM S235JR S235JR 0.000000 16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000

The lines contain the following information:

www.cadfamily.com




207

208





Line

Description

Line 1

4169 HEA300 1 = ID PROFILE TYPE

• •

ID 4169: Unique ID (integer).

•

TYPE 1: Profile type (integer)

PROFILE HEA300: Profile name (string).

The available profile types are:

www.cadfamily.com

•

0 = free cross section (can be used for special profiles which are not in the database)

•

1 = I profiles

•

2 = Welded hollow core profiles (HK, HQ)

•

3 = U profiles

•

4 = L profiles

•

5 = Round bars

•

6 = Round tubes

•

7 = Rectangular hollow core sections (RHS, P)

•

8 = T profiles

•

9 = Rectangular bars (FL, PL)

•

10 = Z profiles

•

11 = C profiles

•

12 = Omega profiles

•

13 = Sigma profiles

•

14 = Rail profile

•

16 = Reinforcement bars (DH)




209

Line

Description

Line 2

The contents of line 2 depend on the part profile:

•

Polygon plates:

N_POINTS COORDINATES. N_POINTS: For profiles of type 0. COORDINATES: Number of the corner points (integer). The X and Y coordinates of the plate corners (floating). Rotation direction is clockwise. Coordinates follow the global coordinate system. Z coordinates are taken from the center line in the plate thickness direction. Note: line 2 can be divided into several rows in the file.

•

Profiles:

For profile types 1-16, the line includes the physical dimensions of the cross section. HEIGHT S W1 T1 W2 T2: 290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000

Line 3

• •

HEIGHT 290.000000: Height of the cross section

•

W1 300.000000: Width of the upper flange.

•

T1 14.000000: Thickness of the upper flange.

•

W2 300.000000: Width of the lower flange.

•

T2 14.000000: Thickness of the lower flange.

A/6 BEAM = MARK NAME

• • Line 4

S 8.500000: Web thickness.

MARK A/6: Position mark of the part (string). NAME BEAM: Part name (string).

S235JR S235JR = MATERIAL Material of the part (string).

Line 5

0.000000 = ROTATION Rotation angle (degrees) around the local x-axis of the beam.

Line 6

16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X1 Y1 Z1 Coordinates of the beam starting point. Z coordinates are center-line coordinates.

Line 7

6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X2 Y2 Z2 Coordinates of the beam end point. Z-coordinates are centerline coordinates.

Line 8

16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000 = X3 Y3 Z3 Direction vector showing the direction of the local z-axis.

210





Attribute import Use File > Import > Attributes to import user-defined attribute values into a model from a comma- or tab-delimited text file. For example, you might import a list of manufactured or checked assemblies. The file to import can be:

• •

Exported from other software

•

A simple Tekla Structures report containing the part ID’s and user-defined attributes.

Created manually using a standard text editor

See About input files (p. 212) for more information on the import file. You can import user-defined attribute values into the entire model or drawing, or into a selected area of the model.

To save an Excel spreadsheet to a tab-delimited text file, use the Save As command in Excel.

Steps

www.cadfamily.com

To import user-defined attributes values: 1. 2.

Copy the text file that you want to import into the model folder. If you only want to import user-defined attributes into a selected area of the Tekla Structures model, select an area in the model now.

3.

Click File > Import > Attributes to open the Import Attributes dialog box:

4.

Click the Browse button next to the Input File field to locate the file to import.

5.

Select an option in the Input scope list box. The options are:




211

Option

Description

Default

Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in the model.

Entire model Selection only

Tekla Structures only assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in the selected area of the model. Only use this option to import attributes into models. Do not use for drawings.

6.

Select an option in the Create log file list box. The options are:

Option

Description

Create

Creates a new log file named attribute_import.log in the current model folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes. This overwrites any previous attribute import log files.

Append

Adds log entries to the attribute_import.log file in the current model folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes. If the log file does not exist, Tekla Structures creates it.

No

Does not create a log file.

7.

Select an option in the Display log file list box. The options are:

Option

Description

No

Does not display the log file.

On dialog

Displays the log file in a separate window. Click an object ID in the log file to have Tekla Structures highlight the part in the model.

8.

Click Create to import the file.

About input files Input files are comma or tab-delimited text files. They contain the names and values of the userdefined attributes to import into the Tekla Structures model. In the input file, the column headings must contain the names of properties and user-defined attributes in model objects and drawings. The remaining rows contain the values of the properties and user-defined attributes. See Example input file for parts (p. 214).

The user-defined attributes you can include in an input file are defined in the file import_macro_data_types.dat. See Data types file (p. 214) for more information.

212





You must include at least one key field as a column heading. Key fields are drawing or model object properties. Tekla Structures uses these key fields to identify the model objects or drawings it will assign the user-defined attributes to. The key fields for model objects are:

Key field

Example

Action

ID

131

Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the model object that has an ID value of 131.

ASSEMBLY_POS

A3

Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the assembly that has an ASSEMBLY_POS value of A3

or MARK

Repeat this line for each assembly you want to include. 2

PHASE

Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the assembly that has a PHASE value of 2. You must also use ASSEMBLY_POS as a key field with this option.

The key fields for drawings are:

Key field

Example

Action

TYPE

A

Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the drawing that has a TYPE value of A and a MARK value of D4

NAME

D4

Use both key fields in the input file.

To have Tekla Structures ignore an entry in a row, replace the value with the word null. Leaving the entry blank will cause errors.

Example input file for drawings TYPE and NAME are the key fields in this input file. Tekla Structures adds a value for the userdefined attribute User field 4 to drawings with values that match those listed in the TYPE and NAME columns.

For example, a drawing with the TYPE A (assembly drawing) and NAME B.2 gets the value 4 in the User field 4.

www.cadfamily.com




213

attributes.txt TYPE A A A A

NAME B.1 B.2 C.1 C.2

DRAWING_USERFIELD_4 3 4 1 2

Example input file for parts ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE are the key field in this input file. Tekla Structures adds several

user-defined attributes to the assemblies with values that match those listed in the ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE columns. For example, an assembly with the ASSEMBLY_POS

(assembly number) of B5 in phase 1 gets the following user-defined attributes:

• •

STATUS: 3

•

USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003

USER_PHASE: 6

attributes.txt ASSEMBLY_POS B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B1 B2

PHASE 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

STATUS USER_PHASE 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 5 3 6 3 5 3 4

USER_ISSUE 3/25/2003 3/25/2003 3/25/2003 3/25/2003 3/25/2003 3/26/2003 3/26/2003

This input file contains repeat entries for B1. In this case, Tekla Structures writes the message Duplicate entry in input file in the log file and does not overwrite user-defined attributes that occur earlier in the file with those that occur later. For example, at the end of the attribute import, B1 will have the following user-defined attributes:

• •

STATUS: 7

•

USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003

USER_PHASE: 3

Data types file The ..\environments\*your environment*\system\import_macro_data_types.dat file is a simple text file listing the user-defined attributes that you can include in an input file. Edit the file using any standard text editor. You can:

• •

Change any of the user-defined attributes that are not key fields Add user-defined attributes as STRING, INT, FLOAT, or DATE variable types

The file contains the following columns, separated by commas or tabs: VARIABLE_NAME, VARIABLE_TYPE, CONVERSION_FACTOR, COMMENT

Tekla Structures uses CONVERSION_FACTOR to convert imperial values to metric. Tekla Structures only uses this value in Imperial environments. We recommend that you check the FLOAT values to avoid conversion factor errors.

214





Tekla Structures treats rows starting with double forward slash characters // as comments and ignores them when reading the file. Here is a sample section of the import_macro_data_types.dat file:

Variable name Variable type Conversion factor Comment Comment

Steelfab import See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select SteelFab/SCIA Import from the Type list box.

Steelfab specific information In the SteelFab/SCIA import dialog box:

• •

Set Import weldings to Yes to include welds in the model.

•

Enter the path, file name, and file extension of the import file in the ASCII file name field. If it is blank, Tekla Structures looks in the current model folder.

Set Import holes to Yes to include holes in the model.

Fabtrol XML import To import the fabrication status information of parts from a Fabtrol XML file into a Tekla Structures model: 1. 2.

www.cadfamily.com

Click File > Import. Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New import model dialog box.




215

3.

Select Fabtrol XML import from the Type list box and click the Properties button to open the Fabtrol XML import (17) dialog box.

4.

Click the browse button (...) to locate the file for the Input file field.

5.

Click OK to import the status information.

S-Frame import Import analysis models created by the FASTSOLVE suite of programs, so you can detail them in Tekla Structures. See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import S-Frame from the Type list box.

About S-Frame imports The S-Frame model is used for analysis, so may not contain all the information necessary to create an accurate Tekla Structures model, particularly for positioning parts. Check the imported model carefully before you start detailing.

MicasPlus import See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import MicasPlus from the Type list box.

MicasPlus specific information In the Import MicasPlus dialog box, select Front or Top from the Part rotation list box.

Eureka LPM import Eureka LPM (Logical Product Model) uses the CIMsteel (Computer Integrated Manufacturing) data exchange format. See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import Eureka LPM from the Type list box.

Overview of ELiPLAN import and export Description

Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate the data transfer between these two applications. The data transfer consists of the following actions: 1. 2.

Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN

3.

Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan

4.

Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures

The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed.

216





Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data regularly. Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 264)

See also

Import ELiPLAN status data

Import ELiPLAN status data Importing status and scheduling information

If you have a status data file created in ELiPLAN, you can then import it into your Tekla Structures model with theImport Eliplan status data (69) component. For more information on transferring data between Tekla Structures and ELiPLAN, see Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 216).

The format and contents of this file are completely different than those in the file that is exported from Tekla Structures to ELiPLAN.

To import status and scheduling information from ELiPLAN to Tekla Structures:

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Eliplan and click Search.

3.

Double-click Import data from EliPlan to open the following dialog box:

4.

Select the status data file to import. When you click the Create button, Tekla Structures updates the status and schedule data for parts in the Tekla Structures model. When the data is read, Tekla Structures shows the log file in the list:




217

The list contains the parts whose data is updated correctly and also provides information on possible problems that may have occurred. When you select an item in the list, Tekla Structures automatically selects the corresponding part in the model. The overall status information is shown at the end of the list. Tekla Structures stores the actual status data to the user-defined attributes of the parts. To view the data, open the user-defined attributes from the part properties dialog box.

The ELiPLAN-specific user-defined attributes are not in the default environment of Tekla Structures. You need to modify the objects.inp to use and view them. For more information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export.

218





7.4 Exporting files Tekla Structures exports models in several formats. This section explains how to export models and drawings from Tekla Structures. Most of the export tools are available on the pull-down menu File > Export.

You can also export drawings from the drawing list, click Drawings & Reports >Drawing List.... Also, you can export your model to a web page using the command File > Publish as Web page... to make it available on the Internet, using a web browser. For more information, see Tekla WebViewer (p. 278). Topics

Exporting 3D DWG/DXF Exporting 3D DGN Exporting drawings Exporting FEM Exporting CIMsteel Exporting CAD Exporting MIS Exporting ASCII Exporting IFC Exporting a model dump

Exporting 3D DWG/DXF You can export models as a 3D DWG or 3D DXF file type to use in other modeling or analysis programs. By default, Tekla Structures creates the model.dwg file in the current model folder. To create a 3D DWG/DXF export file: 1. 2.

www.cadfamily.com

Open a Tekla Structures model. Select File > Export > 3D DWG/DXF... to open the following dialog box.




219

3.

Modify the export options as required.

4.

Accept the default file name, or use Browse... to navigate to another file.

5.

Select whether to export as DWG or as DXF.

6.

To export the model, click:

• • 7.

Export all to export the whole model, or Export selected to export selected parts from the model.

Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.

Export as Following options are available:

Export as

Description

Faces

Exports parts as faces.

Lines

Exports parts as lines located in the center of profile cross section. Used when exporting to analysis software.

Reference lines

Exports parts as reference lines, drawn between the creation points. Used when exporting to analysis software.

Exporting 3D DWG or DXF files as Faces uses more memory and may take longer, but the end result is better. If the model is large, or you have less memory to use, Export asReference lines option is faster, and the resulting file size is smaller. Use the Faces option to change part and bolt accuracy, and select whether or not to export cuts and inner contours.

220





Field

Option

Type

Normal

Description

High

Also exports chamfers in profile crosssections.

High

Exports the entire bolt assemblies, including washers.

Normal

Only exports the bolt and nut.

No bolts

Exports no bolts.

Cuts

Yes

Exports cuts.

Inner contours

Yes

Exports radiused corners in cuts.

Bolt accuracy

None of these options exports bolt holes. Curved beams and polybeams are exported as single, continuous beams. The number of segments in the curved beams is as defined in the Curved beam properties. The ID of each part is exported as an attribute and written into the export file for each part.

Exporting 3D DGN The 3D DGN export tool creates a model.dgn file in the current model folder, which you can import into other modeling systems. Follow these steps to export a 3D DGN file: 1. 2.

Open a Tekla Structures model. Select the objects in the model to export.

3.

Click File > Export > 3D DGN... to open the Export 3D DGN dialog box.

Enter the name of the export file, or click Browse... to locate it. Click Export all, or Export selected to export the selected parts. 4. Settings

You can also use the following variables to control DGN exports:

• •

www.cadfamily.com

Tekla Structures creates the model.dgn file in your current model folder.

XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS (p. 317) XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE (p. 340)




221

•

XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME (p. 340)

•

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS (p. 340)

•

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR (p. 340)

Exporting FEM There are several options for exporting a model with the FEM (Finite Element Method) export tool. To create a FEM export: 1. 2.

Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > FEM.... The FEM export dialog box appears.

3.

Click the Conversion tab and enter the path to the required conversion files. For more information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 192).

4.

Click the Parameters tab.

5.

In the Output file field, accept the default, or use the browse (...) button to select another output file.

6.

Select an output file type:

• •

DSTV

•

Staad

MicroSAS

7.

Select the parts in the model to export.

8.

Click Apply and then Create.

Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.

Combine segments (MicroSAS) Combine segmented members (MicroSAS) gives you the option to combine multiple parts to

form one part in the exported model. For example, if you have divided a beam into several elements and select the Yes option, Tekla Structures combines the elements so that they form one beam in the exported model. With the option No every element of the beam in the model forms individual beams.

STAAD The options on the Staad tab are only relevant to Staad file types in the FEM export.

222





Parametric shapes when possible defines how Tekla Structures exports the profiles PL, P, D, PD, SPD to Staad. Yes exports the profiles as parametric shapes so that STAAD can identify them correctly. No exports all profiles as standard STAAD shapes. Example

Example of a plate PL10*200

•

Exported as parametric shape (Yes): 13 PRI YD 200.000000 ZD 10.000000

•

Exported as a standard shape (No): 13 TABLE ST PL10*200

If a profile is not defined on the Staad tab, Tekla Structures cannot identify it, and so does not import it.

DSTV The options on the DSTV tab only relate to DSTV file types in FEM export.

Select a DSTV version to export: Element reference with

Tekla Structures exports either a static model CROSS_SECTION, or a CAD model MEMBER_LOCATION. The DSTV entities are listed below. Tekla Structures supports those marked (*). See the DSTV standard "Stahlbau - Teil 1. März 2000" for more information. Static data:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

vertex (*)

•

substructure (*)

•

node (*)

•

element (*)

•

element_eccentricity (*)

polyline




223

•

raster

•

boundary_condition

•

elastic_support

•

nodal_reaction

•

element_reaction

General data:

• •

material (*) cross_section (*)

CAD data:

• •

member (*)

•

construction-data

•

cutout

•

hole

member_location (*)

Exporting CIMsteel You have the following options when exporting a CIMsteel model:

• •

Analysis model (p. 224) Manufacturing model (p. 226)

Analysis model To export a CIMsteel analysis model: 1. 2.

224

Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Analysis model.





Use the option CIS to select the CIS (CIMsteel Intergration Standard) version.

•

CIS/1 generates a file that is compatible with the CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration.

•

CIS/2 generates a file compatible with the CIMSteel CIS/2 (STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.

3.

Enter the path and name for the export file in the Step file field or accept the default. If you do not enter a path, Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.

4.

If required, enter the a name and organization to identify who created the export file.

5.

Select one of the following standards (Flavor) to apply to the export:

6.

• •

UK

•

US

EUROPEAN

Set units to metric or imperial.

Imperial is only available for CIS/2. CIS/1 is always exported in metric

units.

7.

Enter values for the origin of the exported model. The origin comes from the origin in Tekla Structures.

8.

To split a part in the Tekla Structures model into several elements in a CIMsteel model, select Split members (Yes). As an example, three columns are connected to a beam in a model, so that one column is in the middle and the others are at each end of the beam. With the Yes option the beam is split into two equal elements in the CIMsteel model. With the No option there will be one beam, a single linear element, and two nodes (a node at each end), in the CIMsteel model.

9.

www.cadfamily.com

Select the parts in the model to export, then click Apply and Create.




225

Manufacturing model Follow these steps to export a CIS2 CIMsteel manufacturing model: 1. 2.

Open a Tekla Structures model. If you want to include information on drawings and NC files in the export file, you need to

•

Export or print needed drawings to the model folder in dwg format. See Exporting drawings (p. 266) or Printing to file.

•

Create single-part drawings, and then create NC files with the extension .nc1. See DSTV (p. 174).

3.

Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Manufacturing model to export a model that contains all of the parts needed for manufacture and erection.

4.


5.

Enter a name for the export file in the Output file field. CIS uses the file extension stp.

6.

Set Linear units to metric or imperial units (only for CIS/2 format).

With Imperial units Tekla Structures writes all of the designations for nuts, bolts, and washers in fractional inches.

226

7.

If required, enter a name for the structure in the Structure name field.

8.

Enter the path to the profile conversion file. For more information, see More CIMsteel information (p. 227).

9.

Enter the path to the material conversion file. For more information, see Material conversion.





If you leave the profile and material conversion file paths empty, Tekla Structures uses the conversion files in the current profile folder for the conversion.

10. To include information on NC files in an export, set Include NC files to Yes and specify a path (relative to the current model folder) to the folder where the NC files are located. 11. To export globally unique ID’s instead of internal ID numbers, select Yes in the Export Globally unique ID’s list box. 12. Click the Profile standard tab to enter information about the standard. 13. Select the parts in the model to export. 14. Click Apply and then Create. Tekla Structures creates the export file in your current model folder.

More CIMsteel information Profile conversion

This example shows part of the profile conversion file prfexp_cis.cnv:

! ! ! ! !

US Imperial Flavor Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same as Tekla Structures-name.

! Tekla Structures-name

Converted-name

! !American Sections - Imperial !W - Wide Flange Beams W44X335 S\SECT\US\W44X335\ASTM_A6\1994 W44X290 S\SECT\US\W44X290\ASTM_A6\1994 W44X262 S\SECT\US\W44X262\ASTM_A6\1994 Converted-name contains the following information, each value separated by a back slash ‘\’:

• •

S (fixed value)

•

Name of the standardization organization

•

Standard name of the profile shape

•

Name of the standard

•

Year of the standard

SECT (fixed value)

If the conversion file does not contain the relevant profile type, the Tekla Structures name of the profile is used. Tekla Structures also uses the Standardization organization, Standard name and Year of standard defaults on the Profile standard tab. Material conversion

www.cadfamily.com

This example shows part of the material conversion file matexp_cis.cnv:




227

! ! ! ! !

US Imperial Flavor Material name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same as Tekla Structures-name.

! Tekla Structures-name

Converted-name

# Carbon Structural Steel (ASTM_A36\1994) GRADE32 S\MAT\US\GRADE32\ASTM_A36-94\1994 GRADE36 S\MAT\US\GRADE36\ASTM_A36-94\1994 #High Strength Carbon Manganese Steel (ASTM_A529\1994 GRADE42 S\MAT\US\GRADE42\ASTM_A529-94A\1994) Converted-name contains the following information, each item separated by the backslash

character (\):

• •

S (fixed value)

•

Name of the standards organization

•

Standard name of the material

•


•


MAT (fixed value)

Converted-name contains the following information about bolts, nuts, and washers, separated by two colon characters (::):

• •

Name of the standards organization

•


•

Standard name of the bolt, washer, or nut


Tekla Structures names for bolts, washers, and nuts are constructed from their fastener standard, fastener type and size. If the conversion file does not contain an equivalent profile name, Tekla Structures uses the name of the material. Tekla Structures takes the following default values from the Material standard and Bolt standard tabs for materials, bolts, nuts and washers:

Field

Description

Standardization organization

The organization that published the standard.

Name of standard

The name or number of the standard.

If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.

If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files. Year of standard

The year the standard was published. If the field is left blank, Tekla Structures uses 1999 as the default value.

228





Exporting CAD You can export a CAD model in several formats. To export a CAD model: 1. 2.

Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > CAD... to open the CAD export dialog box.

3.

Click the Conversion tab and enter path to the required conversion files. For more information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 192).

4.


5.

In the Output file field, accept the default, use the browse (...) button to select another output file.

6.

Select one of the output formats in the Type list box:

Format

Description

PML

PML exports files in Intergraph’s Parametric Modeling Language format. The PML export can be used with several Intergraph systems.

HLI

HLI (High Level Interface) option is used for exporting data to IEZ AG’s Speedikon software.

SCIA

SCIA is used for SteelFab interface.

Calma

Calma option is used for exporting data to the Calma plant

design system. SDNF

SDNF (Steel Detailing Neutral File) option is used to

export models for use in several different CAD systems. PDMS

PDMS (Plant Design Management System) option is used to export models for use with the Cadcentre’s 3d plant design software. For more information, see PDMS (p. 232).

SDNF (PDMS)

SDNF (PDMS) is used for exporting information to PDMS via SDNF link. Tekla Structures writes the information of finish field in the member class attribute, whereas in SDNF export it omits the class information.

XML

XML is used for exporting information to ArchiCAD modeling system. There are some limitations in the export:

• •

www.cadfamily.com

Conversion files are not used. Holes, bolts and welds are not exported.




229

7.

Use the Origin X, Y, Z fields to specify the origin of the exported model.

8.

Select the parts in the model to export.

9.

Click Apply and then Create.

Tekla Structures then creates the export file in your current model folder.

PML For PML output format, use the following options on the PML tab.

• •

Select the units for the export model. Export cut parts controls whether cuts are included in the export. Select Yes to export part

cuts.

When you export models from Tekla Structures into an other software using PML, enter the Tekla Structures profile names in the conversion file. This makes the other software consider parts as beams and columns (not as plates), and reduces the export file size. The following variables control PML export:

• •

PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE (p. 370) PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE (p. 371)

SDNF For SDNF, SDNF(PDMS), or PDMS output formats, use the following options on the SDNF tab:

230





Field

Description

SDNF version number

Select the SDNF version to be used in the export.

Apply cuts and fittings

Select Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the export.

Position number type

The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included in a part’s user-defined attributes, or as position numbers. You have the following options:

•

Part position

The identifier becomes the part’s position number. Do not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.

•

Assembly position

The identifier becomes the assembly’s position number.

•

Universal ID

The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the part. To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add them to the objects.inp file. For more information on defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 98).

www.cadfamily.com




231

Field

Description

Consider offsets

To ignore the offset records during export, select No, and to take them into account, select Yes. This setting does not affect the actual start and end point information, only the offset. Tekla Structures writes the start and end points based on the actual solid, not on the reference line.

PDMS phase offset

PDMS phase offset defines phase offset for exported parts.

For example, if the first phase in Tekla Structures model is 1 and you enter 10 for phase offset, the Tekla Structures parts in another software get the phase 11 and up. Engineering Firm

Enter the name of the engineering firm.

Client

Enter the name of the client.

Structure ID

Enter a unique identification number for the exported model.

Project ID

Enter a unique identification number for the exported project.

Revision Number

Enter a revision number (optional). Tekla Structures takes the revision number from the user-defined attributes (REVISION_NUMBER) of the model. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a revision number from the CAD export dialog box (Revision Number).

Issue Code

Tekla Structures writes the issue code in the header section of the output file. For PDMS, this value should always be "Tekla Structures".

Design Code

Define the design code to be used in structural design. For more information, see Design codes and methods.

XML For XML output formats, use the following options on the XML tab:

•

Use Units to specify unit conversions. For example, for a Tekla Structures model created using millimeters, select IN to convert all part dimensions to inches in the output file.

•

XML structure ID is a unique identification number for the exported model. You must always enter an identification number. Tekla Structures uses this value to identify the model if you re-export it.

PDMS Tekla Structures uses some of the information you enter on the SDNF tab. It supports two different PDMS export formats, EXTRUSION and NOZZLE. Tekla Structures decides which export format to use by searching for the Tekla Structures profile name in the profile conversion file (by default, prfexp_pdms.cnv). If the profile is not there, Tekla Structures exports the part in both EXTRUSION and NOZZLE formats.

When you add a profile to the NOZZLE catalog, you must also add it to the profile conversion file.

232





Using EXTRUSION elements

EXTRUSION transfers data from Tekla Structures to PDMS using EXTRUSION elements. Tekla Structures describes profiles in the export file using the vertices of the profiles. So you can also export contour plates and folded plates. Tekla Structures exports profiles as solids, which may not be suitable for some profile types (e.g. tubes).

Loading a NOZZLE catalog

You can also transfer data from Tekla Structures to PDMS by loading a NOZZLE catalog into a PDMS project. The NOZZLE catalog is contained in the file load_nozz_cata.mac, located in the European profile folder. This file describes the profiles you can export to PDMS systems. It also enables Tekla Structures to use NOZZLE elements. This format creates exact profiles (even for tube profiles), and a smaller export file than the EXTRUSION option. You can edit the NOZZLE catalog with a text editor to add profiles to it.

Exporting MIS Use the MIS (Manufacturing Information System) tool to create list files. You can create them from selected parts, or from all the parts in the model. The MIS command creates the following file types: DSTV, KISS, EJE, EPC, or Steel 2000. To create an MIS list file: 1. 2.

Open the Tekla Structures model to export. Click File > Export > MIS... to display the MIS dialog box.

3.

In the MIS type list box, select the file type. See MIS types (p. 233).

4.

In the MIS list file field, enter the name of the list file, including the file extension. You need to use specific file extensions for some file types. See MIS list file (p. 234) for a list of file extensions.

5.

Click Create all or Create selected. Tekla Structures creates the MIS file in the current model folder.

MIS types The file types you can use for MIS output are:

•

DSTV

The file only contains the MIS information for the DSTV model.

•

Fabtrol/KISS

Gives you the following additional options:

•

www.cadfamily.com

Customer name




233

• •

Full material list. Check this box to add labor-related information to the list (holes, welds, cambers, preliminary marks, etc.). EJE

US Imperial version only.

Structural Material Manager internally stores all dimensions in sixteenths. Its External Data Interface writes all dimensions, such as widths, lengths, etc, except for Beam and Channel descriptions, in sixteenths of an inch. As an example the length 12'-8 7/8 is equivalent to 2446 sixteenths, which is calculated as (feet x 192) + (inches x 16) + sixteenths.

•

EPC

The EPC (Estimating and Production Control) module of SDS/2 requires multinumbering to be active.

•

Steel 2000

MIS list file Use the following MIS list file extensions, according to which file type you are creating:

Type

File extension

DSTV

xsr

Fabtrol/KISS

kss

EJE

eje

EPC

None

Steel 2000

None

Exporting ASCII To export an ASCII file of a model:

See also

1. 2.

Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export. Select the parts of the model you want to export.

3.

Click File > Export > ASCII. Tekla Structures creates the model.asc file in the current model folder.

ASCII format description (p. 206)

Exporting IFC You can export the basic parts of a Tekla Structures model into IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 and IFC2X3_mapping schema edition files. To define as which IFC entities the model objects are exported, use the user-defined attributes: 1.

Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box, and click User-defined attributes... button.

2.

234

On the IFC export tab, define the following properties:





Property

Option

Description

IFC entity

Auto

The object is exported as default entity. See a list of default settings below.

None

The object is not exported.

IfcBeam

Supported IFC entities.

IfcColumn IfcWall IfcWallStandardCase IfcBuildingElementPart IfcSlab IfcPlate IfcFooting IfcPile IfcRailing

IfcBuildingElementProxy IfcMember IFC export type

BREP

Brep presentation is used for all objects.

AUTO

Constructive solid geometry is used when possible, and brep presentation is used otherwise. Enter the site, building and building storey name.

IFC site name IFC building name

With these fields you can divide the parts to different sites, buildings and building storeys.

IFC building storey name

If you leave the fields empty, the site, building, and building storey name remain undefined in the IFC file. IFC entity attribute set as Auto:

www.cadfamily.com

Tekla Structures object

IFC entity exported

Beam

IfcBeam

Twin profile

2x IfcBeam

Column

IfcColumn




235

Tekla Structures object

IFC entity exported

Slab

IfcSlab

Concrete Panel

IfcWallStandardCase

Pad footing

IfcFooting

Strip footing

IfcFooting

Contour plate

IfcPlate

To export a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file: 1. 2.

Select the model objects to export. Click File > Export > IFC...

3.

Select the Schema edition, the options are IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 and IFC2X3_mapping.

Number all parts before exporting when you have selected the IFC2X3_mapping schema edition.

4.

Browse for the Output file location and enter the file name. The file extension for the output file is .ifc. The length of the file path is limited to 256 characters.

5.

Select whether to export parametrized profiles or not: Select Yes or No in the Parameterized profile list box.

6. Defining the color of the exported objects

236

Select the export type, the options are AUTO and BREP.

The color of the exported objects is defined according to the class definition, in the following manner:

Class definition

Color

1

Grey

2

Red





Class definition

Color

3

Green

4

Dark blue

5

Cyan

6

Yellow

7

Dark magenta

8

Dark grey

9

Dark red

10

Dark green

11

Dark cyan

12

Magenta

13

Orange

14

Blue

Limitations

The following model parts are not supported in the export:

• •

Bolts, nuts and washers

•

Reinforcing bars

•

Surface treatments

•

Grids

Welds

Exporting a model dump A model dump creates an ASCII file of a model that you can use in other models. To export a model dump file: 1. 2.

Open the Tekla Structures model to export. Click File > Export > Model dump.

Tekla Structures creates the model.dmp file in the current model folder.

www.cadfamily.com




237

The model dump file contains the entire model, including views and drawings.

See also Model dump import (p. 206).

Exporting BVBS Description

This component exports the geometry of reinforcements into BVBS (Bundesvereinigung Bausoftware) format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. The supported versions of the BVBS format are:

• •

1.0 year 1995 2.0 year 2000

The component is able to export bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and polygonal or rectangle not-bent meshes. The export of the hooks is also supported. Limitations

Each point of unbent reinforcement must lie on the same plane (BF3D export is not supported).

Example 1

Exporting reinforcements with standard bending radius:

238





BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l922@[email protected]@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl375@w90@l547@w0@ C85@ Example 2

Exporting reinforcements with non-standard bending radius:

BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l831@[email protected]@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl163@w0@r200@w90@ l335@w0@C84@ See also

www.cadfamily.com

Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format (p. 240)




239

Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 240) BVBS (78) specification (p. 242)

Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format To export the geometry of the selected reinforcement to the BVBS format, follow the steps below. Preconditions

If you create a new reinforcement in an actual model, you need to close and re-open the export dialog box.

Usage

1. 2. 3.

Select the reinforcing bars to export. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in BVBS and click Search. Doubleclick Export rebar BVBS (78) to open the component dialog box. Set the following options in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box: a Set Selection to Selected rebars only. b Set Standard bending radius to Use Tekla standards. c Set Draw rebars to Yes to see the exported geometry in the model after exporting.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Click Create. Check the exported geometry. Find the name of the exported file in the component output window. Check the created file in the current model folder.

Result

Using this component creates one output file. The output file is created in the current model folder. The file name depends on the settings in the dialog box and it is shown in the console output window (see the picture). The existing files are rewritten. To check the exported geometry, set Draw rebars to Yes.

See also

Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 240) BVBS (78) specification (p. 242)

Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box This section describes the fields in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box.

240





Configuration

Field

Description

File name

Specify the name of the output file. The default file name is Project Number.

Ext file name

Specify the extension of the output file. The default file extension is txt.

Version

Specify the version of the BVBS format. The supported versions of BVBS are: 1.0 year 1995 2.0 year 2000

Selection

Define which reinforcements will be exported.

•

All rebars in the model no preselected parts are

required, all reinforcements from the current model are exported.

•

Selected rebars only only the selected reinforce-

ments are exported.

•

All rebars of selected concrete elements only

reinforcements that belong to the selected concrete parts are exported. 2D rebars

Export single reinforcing bars and groups consisting of straight bars.

3D rebars

Export bent reinforcing bars. Not supported at the moment.

Spiral rebars

Export spiral reinforcements. Not supported at the moment.

Not bent meshes

Export unbent meshes. Polygonal and rectangle meshes are supported.

Bent meshes

Export bent meshes. Not supported at the moment.

Standard bending radius

Specify the value of the standard bending radius.

•

Use Tekla standards: Each material and diameter has its own initial bending radius in Tekla Structures. These values are used for each reinforcing bar group from the file \environments\europe\profil\rebar_databas e.inp (Column “Min bend rad”). These values are used for the standard bending radius.

•

Use radius coef: the standard bending radius is the

bending radius of the exported reinforcing bars multiplied with Radius coef.

•

Use rebar radius: the bending radius of exported

reinforcing bars is used as the standard bending radius. Radius coef

www.cadfamily.com

Define the number used for the computation of the standard bending radius. Entire number is required. Used only if Standard bending radius is set to Radius coef.




241

Field

Description

Draw rebars

Draw the exported geometry in the model. It is represented by the lines created inside reinforcements (straight bars and meshes) or on the side of reinforcements (bent bars). In case of 180° hooks, the hook line is inside the main line.

Ignored classes

List of classes. Reinforcements with classes in this list will not be exported. E. g. “5 7 17”.

BVBS (78) specification Each exported reinforcing bar or group of the same reinforcing bars has one row in the exported file. One row consists of a HEADER block, a GEOMETRY block and a CHECKSUM block. Example

BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l5950@[email protected]@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl5950@w0@C84@

Header block starts with the letter H.

• •

j – Project number

•

i – Plan index – not used, exported as “a”

•

p – Position – index of the output file row is exported

•

l – Total length of reinforcement

•

n – Number of reinforcements

•

e – Weight of one rod

•

d – Reinforcement diameter

•

g – Material

•

s – Standard bending radius (see below)

•

v – Author – not used

r – Plan number – not used, exported as 0

Geometry block starts with the letter G.

• •

l – particular length

•

r – bending radius (relates to the standard bending radius, see below)

w – bending angle

CheckSum block starts with the letter C.

• Measuring

242

see the BVBS specification

Measuring of the length is done according to the BVBS specification. Calculation of lengths also depends on the bending angle. Lengths L1 and L2 are exported.





Standard bending radius

The bending radius affects the export of the reinforcements. If the bending radius is the same for the entire reinforcing bar and this bending radius is set by dialog box field Standard bending radius (is also written in exported HEADER block), these bending radiuses are not exported in the GEOMETRY block. Otherwise the bending radiuses are exported for each bending. The value of the bending radius can be set in fields Standard bending radius and Radius coef in the dialog box.

Exporting Unitechnik Description

This component exports the 3D geometry of the cast units into Unitechnik format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. Supported versions of the Unitechnik format are:

• •

6.0.0 14.6.2005

•

5.0c 30.10.1997

5.2b 11.9.2000

This component is able to export cast units consisting of concrete, steel and surface materials. Exporting of not-bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and meshes with hooks is also supported. This macrocomponent also supports exporting braced girders and double walls. Example 1

www.cadfamily.com

Exported cast unit:




243

Hole Steel embed Reinforcing bars Insulation plate (green) See also

Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format (p. 244) Unitechnik export reference (p. 247) Main (p. 248) Unitechnik configuration (p. 253) TS configuration (p. 257) Reinforcement (p. 259) Data specification (p. 263)

Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format To export the geometry of the selected cast units to the Unitechnik format follow the steps below. Preconditions

244

This component reads and exports some data from the numbering series of parts. It is important to have all exported parts numbered correct. Incorrectly numbered parts are not exported.





The parts you need to select depend on the selected option in the Create from list.

Usage

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Result

www.cadfamily.com

Update numbering. Select one object of a cast unit. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Unitechnik and click Search. Double-click the Export unitechnik (79) to open the Export unitechnik (79) dialog box. On the Main tab, set the Create from to Selected cast units. On the TS configuration tab, set the following fields: a Draw profs to Yes to see exported geometry in the model after creating the component. b Insulation classes to 3. Green object with class 3 will be considered as insulation plate. c Embeds to Selected + steel (orange steel objects will be considered as embeds)

6.

On the Reinforcement tab, set the following fields: a Single rebars export to Yes to export reinforcing bars in the top concrete panel. b Mesh export to Yesto export reinforcing bars in the bottom concrete panel.

7. 8. 9. 10.

Click Create. Check the exported geometry. Search the name of the exported file in the component output window. Check the created file in the current model folder.

This component creates one or several output files. Number of created output files depends on the option selected in the Create from list and the total number of selected parts, cast units or assemblies.




245

If the scanning direction is wrong, use the Rotation and Extra rotation fields. Wrong scanning plane (from the right side to the left side):

Correct scanning plane ( from back to front side):

246





Exporting Unitechnik (p. 243)

See also

Unitechnik export reference (p. 247) Data specification (p. 263)

Unitechnik export reference Object geometry scanning

To obtain the geometry of all parts in a cast unit this component uses scanning layers. The number of the scanning layers depends on the selected Scan position (p. 258). Each object of the cast unit is scanned in one direction, which can be set with Rotation (p. 248) and Extra rotation (p. 250) properties. Real scanned geometry can be shown in the model after you have used the component with Draw profiles (p. 257) property.

Insulation

All parts considered as insulation (see Insulation classes (p. 259)) are exported in the MOUNTPART block.

Embeds

All embeds (see Embeds (p. 259) and Embed classes) are exported in the MOUNTPART block. Other properties that affect the export of embeds are Export assemblies (p. 252) and Export assemblies outside (p. 252). If the embeds block consists of several parts, it is useful to weld all embeds into one block and then connect the created block with concrete part to a cast unit. Subassemblies are also supported.

Reinforcement

This component can export single and groups of straight reinforcing bars, rectangular or polygonal meshes. The export of the bent reinforcing bars and bent meshes is ignored. The reinforcing bar group, rectangular or polygonal mesh is divided into several single reinforcing bars. All reinforcing bars are exported in the RODSTOCK block. The exported geometry can be shown with Draw profiles. This property shows the inside lines of the exported reinforcing bars. Hooks are also supported. If Export type is set to Fabrication of welded rebars, the single reinforcing bar is exported in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one group are

www.cadfamily.com




247

exported together in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one mesh are also exported together in one STEELMAT block. Braced girders

The class of reinforcements, steel rods or profiles representing braced girder has to be entered in the Braced girder classes (p. 260) field. For example 15 17 5 means that parts with class 15, 17, or 5 are consider as braced girders. If the Braced girder export and Braced girder classes fields are not set, the braced girders will be exported incorrectly as reinforcement or embeds.

Double walls

Set the user-defined attribute Product type (UT product type) of the first panel to Double wall (1st stage). Set the other panel to Double wall (2nd stage). Double wall panels are exported separately in UNITECHNIK.

Main This describes the fields on the Main tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Create from

This option defines the parts or cast-units that are exported.

•

All parts: preselected parts are not required, all cast units from the current model are exported. Each cast unit has one output file.

•

Selected cast units: exports only cast units that have one or more parts selected in the model. Each cast unit has one output file.

•

Selected parts (specially): exports only the selected concrete parts (also embeds and

insulation parts belonging to the selected part). Each part has one output file.

•

Selected parts (cast united): selected parts belonging to one cast unit are grouped and exported together in one output file.

•

Selected assemblies: all selected assemblies are exported. One assembly equals one cast

unit and has one output file. Selection of subassemblies is also allowed. Rotation

248

This option defines the scanning direction. The scanning direction depends on the plane of the cast unit main part. A floor panel is scanned from bottom to top side. Awall panel and a column are scanned from one side to the other side. The position and direction of a basic shape of the exported cast unit depends on the rotation.





Option

Description

No

Floor: Bottom to top

Example

Wall: Front to rear side Column: Side to side

180

Floor: Top to bottom Wall: Rear to front side Column: From one side to the opposite side

+90 around X

Floor: Left to right side Wall: Top to bottom Column: Side to side

-90 around X

Floor: Right to left side Wall: Bottom to top Column: From one side to the opposite side

www.cadfamily.com




249

Option

Description

+90 around Y

Floor: Front to rear side

Example

Wall: Left to right side Column: Bottom to top

-90 around Y

Floor: Rear to front side Wall: Right to left side Column: Top to bottom

Extra rotation

This affects the rotation around the Z coordinate. The Z coordinate still has the same direction, but the X and Y direction are changed. To show the actual coordinate system, set Draw axis to Yes on the TS configuration tab.

Option

Description

No

No extra rotation.

Swap X/Y

Swap X and Y axis.

X=max(X_dim,Y_dim ) main part

X axis goes through the longer side of the main part.

X=min(X_dim,Y_dim ) main part

X axis goes through the shorter side of the main part.

X=max(X_dim,Y_dim ) cast unit

X axis goes through the longer side of the cast unit.

X=min(X_dim,Y_dim ) cast unit

X axis goes through the shorter side of the cast unit.

+90 around Z

Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 90 degrees.

- 90 around Z

Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by -90 degrees.

180 around Z

Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 180 degrees.

The following picture shows the coordinate system with no rotation and no extra rotation settings. Panel 1 has the X axis set parallel to the shorter side. It is incorrect in Unitechnik format, so the coordinate system has to be rotated. Panel 2 shows a rotation by 90 degrees around the Z axis.

250





Special assemblies export / Special export assembly file name These properties influence the exported geometry of the embeds. The real geometry is replaced by the geometry defined in special text files. The default name of the text file is spec_assemblies_def.txt and is primary searched in the model folder. The file name and path can be specified by the Special export assembly file name property. Required structure of text file is:

• •

Name(text) Number_of_lines_defined(number)

•

S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)

S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)

Example of the file:

The geometry of all embeds with names (from example Quicky, QuickyS, E-Doze) are replaced by geometry defined in the text file. In the following example, the part number 1 (the name is Beam) was not found in the text file so the geometry is exact. On the opposite side the part number 2 (the name is Quicky) was found, so the geometry is replaced.

www.cadfamily.com




251

Export assemblies

Specifies export of embeds and steel blocks.

Option

Description Exports embeds as parts. All embed welds and assembly relations are ignored. The exported geometry is a projection of the objects into the basic shape.

Welded embeds and assembly block are exported as one part.

Exports only the main part of the embed block or embed assembly.

Exports the main part of the embed block extended in the X direction to cover all the parts of the embed block.

Export assemblies outside

252

Defines if embeds outside concrete part are exported or not.





Option

Description Exports all embeds without modification.

Exports only embeds inside concrete parts. Embeds outside the concrete element are ignored. If embed is partly inside and partly outside concrete part, then the outside part of embed is cut off.

Unitechnik configuration This describes the fields on the Unitechnik configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. File name

Specify the name of the output file and file name extension. The options are:

• •

Proj_number.Cast_unit_number

•

Proj_number.Ass_control_number

•

Proj_name.Cast_unit_number

•

Proj_name.Cast_unit_pos

•

Proj_name.Ass_control_number

•

Cast_unit_number.user_extension

•

Cast_unit_pos.user_extension

•

Ass_control_number.user_extension

Proj_number.Cast_unit_pos

Cast_unit_number is the assembly position number of the main part of the cast unit. Cast_unit_pos is the assembly position of the main part of the cast unit. Ass_control_number is a special user-defined attribute, a unique number that Tekla Structures generates. To generate the assembly control numbers, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign control numbers…. This requires the following definition in the ..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp for concrete parts: unique_attribute("ACN", "j_acn", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0", "0.0"){ value("", 0)} user_extension is defined with the File name extension property. Ext file name

Specify the file name extension, if the File name is set to an option containing .user_extension.

File mask

Specify the format (length) of the output file name and file name extension. Numbers represent the length of the output string. If the name is longer than the selected option, it is cut. Symbol “x” represents unlimited size.

Version

Specify version of Unitechnik. Supported versions are:

•

www.cadfamily.com

6.0.0

14.6.2005




253

Blank symbol

•

5.2b

11.9.2000

•

5.0c

30.10.1997

Specify the blank symbol. An example with "_" symbol:

An example with " " symbol:

Layer structure

254

Define the structure of the exported file (slabdate and layer part).





Option

Description

Multiple layers

One SLABDATE block with N layers. Each cast unit has its own LAYER block. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belong to one concrete part, and they are exported in the related LAYER block. HEADER__ … SLABDATE … LAYER___ … END LAYER___ LAYER___ … END LAYER___ LAYER___ … END LAYER___ END SLABDATE END HEADER__

Single layer, 1 slabdate

Each cast unit has its own SLABDATE block, no LAYER blocks. HEADER__ … SLABDATE … END SLABDATE SLABDATE … END SLABDATE SLABDATE … END SLABDATE END HEADER__

Single layer, n slabdate

Cast units with equal geometry are collected in one SLABDATE block. No LAYER and LOT blocks are defined. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belonging to a cast unit with the same geometry are collected and exported in one SLABDATE block. HEADER__ … SLABDATE … END SLABDATE SLABDATE … END SLABDATE END HEADER__

Geometry export

Specify if the geometry of the exported part is represented as polygons or lines. Below are two examples of the output file showing the differences between the polygons and the lines exported. Polygons exported:

www.cadfamily.com




255

Lines exported:

256





TS configuration This describes the fields on the TS configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Draw axis

Shows the coordinate system. The X axis is a line consisting of single points. The Y axis is a line consisting of doubled points line. The Z axis is a line consisting of three points in line.

Draw profiles

This option allows you to check, if the geometry of the exported parts is correct. It shows the lines representing the exported rectangle of the basic shape, the exported geometry of parts, cuts, embeds, and reinforcement. Embeds are projected to the plane of the basic shape. The reinforcement lines are positioned inside each reinforcing bar.

www.cadfamily.com




257

Basic shape Geometry of main element. Cut geometry Embed geometry Scan position

Defines the position in which all parts are scanned. Each part is scanned separately. Scanning plane is parallel to the basic shape plane.

Option

Description

Bottom and top

Two scanning planes at the start and at the end of the bounding box of the scanning part.

Bottom only

One scaning plane at the start of the bounding box of the scanning part.

Top only

One scaning plane at the end of the bounding box of the scanning part.

Middle only

One scanning plane at the middle of bounding box of the scanning part.

To move the position of the exact scanning plane, use the Start distance in material and End distance in material properties. Start distance in material

Defines the start offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.

End distance in material

Defines the end offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.

Contour export

This component is able to export one scanned layer only. With two scanned layers, they have to be recomputed into one layer. Two options of recomputation are:

258





Option

Description

Intersection

Make polygons intersection (AND operation) of two countour geometries.

Layer scanned first Layer scanned the second. Layers Union

Makes polygons union (OR operation) of two contour geometries

Cutout export

The same as Contour export, but for holes only.

Ignored classes

List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will not be exported.

Insulation classes

List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as insulation parts.

Embeds

Defines the parts that are considered as embeds. Embedded parts are exported in the MOUNTPART block.

•

Selected + steel: all classes listed in the Embed classes list are considered as embeds. All

steel parts are also considered as embeds.

•

Selected: classes listed in the Embed classes list are only considered as embeds.

•

No export: ignores the Embed classes list and exports all steel parts as standard parts.

Reinforcement The fields on the Reinforcement tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component are described below. Single rebars export

When set to Yes, allows exporting straight reinforcing bars. Hooks are supported.

Bended single rebars export

Not supported at the moment.

Meshes export

When set to Yes, allows exporting of polygonal or rectangular meshes. Hooks are supported.

Bended meshes export

Not supported at the moment.

Braced girder export

When set to Yes, reinforcing bars or steel rods representing braced girders are exported separately in the BRGIRDER block. When set to No and if Single rebars export is Yes, then straight reinforcing bars representing braced girders are exported normally as rebars, steel rods are exported as mounted parts.

www.cadfamily.com




259

Braced girder classes

List of classes. Parts with classes in this list are exported as braced girders.

Export type

Define the structure of the exported file for reinforcements.

Option

Description

Plant with lying robot only

Exports all embeds without modifications. SLABDATE CONTOUR CUTOUT MOUNPART RODSTOCK BRGIRDER EXTIRON END SLABDATE

260





Option

Description

Fabrication of welded rebars

The structure of the output file (one SLABDATE is shown only): SLABDATE CONTOUR CUTOUT MOUNPART RODSTOCK BRGIRDER REFORCEM STEELMAT RODSTOCK BRGIRDER END STEELMAT STEELMAT RODSTOCK BRGIRDER END STEELMAT … EXTIRON END REFORCEM END SLABDATE

www.cadfamily.com




261

Option

Description

Form mesh automatically

The structure of the output file is the same as for Fabrication of welded rebars. This option allows you to collect mesh, single reinforcing bars and reinforcing bar groups into groups exported in one STEELMAT block. Collecting is made by Mesh defined by and Name UDA fields. Collecting of meshes which belong to different concrete cast units is supported.

1 (orange color) – the mesh belongs to the bottom panel of the cast unit, mesh name is MESH1. 2 (blue color) – two single bars, name is MESH1. 3 (green color) – one reinforcing bar group belongs to the top panel, name is MESH1. If Export Type is set to Form mesh automatically and Mesh defined by is set to Name, all three different reinforcement types are collected into one mesh, which is exported in one STEELMAT block. Mesh defined by

Parameter for automatic mesh collecting. Meshes with one bar are exported as a single reinforcing bar.

•

Class

Reinforcement with the same class number are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with one class number equals one mesh in the exported file.

•

Name

Reinforcement with the same name are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with the same name equals one mesh in the exported file.

•

262

UDA





Reinforcement with the same user-defined attribute (defined with Name of UDA property) are collected into meshes. Specify the name of the user-defined attribute for the Mesh defined by property.

Name of UDA

Data specification This describes the fields on the Data specification tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Order name (HEADER block)

Fills order fields in the HEADER block with the selected data. The options are:

• •

Project number

•

Cast unit number

Project name

Project, line 3 content

Fills project information fields (3rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.

project, line 4 content

Fills project information fields (4rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.

Custom UDA or string

Information displayed in the project information fields of the HEADER block. The typed text depends on the selected option of the project, line 4 content. If the selected option is Project UDA, type in the name of the user-defined attribute, if it is User defined text, type in the text you like.

Braced girder type

Specify braced girder type in the BRGIRDER block in the exported file.

• •

Empty: no string exported Name: the name of the braced girder type. If the name of the top part of the braced girder is

empty, checks the remaining bar names.

•

UDA: the value of the user-defined attribute (defined by UDA name or string) is exported.

•

String: the text defined by UDA name or string is exported.

UDA name or string

Specify the name of the user-defined attribute or text used in Braced girder type.

Slab number (SLABDATE BLOCK)

Specify filling of slab number field in the SLABDATE blocks. Options are:

• •

Counter

•

Cast unit number

Cast unit position

Overview of ELiPLAN import and export Description

Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate the data transfer between these two applications. The data transfer consists of the following actions:

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN

3.

Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan

4.

Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures




263

The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed. Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data regularly. See also

Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 264) Import ELiPLAN status data

Exporting ELiPLAN Exporting to ELiPLAN

264

To export part data to ELiPLAN, 1. 2.

Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type Eliplan and click Search.

3.

Double-click Export data to EliPlan file to open the following dialog box.

4.

Set Scope of export to All and click Create to export the file. For more information on the other properties, see the table below.





Field

Description

Scope of export

Use to export all parts or only selected parts. Because of the incremental import of ELiPLAN you need to select the same parts (and some additional parts, if needed) again when exporting the next time. Otherwise ELiPLAN will think that the parts missing from the subsequent file have been deleted in the Tekla Structures model. We recommend you to always use the All option. Use the Selected option only in special cases or when you are exporting parts for the first time.

Output file name

The name of the export file created in the model folder. The default name is eliplan.eli. You can import this file into ELiPLAN.

Data conversion file

With this file you can convert the parametric profile names into the ELiPLAN product codes, and the material descriptions into the ELiPLAN accessory codes. The default file name is eliplan_export.dat and this file can be located in your model, XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT folder.

List of classes to be ignored (CIP)

A list of classes to exclude from the export. Typically this contains the class numbers used for cast-in-place concrete parts.

Export plotter data

Use to include or exclude the plotter data in the exported file. If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the plotter data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of plotter data in subsequent exports.

Export material data

Use to include or exclude the detailed material data (receipt) of parts. If you have no use for material data in ELiPLAN (you have no material handling module in ELiPLAN), select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the material data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of material data in subsequent exports. If you do this, the receipt is also cleared in the ELiPLAN database and all modifications are lost.

Export rebar bending data

Use to include or exclude the detailed rebar bending information. If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the rebar bending data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of rebar bending data in subsequent exports.

Create

www.cadfamily.com

Click this button to export the data.




265

Before you can transfer data to EliPlan you need to define how the product codes, types, and accessory codes (material description) are moved from the Tekla Structures model to ELiPLAN. For more information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export. See also

Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 216) Import ELiPLAN status data

7.5 Exporting drawings To export Tekla Structures drawings as a DXF or DWG file: 1. 2.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.... Select the drawings from the list.

3.

Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu. The Export drawings dialog box is displayed.

4.

On the Export file tab, browse for the file you want to export by clicking the Browse... button.

5.

Select a file type: DXF or DWG.

6.

Select the Include revision mark to file name check box if you want to include a revision mark in the file name.

7.

Set the layer options as required on the Layer options tab. For more information, see Layers (p. 266).

8.

Set the other options as required on the Options tab:

9.

•

If you want to export the drawing so that the DWG/DXF content is grouped by object, select the Export objects as groups check box. When you do this, Tekla Structures forms a new group for each object (part, mark, dimension line etc.).

•

Set the Drawing scale and Line type scale.

•

Select the Cut lines with text check box if you do not want to display continuous lines in exported drawings, for example, to run the line through text or drawing marks. Click Export.

Layers Use the Layer options tab on the Export Drawings dialog box to define the layering options. If you want to specify which layers different drawing objects belong to, click Setup.... The Drawing Export Layers dialog box is displayed.

266





Rules define the drawing objects Available layers Click to modify layer names and color Organize the rules by right-clicking and using Move up and Move down. You cannot move the rule Other object type. This collects all the exported objects that do not match any other rules. Changing layers

Defining marks to their own layers

Advanced line type and layer conversion

www.cadfamily.com

To change a layer: 1. 2.

Right-click a layer item, and select Select layer.... The Select layer dialog box is displayed. Select the desired layer.

3.

Click OK.

You can define marks to their own layers. This applies to all kinds of marks: bolt marks, part marks, connection marks, neighbour part marks, reinforcement marks and component marks. To do this: 1. 2.

Select the mark layer rule of the mark you want to define to its own layer in Layer rules. Right-click and select Add next level rule from the pop-up menu.

3.

Enter a rule name (for example, BeamMark) and select a filter (for example, beams) and click OK.

4.

Tekla Structures creates the new rule BeamMark, which you can use when exporting drawings.

You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers. For more information, see Advanced line type and layer conversion (p. 268).




267

Copying settings

To copy layer settings to another project: 1. 2.

Enter a name in the uppermost field. Click Save as.

3.

Copy the file *.ldb from the current model folder to the firm or project folder. See also Folder search order (p. 94).

The font name used in Tekla Structures is used to form the name of the text style in AutoCAD. Use dxf_fonts.cnv conversion file to define which font file will be connected to the created AutoCAD style. See also Conversion files (p. 192).

Advanced line type and layer conversion You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers. 1.

Usage

Select the Advanced line type and layer conversion check box on the Layer options tab in the Export Drawings dialog box. Define the file to be used in the conversion in Conversion file.

2.

Tekla Structures uses the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\countryindependent\inp by default for the conversion. If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file LineTypeMapping.xml as a template. For more information, see Defining your own line type mappings (p. 268).

Defining your own line type mappings If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-independent\inp as a template. To define your own line type mappings: 1.

Open the mapping file using a text editor.

We recommend that you use an editor that is capable to validate XML in order to maintain the structure of the document valid.

2.

Add your own definitions. Some mappings have been predefined in the mapping file. Use these mappings as a template for your own mappings. You have two options for defining the mappings:

•

Mapping according to line types only, for example all lines in all layers with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED.

•

Mapping according to line types and layer, for example all lines on the layer BEAM with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED. Tekla Structures first searches for this kinds of mappings by default.

This is how the file LineTypeMapping.xml is composed:

268





The first section consists of XML and document type definition. Do not change or remove this section. The mappings that are available are defined here. You can use these mappings as a template for your own mappings.

www.cadfamily.com




269

In the following example, a new Mapping element is added to the file, where XKITLINE00 lines in the Beam layer are converted to BORDER type, color is converted to 10 and weight to 1.00 mm:

•

For the list of available line types, see the TeklaStructures.lin file, which is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\countryindependent\inp folder. You can open and edit the file using any text editor. The table below describes which line type name corresponds to which line type appearance.

Line type name

Line type appearance

XKITLINE00 XKITLINE01 XKITLINE02 XKITLINE03 XKITLINE04 XKITLINE05 XKITLINE06

3. Exporting hidden lines

•

Define the color of the line in the Color attribute. Enter the color values in AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) codes (numbers from 0 to 255).

•

Define the thickness of the line in the Weight attribute. Enter the values in hundredths of millimeters.

•

Define the layers that the mapping will apply to in the LayerName attribute.

•

If you leave out the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type mapping for any layer. If you include the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type mapping for that layer only. Save the mapping file to the model folder of the model whose drawing you want to export.

You can use the LineTypeMapping.xml file also for exporting hidden lines to separate layers in DWG/DXF export. Define the hidden lines to their own layers. In the following example, a Mapping element is added to the file, where XKITLINE02 lines in the Part layer are converted to HIDDEN2 type, and the layer name is converted to Part_Hidden.

270





For the export to succeed, make sure that the Part_Hidden layer exists on the list of available layers in the Modify Layers dialog box.

7.6 Reference models A reference model is a file which helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. The following file types are supported:

• •

AutoCAD (*.dxf)

•

MicroStation (*.dgn, *.prp)

•

Cadmatic models (*.3dd)

•

IFC files (*.IFC)

•

WebViewer XML files (*.xml)

AutoCAD (*.dwg)

The reference model appears in the background of your Tekla Structures model. You can snap to reference model points. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from file each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the current model. The filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is rop. Topics

Using a reference model (p. 271) Using several reference models (p. 272) Handling large reference models (p. 273) Supported DGN objects (p. 277)

Using a reference model To use a reference model in a Tekla Structures model:

www.cadfamily.com

1. 2.

Open a Tekla Structures model. Check the work plane position. This determines the rotation of the reference model in the Tekla Structures model.

3.

Double-click the Insert reference model icon.

4.

Use Browse... to locate the reference model file.

5.

Set the scale of the reference model, if it is different to the one in the Tekla Structures model (for example, if they use different measurement units).

6.

Click Apply or OK to save the current reference object properties.

7.

Pick the position for the reference model origin.




271

If you do not define the reference model file to use, or it does not exist, Tekla Structures displays a default reference model.

See also

Using several reference models (p. 272) Reference objects in drawings XS_REFERENCE_CACHE (p. 377)

Using several reference models You can use several reference models in one Tekla Structures model. To check which reference models are included in a model, click File > Reference Model List.... Select a reference model object in the dialog box to have Tekla Structures highlight it in the model. Use the Reference Models dialog box to:

• •

Show or hide reference models using the Visibility field View user-defined attributes of reference objects. To modify user-defined attributes, double-click an object on the list to open the Reference Model Properties dialog box, then click User-defined attributes.

You must define user-defined attributes in the objects.inp file. See Adding properties (p. 98).

View filter

You can also use the view filter to define which reference models are visible in each view. To hide a reference model in a view. Find out the ID of the reference model to hide: 1. 2.

Click Tools > Inquire > Object. Click the reference model you want to hide. The Inquire Object dialog box appears.

3.

Copy the ID number.

4.

Interrupt the command.

Select the view where you want to hide the reference model:

272

1. 2.

Double-click the view to display the view properties. In the View Properties dialog box, click Object group....

3.

Click the Add row button to add a new row.

4.

In the Category column, select Reference object.

5.

In the Property column, select Id number.

6.

In the Condition column, select Does not equal.

7.

In the Value column, enter the ID number. To hide several reference models, separate their IDs with spaces.

8.

Click Modify.





See also Using a reference model (p. 271).

Updating reference models You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model in case there have been changes in the original reference models after you have brought them into Tekla Structures. To update all reference models: 1. 2.

Usage

Click File > Reference Model List... Click Reload all.

When you click Reload all, Tekla Structures goes through all the reference models and regenerates the cache for the reference models that have a newer modified date than the one already in the cache.

Handling large reference models This section contains tips for speeding up large reference models.

Easier viewing

• •

To open the Reference object properties dialog box, click File > Reference objects...

•

Switch off Xsnap. It affects picking speed, because one dgn file is one solid object and it takes time to find correct picking point.

•

Split large dgn files into smaller ones.

•

Use fewer segments to represent round reference objects. Set the variable XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS=8. Default is 16 segments.

Select the reference model and set Visibility to Wireframe.

In rendered views, only view reference model objects as rendered inside the work area. This feature is designed solely for DGN cylindrical structures, like piping. To do this, set the variable XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING=TRUE. Tekla Structures then shows the objects as follows:

Gray reference models

• •

Objects entirely inside work area are rendered.

•

Objects partly inside the work area are rendered inside work area, and wireframe outside work area.

Objects entirely outside work area are hidden.

View all reference model objects in gray by setting the variable XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS=FALSE

Detecting changes in reference models Reference models are often updated, but the changes are rarely documented. You can see the changes between an old and a new reference model in Tekla Structures by using the commands in the Reference Object Properties dialog box. You can choose to display one of the following:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

The new file

•

Unchanged objects

The old file




273

•

Changed objects

•

Deleted objects

•

Inserted objects

You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following file formats:

1.

Usage

2. 3. 4. 5.

Example

• •

IFC (.ifc)

•

WebViewer (.xml)

•

DWG (.dwg)

Cadmatic (.3dd)

Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Object dialog box. Browse for the name of the old file by clicking the Browse... button next to the Old file name field. Select an option in the Show list box in the Change detection section. For example, select Changed to see the changed objects in a reference model. Click Display. Tekla Structures highlights the changed reference model objects. Click Modify to stop detecting the changes.

In the following example you will see the how the changes are displayed in the reference model. The old file:

274





The new file:

The Show option has been set to Changed in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:

The Show option has been set to Inserted in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:

www.cadfamily.com




275

The Show option has been set to Deleted in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:

Reference model objects You can split reference models into separate reference model objects. Reference model objects can have separate user-defined attributes that can then be used for reports and view and select filters. Restrictions

The use of this functionality depends on the file format and file structure. You can use it for example for IFC and for DWG files that include any of the following objects:

• •

block table

•

polygon mesh

•

proxy object (for example, ADT)

•

ACIS objects (3DSolid, Body, Region)

polyface mesh

You cannot use this functionality for DGN files.

See also

Selecting reference models and reference model objects (p. 276) Listing reference models and reference model objects in reports (p. 277)

Selecting reference models and reference model objects You can define whether to select reference models or reference model objects.

276





Selecting reference models

To select a reference model:

switch.

1. 2.

Activate the Select component Select the reference model.

Selecting reference model objects

1. 2.

Activate the Select objects in components Select the desired object in the reference model.

See also

Selecting model objects

switch.

Listing reference models and reference model objects in reports You can list reference models and reference model objects separately in reports. Listing reference models

To list reference models in reports, use the content type REFERENCE_MODEL.

Listing reference model objects

To list reference model objects in a reference model in reports, use the content type REFERENCE_OBJECT.

See also

Content type (p. 423)

Supported DGN objects Tekla Structures can display the following DGN objects in reference models:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

Line Elements (Type 3)

•

Shape (Type 6)

•

Text Nodes (Type 7)

•

Curve (Type 11)

•

Complex Chains (Type 12)

•

Complex Shapes (Type 14)

•

Elliptic Elements (Type 15)

•

Arc Elements (Type 16)

•

Text Elements (Type 17)

•

Surfaces (Type 18)

•

Solids (Type 19)

•

Point String Elements (Type 22)

•

Cone Elements (Type 23)

•

B-spline Surfaces (Type 24)

•

B-spline Curves (Type 27)

•

Shared Cells (Type 34, 35)

•

Mesh Elements (Type 105), subtype "Indexed Face Loops"

Line String (Type 4)




277

The following DGN objects are not supported:

• •

Dimension Elements (Type 33)

•

Mesh Elements (Type 105), other subtypes than "Indexed Face Loops"

Multiline Elements (Type 36)

SmartSolid elemets are supported as WireFrame only.

7.7 Tekla WebViewer You can publish your Tekla Structures models as web pages that can be viewed via the Internet using a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer). Topics

Publishing a model as a web page (p. 278) Web templates (p. 279) Emailing WebViewer models (p. 279) Handling named views (p. 280) Handling clip planes (p. 281) Hiding and showing objects (p. 282) Full content rendering (p. 282)

Publishing a model as a web page To publish a Tekla Structures model as a web page: 1.

278

Click File > Publish as Web page.... The following dialog box appears:





2.

In the File name field, enter the destination path and file name for the published model.

3.

Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser checkbox, the model opens in your web browser.

By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current model folder, and places the published model there as an index.html file.

You can choose the location and name for the published model folder and rename the published file but do not change the file name extension.

When you open the model in a web browser, it includes several commands for examining the model. You can also right-click the model in the browser to access a pop-up menu containing these commands.

Web templates The sub-folders under ..\ TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\WebTemplates\TeklaWebViewer contain all Tekla Web Viewer specific materials, for example, a tool (*.dll) for viewing the model, and templates for HTML files. When you publish a model as a web page, Tekla Structures copies the tool and files to the folder you have specified in the File name field. You cannot modify the tool, but you can modify the HTML files to include information relevant to your firm and project. You can use project-specific template fields in the HTML files. Just insert them, surrounded by % characters, in an HTML file in the Tekla Web Viewer folder. Tekla Structures replaces them with the current information from the model you are publishing. Example

When you want the project name to show in the Web Viewer model, insert the string %NAME% in an HTML file. When you publish models as a web page, Tekla Structures takes the project name information from the Project properties dialog box.

Do not remove the string %PUBLISHED_MODEL% from the index.html file. Tekla Structures replaces it with the file name information from the dialog box.

Emailing WebViewer models To email a published model: 1. 2. See also

Zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure. Attach the .zip file to an e-mail message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can then unzip the files and save the contents.

Receiving WebViewer models (p. 279)

Receiving WebViewer models When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file.

www.cadfamily.com




279

See also

Sending WebViewer links (p. 280) Handling named views (p. 280) Handling clip planes (p. 281) Hiding and showing objects (p. 282) Full content rendering (p. 282) How to move and zoom? (p. 282)

Sending WebViewer links There are two ways to send links from Tekla WebViewer:

• • Send WebViewer link

Send WebViewer link Send URL link

Use this tool to send a link to a single Tekla Structures view. To see the view name in the Named views list, the receiver copies the text string and pastes it into the WebViewer model.

To send several views, copy the text strings pointing to the views into a text file and send the text file. The receiver then copies the contents of the text file and pastes it into the WebViewer model.

See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 279). Send URL link

Use this tool to send a URL link to the model. Recipients must have access to the folder containing your published model.

Handling named views To create named views from a published model,

280

1. 2.

Open the index.html for the published model. Zoom in on the part of the model from which you want to create the view.

3.

Right-click and select Copy location.

4.

Create a new file in any text editor (for example, Notepad) and paste the location information into it. It should look like this:

5.

The default name for the view is xyz. To change it, in your text editor, replace the text xyz with the view name that you want to use.

6.

Now you need to copy the updated location information to the published model. Select all the text in the text editor, right-click and select Copy.

7.

In WebViewer, right-click on the model and select Paste location. The view name appears on the Named views list.





WebViewer does not save named views with the published model. But, you can save the text file that contains the location information, then cut and paste the text to the published model in WebViewer the next time you want to use the view. To allow others to see your named views, send them using the Send WebViewer link tool. See Sending WebViewer links (p. 280).

Handling clip planes Use the keyboard shortcut P or the pop-up menu to create clip planes:

To create a clip plane, click shortcut P, and select a plane in the model: To select the clip plane, click the scissor symbol:

www.cadfamily.com




281

Moving clip planes

Move the clip plane by dragging the scissor symbol. You can change the location of the symbol by holding down the Shift key and moving the symbol. Select one clip plane and press space bar to jump between clip planes.

Hiding and showing objects Use the mouse wheel to hide and show objects:

•

To hide objects, move the cursor over the objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll up (or press the Page Up key).

•

To unhide object, move the cursor over the hidden objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll down (or press the Page Down key).

•

Press the Esc key to show all objects.

Full content rendering To handle large models faster, make full content rendering unavailable:

• •

Right-click and select Disable full content rendering from the pop-up menu. To enable full content rendering, select Enable full content rendering from the pop-up menu.

How to move and zoom? Use the following commands to move and zoom in a model:

282





Command (Shortcut)

Action/Description

Zoom

Click Page Up or Page Down keys, or scroll mouse wheel forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.

Pan (P)

Click Pan and drag, or drag with the mouse middle button.

Rotate (Ctrl + R, Shift ?

Totate with mouse (Ctrl + R), rotate model one round (Shift + R) or rotate the model continuously (Shift + T).

R, Shift + T) Fly (Shift+F)

Click Fly and move the mouse forward to fly forward. To change flying direction, move the mouse to the desired direction. To stop, click Esc.

Center (Ins)

Centers the model on the screen.

Home (Home)

Returns the model to the original view.

Set view point (V)

Use to relocate the center of rotation. 1. 2.

Press the V key. Click to pick the new center of rotation.

3.

Hold down the Ctrl key and drag with the middle mouse button.

You can also right-click the model and select the move and zoom commands from the popup menu.

www.cadfamily.com




283

284





8

Introduction

Variables

Tekla Structures includes several variables that you can use to customize your version of Tekla Structures. For example, you can choose to use imperial units by setting a variable. The variables are grouped in different categories according to their usage in the Advanced options dialog box. To access the dialog box, click Tools > Options > Advanced options.... You can also use initialization files for setting variables. For more detailed information, see Setting variables (p. 80). We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set variables.

Topics

List of variables (p. 285) Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 285) User variables (p. 286)

See also

About variables (p. 80) Setting variables (p. 80)

8.1 List of variables Click on a letter below to see a list of variables that begin with that letter, ignoring the initial letters XS. For example, under A you will find the variable XS_AISC_WELD_MARK, under B, XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR,etc. Variables starting with XSR are listed under R. They control how Tekla Structures displays imperial units in reports and drawing tables.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

N

O

P

R

S

T

U

V

W

Z

L

Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box The Advanced Options dialog box groups variables in the following categories:

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Variables

285

See also

• •

Analysis & Design

•

Components

•

Concrete Detailing

•

Dimensioning: General

•

Dimensioning: Bolts

•

Dimensioning: Parts

•

Dimensioning: Unfolding

•

Drawing Properties

•

Drawing View

•

Export

•

File Locations

•

Hatching

•

Imperial Units

•

Import

•

Marking: General

•

Marking: Bolts

•

Marking: Parts

•

Model View

•

Modeling Properties

•

Multi-user

•

Numbering

•

Plate Work

•

Printing

•

Profiles

•

Single Part View in Assembly Drawing

•

Speed and Accuracy

•

Templates and Symbols

•

Welds

CNC


User variables Tekla Structures saves the settings for the following variables in the options_username.ini file:

286


Variables www.cadfamily.com



www.cadfamily.com

• •

XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY

•

XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT

•

XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X

•

XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y

•

XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH

•

XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR

•

XS_CLASH_CHECK_COLOR

•

XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY

•

XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE

•

XS_DEFAULT_FONT

•

XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH

•

XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS

•

XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS

•

XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES

•

XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES

•

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT

•

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X

•

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y

•

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH

•

XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR

•

XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH

•

XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES

•

XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG

•

XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING

•

XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX

•

XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE

•

XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX

•

XS_MACRO_LOG

•

XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT

•

XS_MDIVIEWPARENT

•

XS_MDIZOOMPARENT

•

XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS

•

XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE

•

XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR




287

See also

•

XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL

•

XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT

•

XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS

•

XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_LINES

•

XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS

•

XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING

•

RPC_WAIT_TIME

•

XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST

•

XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY

•

XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE

•

TEXT_X_SIZE

•

TEXT_Y_SIZE

•

XS_TEXT_FONT

•

XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE

•

XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS

•

XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES

•

XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH

•

XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES

•

XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING

•

XS_VIEW_HEIGHT

•

XS_VIEW_POSITION_X

•

XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y

•

XS_VIEW_WIDTH

•

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE

•

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE

•

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO

•

XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE

•

XS_POP_MARK_EDGE_DISTANCE


288





8.2

A

XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM Category

Analysis & Design

Use to set the maximum distance between a curved member and straight segment. The default is 25 mm.

See also

XS_AD_CURVED_BEAMS_BY_STRAIGHT_SEGMENTS

XS_AD_CURVED_BEAMS_BY_STRAIGHT_SEGMENTS Category

Analysis & Design

Set to TRUE to model curved beams as straight segments in the analysis model. Using straight segments ensures that releases are supported for curved beams. The default is TRUE. When set to FALSE, straight segments are not used. See also

XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM

XS_AD_DISABLE_EDITING_BY_UDA Category

Analysis & Design

Use to negate the effect of the following user-defined attributes on analysis models:

See also

• •

Member level

•

Node offset Y

•

Node offset Z

Node offset X

Fine-tuning analysis model

XS_AD_ELEMENT_ANGLE_CHECK_ANGLE_DIFF_LIMIT Category

Analysis & Design

Use to set a limit angle between physical part and analysis model member, in order to test the validity of the analysis model. When the angle is greater than the limit, a message appears and a warning is added to the log. Small differences in angles are usual in the analysis model of a truss, for example.

XS_AD_ENABLE_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL Category

www.cadfamily.com

Analysis & Design




289

Set to TRUE to simplify the analysis model on the edges of plates that are shorter than the limit value set by the variable XS_AD_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL_LIMIT_MM. A typical example is a slab supported by a beam close to the slab edge, so that the beam centerline is located 100–200 mm from the slab edge.

When the analysis model is generated for the slab, nodes appear in the beam centerline and too many nodes and small elements appear in the area between the centerline and the edge (cantilever). Typically the cantilever area is not required in the calculation, so this option tries to remove that area.

XS_AD_MEMBER_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION Category

Analysis & Design

Use to show or hide member numbers when displaying the analysis model in a model view. The default is TRUE, which shows the numbers. See also

Showing analysis models and support conditions in model views

XS_AD_MEMBER_TYPE_VISUALIZATION Category

Analysis & Design

Use color to show different analysis member types when displaying the analysis model in a model view. A setting of FALSE shows the analysis members in red. The default setting is TRUE. This identifies analysis members using the following colors:

See also

• •

Red = normal member

•

Green = truss member

•

Violet = truss member, tension only

•

Yellow = truss member, compression only

•

Dark blue = rigid link

•

Light blue = plate, slab, or panel edge

Gray = composite beam


XS_AD_NODE_COLLISION_CHECK_DISTANCE Category

290

Analysis & Design





To make members meet in analysis models, Tekla Structures merges analysis nodes. Tekla Structures will not merge nodes that are farther apart then the value you specify in this variable. The default is 10 mm.

XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION Category

Analysis & Design

Use to show or hide node numbers when displaying the analysis model in a model view. The default is TRUE, which shows the numbers. See also


XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED Category

Analysis & Design

Use to check profile catalog analysis values. For more information, see XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL.

XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_RECURSE_CATALOG Category

Analysis & Design

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures ignore profile catalog rules for optimizing steel part sizes and search the entire profile catalog.

XS_AD_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL_LIMIT_MM Category

Analysis & Design

Sets the limit distance for cantilever area to be removed from the slab or plate edge in the analysis. For more information, see XS_AD_ENABLE_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL.

XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_DISTANCE_LIMIT Category

Analysis & Design

Use to define the distance at which Tekla Structures considers nodes to be too close. The default value is 100 mm. When nodes are too close to each other in slab or wall meshes, Tekla Structures writes information to the analysis.log file. To define the distance within which Tekla Structures considers nodes to be too close, use this variable. To restrict the distance check to a particular object, enter the object ID in the Value field for the variable XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_PART_ID. The default value is 0. Tekla Structures writes three rows in the analysis.log file:

•

The first row contains information on parts, for example: "Mesh point distances less than the specified limit for PartId: 123"

•

The second row contains information on the first node, for example: "

NodeId: 456,

x = 100.0000, y = 200.0000, z = 10000.000"

www.cadfamily.com




291

•

The third row contains information on the second node, and distance, for example: " >NodeId: 789, x = 150.0000, y = 200.0000, z = 10000.000, distance = 50.0000"

When you click a line in the log file that contains an object ID, Tekla Structures highlights the object in the model.

XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_PART_ID Category

Analysis & Design

Use to restrict the distance check in slab or wall mesh nodes to a particular object. For more information, see XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_DISTANCE_LIMIT.

XS_AD_RESULT_DATABASE_ENABLED Category

Analysis & Design

Use to define whether the analysis results database analysis_results.db5 is created or not. The default setting is TRUE. This creates the analysis results database. If you decide not to create the analysis results database, set this variable to FALSE. In this way the use of large models with several load combinations is faster and less memory consuming.

XS_AD_SOLID_AXIAL_EXPAND_MM Extended clash check is the default method when creating analysis models. By default this

expands solids by 1 mm in all directions, including the axial direction. Use this variable to define how much solids expand in the axial direction.

XS_AD_SUPPORT_VISUALIZATION Category

Analysis & Design

Use to show or hide the support conditions when showing the analysis model in a model view. The default is TRUE, which shows the support conditions. See also


XS_AD_TWIN_PROFILES_ENABLED Category

Analysis & Design

Use to enable or disable the twin profile support in analysis and design. To treat twin profiles as one member in the analysis, set to TRUE. When set to FALSE, Tekla Structures creates two analysis members of the twin profiles in the analysis model.

XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS Category

Model view

To disable the dynamic moving of grid labels when zooming in, and to keep the labels anchored to the end of the grid line, set the variable to FALSE. By default, the grid line labels are kept visible. When working with very large grids, having the grid labels always visible might slow down Tekla Structures. After you change the variable setting, close and re-open the view to implement the change.

292





XS_AISC_WELD_MARK Category

Welds

Set to 1 to create welding marks according to the AISC standard, instead of the ISO standard (Default). AISC weld symbols show the arrow-side weld properties below the reference line in a weld symbol, and the other-side properties above it.

XS_ALIGN_CUT_SYMBOL_BY_VERTICAL_LINE Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures align the cut symbol with the vertical cut line. When you set the variable to TRUE, the value of the longitudinal offset is 0. If the variable is not set, the longitudinal offset is the arrow size multiplied by 1.25.

The variable is set to TRUE. Use this option when you need to see the exact location of the section view. The variable is not set. Use this option when it is important to see the direction rather than the exact location of the section view.

The variable XS_ALIGN_CUT_SYMBOL_BY_VERTICAL_LINE is effective only when you convert drawings created with Tekla Structures 11.3 or earlier to Tekla Structures 12.0 or later.

XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS Category

www.cadfamily.com

Numbering




293

Assign any value to this variable to enable the same drawings to be included in more than one multi-drawing. If this variable is disabled, you can only include each drawing in one multi-drawing.

XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: general

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the inch symbol in dimensions.

XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_WELD_SYMBOLS Category

Imperial units

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the inch symbol in weld symbols.

XS_ALLOW_SHEAR_PLATE_CLASH_FLANGE Category

Components

Set to TRUE to omit the default 0.3mm tolerance between shear plate and secondary part web for shear plate components.

XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_CLOSING_DRAWING Category

Drawing properties

If you close a drawing without making any changes, Tekla Structures does not prompt you to save the drawing. Enter TRUE in the value field to always display the confirmation dialog box:

XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_EXIT Category

Modeling Properties

Use to define whether or not Tekla Structures prompts you to save the model if you are closing it without making any changes. If the value is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures always asks you to save the model when closing it. If the value is set to FALSE, Tekla Structures does not ask you to save the model if there are no changes after the last save. The default value is TRUE.

294





XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER Category

Drawing Properties

Use to add additional parts that are not usually part of a column assembly to an anchor bolt plan, such as anchor rods or leveling plates. First define a general arrangement drawing filter and then define that filter name as the value for this variable. See also

Adding additional parts in anchor bolt plan using a drawing filter

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER Category

Drawing Properties

Use to limit the number of visible objects by using filtering to determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan. First create the base plate filter, then enter its name as the value for the variable. Tekla Structures will not show in the anchor bolt plan the base plates included in the filter. Example

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER=
base plates>

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER Category

Drawing Properties

Use to limit the number of visible objects by using filtering to determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan. First create the bolt filter, then enter its name as the value for the variable. Tekla Structures will not show in the anchor bolt plan the bolts included in the filter. Example

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER=

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER Category

Drawing Properties

Use to limit the number of visible objects by using filtering to determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan. First create the column filter, then enter its name as the value for the variable. Tekla Structures will not show in the anchor bolt plan the columns included in the filter. Example

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER=
columns>

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE Category

Drawing Properties

Use to specify the distance of an assembly from the view plane for the assembly to be included in the anchor bolt plan. Define the distance in millimeters. The default value is 200.

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSI ONS Category

www.cadfamily.com

Drawing Properties




295

Use to select the direction for the dimensions in the anchor bolt plans. If set to TRUE, anchor bolt plan detail view dimensions are created using the coordinate system of the main view. The variable is set to FALSE by default, which means that the dimensions of anchor bolt plan detail views are created according to the base plate coordinate system.

XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR Category


Use to define the size of angle symbols:

Value 1

Value 3 (default)

Value 5

Setting this variable disables the variable XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE.

XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING Category

Dimensioning: unfolding

Use to set the prefix text for unfolded angles. This affects single-part drawings that show folded parts unfolded. See also Unfolding dimensions.

XS_APPLICATIONS Use to define which folder contains the connection, detail, and modeling tool applications. If this variable is disabled, the applications folder is two levels up from the path defined by the variable XS_INP.

XS_ARC_WIDTH_OF_CLOUD Use to control the width of cloud arcs on paper (default 10 mm). You can use the Cloud tool to highlight changes in drawings.

296





XS_ASCII_IMPORT_CREATES_CONSTRUCTION_LINES Category

Import

Set to 1 to have Tekla Structures only draw construction lines between object points in an ASCII import.

ASCII_LEGEND_PATH Category

Templates and symbols

Points to the location of the text fields listing file.

XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE Category

Drawing properties

Use to define a title for assembly drawing views in a multi-drawing. The options are:

• •

PART_NAME

•

PART_POS, ASSEMBLY_POS

•

MODEL_NUMBER

•

LENGTH, PROFILE

•

LENGTH

•

BASE_NAME

•

NAME

PART_MATERIAL

XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING Category

Numbering

Use to define the contents of the assembly family position number. For example, instead of DT1-1, DT1-2, you can define the numbering as DT1-1A or DT1-A, DT1-B. Set the variable as follows: XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING= %%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER%%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WITH_LETTERS%%

Use the following switches to define the contents of family position numbers. Use as many switches as you need, and enclose each one in double percent symbols (%%).

www.cadfamily.com

Switch

Description

%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%

Assembly prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.

%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER%%

Assembly family number, defined by the start number (in part properties dialog box) and the final position in that numbering series.




297

Switch

Description

%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION _WITH_LETTERS%%

Assembly family letter, defined by the start character (in part properties dialog box) and the final character in the series. Uses letters A to Z by default, but you can also define valid letters with the variable XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEM BLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMB ERS.

%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIE R_WITH_LETTERS%%

See also

Assembly family qualifier with letters. Uses letters A – Z by default, but you can also define valid letters with the variable XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEM BLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER.

Family numbering

XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING Category

Numbering

Use to base assembly numbers on drawing numbers. Use the following switches to define the contents of assembly marks. Use as many switches as you need, and enclose each one in double percent symbols (%%). The available switches are:

Switch

Description

ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRA WING_NUMBER

Multidrawing name.

ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRA WING_POS

Position of the assembly drawing inside the multidrawing.

ASSEMBLY_PREFIX

Assembly prefix in the model.

ASSEMBLY_POS

Assembly position number in the model.

Template fields

Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant template field. Enclose each name in double percent symbols (%%). For example, %%UDA:PHASE%%

User-defined attributes

Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant user-defined attribute, exactly as it appears in the objects.inp file. For example, %%UDA:MY_INFO_1%%

Example

To put the assembly multinumbers in the format multi drawing name + part prefix + position on multi drawing, set the variable as follows: XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=%%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DR AWING_NUMBER%%%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%%%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRAWIN G_POS%% This will create the assembly mark 10B1, where:

298





See also

• •

10 is the drawing number

•

1 designates that it is the first assembly on the sheet.

B is the assembly prefix

XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D Category


Set to TRUE to include Z orientation in assembly position codes.

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE Category


Tolerance distance to use when identifying grid position code for assembly.

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING Category

Numbering

Use to have Tekla Structures only use letters in assembly numbers.

Do not change this variable after you have created single-part, assembly, or cast-unit drawings! It may partially separate drawings from the part they are representing, causing the drawings to be flagged as deleted and another drawings cloned after the next numbering. The switches are:

Switch

Description

%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%

Assembly prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.

%%ASSEMBLY_POS%%

Assembly position number, defined by the start number (from part properties dialog box) and the final position in that numbering series.

%%ASSEMBLY_POS_WITH_LETTERS %%

Same as above, but with letters. Uses letters A – Z by default, but you can also define valid letters with the variable XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEM BLY_POSITION_NUMBERS.

XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE Category

www.cadfamily.com





299

Use to define the height of the change symbol around the points. The default value is 7. See also

XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (p. 346)

XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL Category


Use to define the used change symbol. The default value is AssociativityAnchor@1 (a cloud). See also

XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (p. 346)

XS_ATTRIBUTE_FILE_EXCLUDE_LIST Category

File Locations

Enter the file name or a part of the file name that you want to exclude from the user interface as the value for the variable. If you enter many values, separate them using a semicolon (;). For example, setting the variable to _eng;_det removes all the attribute files that include the string _eng or _det in their name from the user interface.

XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE Category

Components

Use to set the size of the area that Tekla Structures searches for parts to connect with AutoConnection. Can only be set in millimeters. Example

For 500 millimeters: XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE=500.0

XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL Category

Components

Set to switch on UDL calculation in AutoConnection. This calculates the maximum shear force allowed. XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL=TRUE

XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT Category

Components

Use to set a default percentage for UDL calculation. In AutoDefaultsTekla Structures uses the percentage in the connection properties. If no percentage is given, Tekla Structures uses this value. In AutoConnection only the default percentage is used. You switch UDL calculation on with the variable XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL. XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT=50

XS_AUTOMATIC_NEW_MODEL_NAME Category

300

Modeling Properties





Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures suggest a name for a new model automatically in the New dialog box. The name of the model is New model XX, where XX is a running number. Set the variable to FALSE to have no suggestion for a model name of a new model in the New dialog box. The variable is set to TRUE by default.

XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SAVING_INTERVAL Category

Modeling Properties Use to change the saving interval of the automatic user feedback information. The value of the variable corresponds to the number of rows in the log file. The log file is called UserFeedbackLog.txt and it is located in the TeklaStructuresModels folder.

XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SENDING_INTERVAL Category

Modeling Properties Use to change the sending interval of the automatic user feedback information. The value of the variable corresponds to the number of rows in the log file. The log file is called UserFeedbackLog.txt and it is located in the TeklaStructuresModels folder.

XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY Category

File locations

Use to point to the folder containing files Tekla Structures saves automatically. If this variable is disabled, Tekla Structures places autosave files in the current model folder.

8.3 B XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 Category

Model view

To have a gradient background color in model views, use the variables XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1, XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2, XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3 and XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4 to control the color of corners separately in a model view.

www.cadfamily.com




301

Define the color using the RGB (Red Green Blue) values (scale is from 0 to 1). If you want to use the traditional single-colored background, set the same value for all four background color variables. Reopen the view for the change to take effect. Black or white background

• •

Use 0.0 0.0 0.0 for black background Use 1.0 1.0 1.0 for white background

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2 Category

Model view

See XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1.


Model view



Model view


XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH Category

302

Plotting





Use to specify the base line width for printed drawings. The default value is 0.1. The final line thicknesses in a printed drawing is base line width multiplied by pen numbers from the Color table dialog box.

To control the accuracy of line thickness, use a small value for XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH and a large number for the pen.

This variable also affects lines in the display, if XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN is set to TRUE.

XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN Category

Plotting

Use to control whether XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH affects line widths drawn in the display or not. Enter FALSE in the Value field if you do not want XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH to affect line widths in the display.

XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT Category

Model view

Use to control the height of basic view windows. For more information, see XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X. Example

XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT=570

XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X Category

Model view

Use to control the horizontal position of basic view windows on the screen. Origin

If the variable XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT is set, the origin for the position is the top left corner of the client area. Otherwise, the origin is the top left corner of the whole Tekla Structures window. Moving a toolbar also affects the size of the client area, because menus and toolbars are not part of it.

Units

The width and height are in pixels.

XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y Category

Model view

Use to control the vertical position of basic view windows on the screen. For information on using this variable, see XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X.

XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH Category

www.cadfamily.com

Model view




303

Use to control the width of basic view windows. For information on using this variable, see XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X.

XS_BEVEL_DIMENSIONS_FOR_PROFILES_ONLY Category

Dimensioning: Parts

Use to define whether to show bevel dimensions only for profiles. By default, the variable is set to FALSE. If yout set the variable to TRUE, bevel dimensions are shown only for profiles If you set the variable to FALSE, bevel dimensions are shown always.

XSBIN Use to define the location of the Tekla Structuresbin folder.

XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND Category

Drawing view

Set to TRUE to have a black backgound and colored lines in drawings. To enable white background and black lines, clear the Value field.

This variable is user-specific, not model-specific. It only affects the colored mode, not black-and-white mode.

See also

Colors in drawings XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS

XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON Category

Modeling properties

Use to round bolt length. Tekla Structures calculates bolt length using material thickness. To avoid having several bolt lengths where material thickness only differs slightly, set XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON to a positive or negative value. Tekla Structures adds or subtracts this value from the material thickness in bolt length calculation. Enter the value in millimeters (all environments). Typical values are 0.001–0.5. See also


XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX Category

Marking: bolts

Use to specify a prefix for bolt mark diameter. The possible values are NONE or the desired string. Example

304

For a bolt group consisting of three 20 mm diameter bolts:





•

If the variable is disabled

the result is 3*M20

•

If XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX=NONE

the result is 3*20

•

If XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX=D

the result is 3*D20

XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA Category

Marking: bolts

Set to TRUE to hide the bolt marks of bolts hidden from views by other objects in general arrangement drawings. Example

If there are bolts on either side of a beam, one will be hidden by the beam in front of it. Set this variable to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures displaying the bolt mark of the hidden bolt.

XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks. The variables XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting. For switches you can use to define the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks in general arrangement drawings. If you have not set the variables XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 385) or XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391), then this variable is used. See also

Size element in bolt marks

XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Use to create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts. Example

XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT=TRUE

XS_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_PLANE_IN_NC Category

CNC

Set to TRUE to dimension bolts perpendicular to part plane in NC files.

www.cadfamily.com




305

8.4 C XS_CALC_REFOBJ_PROTECT Set toTRUE to have Tekla Structures calculate the protection area of reference objects in drawings. By default Tekla Structures does not calculate the protection area.

There should not be any reason to set this variable, as the protect information for reference objects is currently not used in drawing creation. Using this variable slows down drawing production.

XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE Category


Use to have Tekla Structures calculate polybeam length along the reference line instead of the centerline. By default, Tekla Structures measures polybeam length along the centerline of the beam, regardless of the Position in plane values of the beam. See also Polybeam length calculation.

The centerline option is always a safe alternative, because other modifications do not impact on it. For example, if you calculate length using the reference line and you have used offsets to move the beam, the result may not be the true length of the beam.

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING Category

Marking: bolts

Use to define gage information in the bolt mark. See also GOL, C/C, GAGE. Defining the contents

Use the switch %%VALUE%% for the numeric value of a gage. Add text before and after the value. If %%VALUE%% is missing, then Tekla Structures adds the center-to-center distance to the end of the string. If the variable is disabled, only %%VALUE%% is used. If Tekla Structures cannot calculate the gage, then nothing is added to the mark.

Example

306

There is a symmetrical bolt group in beam flange. The value for gage is 10.

Definition in the initialization file

Bolt mark

set XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_ PART_STRING=GAGE = %%VALUE%%

GAGE = 10





XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING Category

Marking: bolts

Use to define the center-to-center distance information in the bolt mark where there are two parts. For more information on defining the contents, see XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING. Example

For a symmetrical bolt group in two clip angles. The center-to-center distance is 10.

Definition in the initialization file

Bolt mark

set XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_P ARTS_STRING=c/c = %%VALUE%%

c/c = 10

XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR Category

Speed and accuracy

Use to define the number of points used for chamfers. The default value is 1.0. Use values smaller than 1.0 to increase the number of points. Use values larger than 1.0 to decrease the number of points.

XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR Category

Model view

Use to adjust chamfer length. Tekla Structures calculates plate chamfer length from the plate side length using the following formula: XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR * plate side length. By default this factor is 0.08.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define whether dimensions have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, dimension placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define whether part, bolt and reinforcement marks have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, mark placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED Category

www.cadfamily.com

Drawing Properties




307

Use to define whether associative notes have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, associative notes placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define whether texts have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, text uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define whether views have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, view placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing

XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO Category

Marking: parts

Use to specify a symbol to replace the asterisk character (*) in bolt marks and the size elements of part marks. Example

XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO=X You cannot use this variable to change the asterisk character in profile strings (e.g. PL10*100).

XS_CHANGE_WORKAREA_WHEN_MODIFYING_VIEW_DEPTH Category

Model view

Makes working with reference files easier. By default, objects such as parts and reference files outside the work area are not visible, even when they are within the display depth range. Set to TRUE to automatically adjust the work area when you change the display depth.

XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO Category

Plate work

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures check plate length and plate width, then compare it with the possible dimensions for flat bars in fltprops.inp. If disabled, Tekla Structures only checks plate width.

XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE Category


Sizes the triangle to fit text in bevel dimensions.

308





To define the angle symbol size, use the variable XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR.

Using variable XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR will disable variable XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE.

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS Category

Speed and Accuracy

Use to define the chord tolerance for round tubes smaller than or equal to the limit set by the variable XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value is 1.0.

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT (p. 310)

See also

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS Category

Speed and Accuracy

Use to define the chord tolerance for round tubes larger than the limit set by the variable XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value is 1.0. Chord tolerance

www.cadfamily.com

Chord tolerance is the maximum difference between a straight segment used to display a tubular section in model views and the actual tubular section:




309

See also

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT (p. 310) XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT Category

Speed and Accuracy

Use to define the limit that determines whether a tube is considered small when calculating the chord tolerance. The value is compared to the diameter of the profile. Enter the value in millimeters. The default value is 50.0. See also

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309) XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)

XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_NAME Use to define the name of the temporary database used in CIMsteel transfers.

XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PASSW Use to define the password for the temporary database used in CIMsteel transfers.

XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PATH Use to define a path to the temporary database that Tekla Structures creates while converting a model from/to CIMsteel STEP format.

XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE Use to define the name of the EXPRESS file located in the system folder. The EXPRESS file describes the CIMsteel DEP1 logical product model. It is used when you convert a Tekla Structures model to/from CIMsteel DEP1 STEP format.

XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES Category

Modeling Properties

Use to define whether or not Tekla Structures should run the clash check also between reference models.

310





Set to TRUE if you want to perform clash check also between two reference models. The default value is FALSE.

XS_CLASH_CHECK_COLOR Category

Model view

Use to change the color that indicates clashing parts. You can use fourteen colors (numbered from 1 to 14, see Colors). The default color is yellow (= 6).

XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY Category

Speed and accuracy

If you use model history log files, set this variable to clear history data from the log file each time you open and save the model. See also

XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY

XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING Category

CNC

Defines the rounding factor of holes for NC files. NC files are accurate to 0.01 mm. Use to round up bolt diameters with very small differences in diameter to the same value. You may need to use different diameters because bolts can have different tolerance values in a Tekla Structures model. You can input more decimals into bolt tolerance values in the component dialog boxes than in the general bolt dialog box. The rounding routine is used only when you create NC files. Set the rounding factor the same value (in mm) as the drill tolerance of the machine tool. Tekla Structures divides the original hole diameter by the rounding factor, then rounds the result to the nearest integer, then multiplies it by the rounding factor. As a result, bolt diameters with very small differences in diameter are now rounded up to the same value. Example

set XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING=1.5875

Here the rounding factor is 1.5875 (1/16 inch), which results in:

•

Diameter 26.99 mm (1” 1/16 from component dialog box) => 26.99/1.5875 => 17.00 => 17 => 17*1.5875 => 26.99 mm

•

Diameter 27.00 mm (1” 1/16 from bolt dialog box) => 27.00/1.5875 => 17.01 => 17 => 17*1.5875 => 26.99 mm

XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY Category

Speed and accuracy

Tekla Structures can collect model history data on various objects, for example, parts in the inquire object dialog, rebars, components in reports, etc. Collecting model history data may require a lot of disk space and memory so Tekla Structures does not collect it by default. To collect the data, set this variable to TRUE. We recommend that you collect the history only if you really need it.

www.cadfamily.com




311

This variable works mainly in multi-user mode. In single-user mode Tekla Structures collects the history data only on deleted parts.

See also

XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY

XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Use to set the character in bolt dimensions. Example

The character used in the bolt dimension 4*50 is *.

XS_COMPLEX_PART_MEMBERS_DO_NOT_HAVE_TO_BE_MAIN_PARTS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use in complex part/ assembly dimensioning to have Tekla Structures dimension other than main parts as one.

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COLLECTION_NAME_LENGTH Category

Modeling properties

Collection names in the component catalog are truncated to 12 characters. Use this variable to adjust the length of the names, then re-open the component catalog.

This may increase the size of the component catalog dialog box.

See also

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE Category

Modeling properties

Use to adjust the size of thumbnails to between 6 and 96 pixels. The default is 96 pixels. After changing the value, re-open the component catalog.

This may increase the size of the component catalog dialog box.

See also

312

XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COLLECTION_NAME_LENGTH





XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX Use to define a numbering prefix for concrete parts.

XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER Use to define a starting number for concrete parts.

XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL Category

Marking: parts

Use to change the symbol for a connecting side mark. By default the side mark symbol is number 34 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set this variable to a different symbol number.

XS_CONNECT_PLATE_PROFILES_IN_AUTOCONNECTION Category

Components

Set to TRUE to enable AutoConnection for built-in members. If disabled, Tekla Structures does not consider plates as members when you use AutoConnection.

XS_CONSIDER_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS_IN_HIDDEN Category

Drawing properties

Set to draw parts behind neighboring parts using hidden lines.

XS_CONSIDER_REBAR_NAME_IN_NUMBERING Category

Concrete detailing

Set to FALSE to haveTekla Structures only take part names into account when numbering, not reinforcing bar names.

XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM Category

Components

Use to define how to convert part and connection attribute tables when you open a Tekla Structures catalog prior to version 7.0. Example

To convert force units from kip to SI, set XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM to kip. You can use the following units: kg/T/N/daN/kN/lbf/kip, or a numerical value.

XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM Use to define how to convert part and connection attribute tables when you open a Tekla Structures catalog prior to version 7.0. Example

To convert moment units from kip-ft to SI, set XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM to kip-ft.

www.cadfamily.com




313

You can use the following units: kgm/Tm/Nm/daNm/kNm/lbf-in/lbf-ft/kip-in/kip-ft, or a numerical value.

XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Use to determine how the quantity of parts with merged part marks is shown. Example

When there are four or more identical stiffeners on both sides of a beam web, the mark is

• • See also

4x1002BS if XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK=TRUE 2x1002BS if XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK is not set.

XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK

XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Use to determine how the quantity of parts with merged part marks is shown. Example

When there are two identical stiffeners on both sides of a beam web, the mark is

• • See also

2x1002BS if XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK=TRUE 1002BS if XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK is not set.

XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK

XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING Category

Marking: General

Use to create all marks to a cloned drawing where new parts have been added, set the variable To create the marks, set the variable to TRUE. The default is FALSE.

XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Enter TRUE in the Value field to have Tekla Structures dimension the round hole center point in drawings.

XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to link copied views to the original drawing. For example, when you delete a drawing from which you copied a view, Tekla Structures also deletes the copied view.

XS_CREATE_VIEW_FROM_MODEL_OLD_WAY Use to specify which values Tekla Structures uses for view extrema in general arrangement drawings. This only affects views created from the model. If disabled (default), the view extrema values are based on the current work area x and y coordinates of a model view.

314





When this variable is set to TRUE, the extrema values of a drawing view are based on the entire model view, ignoring the work area settings. In both cases depth values are based on the model view display depth values.

XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE Category

Speed and accuracy

Use to change the angles dividing a cross section chamfer (default 10.0 degrees). Example

XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE=10.0

XS_CURVED_AXIS_PLACE Category

Profiles

By default, Tekla Structures calculates the length of curved parts along the center axis. Use this variable to define the position of this axis as a ratio. Tekla Structures calculates the location of the axis using the formula h=H/2.0*ratio. The default value is zero. Define the ratio as 1.0 to calculate length along the upper flange. Define the ratio as -1.0 to define the length along the lower flange. This value is used in reports and drawing templates.

XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT Use to define the font for section symbol text. If you do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the default font.

XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS Category

Modeling properties

Use to define how many cycles Tekla Structures makes to solve the dependencies in custom components. Enter a number for the amount of cycle loops. The default is 2.

XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_USE_ATTRIBUTE_LOOPS Category

Modeling properties

Used in solving dependencies in custom components. Attributes should not be used when Tekla Structures is solving the multiple dependencies so set this variable to FALSE. See also

XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS

8.5 D DAK_BMPPATH Use to point to the folder for bitmap files used in

•

www.cadfamily.com

custom components




315

•

user-defined attributes (objects.inp file)

•

profile catalog

•

some system components

By default this variable is defined in the teklastructures.ini file and it points to the folder:\TeklaStructures\14.0\nt\bitmaps To change this folder 1. 2.

Copy the entire contents of the \TeklaStructures\14.0\nt\bitmaps folder to the new location. Add this variable DAK_BMPPATH to the user.ini file.

XS_DEFAULT_FONT Category

Model view

Use to specify the default font when modeling and drawing.

XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE Category

Model view

Use to set the default font size when modeling.

XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DRAWINGS Category

This variable is available only in initialization files. Set the variable to TRUE in the global_default_env.ini file located in the ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-independent folder to have Tekla Structures delete unnecessary drawing files.

See also

Deleting unnecessary dg files (p. 75)

XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define a fixed size for circle-shaped detail boundaries in detail views. Enter a numeric value in millimeters for the radius.

XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE Category

Drawing properties

Sets the reference text for symbols that show a detail from another drawing. Enter the text in the Value field. The text can include:

• •

free text

•

template attributes

user-defined attributes

If you set the variable in the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the user-defined and template attributes. For example, %DRAWING_TITLE%.

316





If you set the variable in the initialization files, use double % characters around the user-defined and template attributes. For example, %%DRAWING_TITLE%%.

XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE Category

Drawing properties

Sets the reference text for detail view labels. See also XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE.

XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS Category

Export

Use to specify how Tekla Structures exports solids to DGN format. Set to CELL to export solids as cells containing the solid faces as a DGN shape. Set to SOLID to export solids as DGN solids defined by boundary elements.

XS_DGN_EXPORT_USE_LOCAL_ID Category

Export

Enter TRUE in the Value field to enable the use of local ID numbers in 3D DGN export. Every exported part gets a unique ID number starting from 1. The ID is saved as a user-defined attribute and the same ID will be used in consequent exports.

XS_DIMENSION_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Se to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from combining bolt group dimensions.

XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR Category


Use to define the character to be used as a decimal separator in dimension and level marks. XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR = .

In the following example, the dimension mark contains a comma when the dimension settings in the Dimension Properties dialog box are as follows, and the variable is set to XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR=,

www.cadfamily.com




317

In the following example, the separator was first a period and was then changed to a comma.

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER Category


Use to specify which separator character to use in large dimension values: for example a comma (,), where 154321 would become 154,321. If no character is specified, Tekla Structures uses a space in dimensions when you select Yes in Dimension properties > General > Use grouping. See also

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT Dimension properties

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT Category


Use to specify the number of digits after which a separator character will be inserted in dimension values: for example 3, where 154321 would become 154 321. See also

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER Dimension properties

318





XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR Category


See Create short extension lines.

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET Category


Use to specify the distance between the extension line origin and the start of the extension line (extension origin offset). XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET=1.0

extension origin offset

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR Category


See Create short extension lines.

XS_DIMENSION_FONT Use to specify the font for dimension text. If you do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the default font.

XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Flips dimension text that is sloped more than the given value. For more information, see Aligning sloped dimension text. Example

XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS=0.1

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use to define the content of the part mark dimension in assembly drawings. The available switches are:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

PROFILE

•

SIZE

MATERIAL




319

Example

•

LENGTH

•

COMMENT

•

WPDIST (distance between work points)

•

GR_L (gross length of the part)

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY=PROFILE_AND_MATERIAL XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY=PROFILE_AND_GR_L

See XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE.

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE Category

Dimensioning: Parts

Use to define the content of the part mark dimension in single part drawings. Example

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE=PROFILE_AND_MATERIAL XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE=PROFILE_AND_GR_L

The available switches are:

• •

PROFILE

•

SIZE

•

LENGTH

•

COMMENT

•

WPDIST (distance between work points)

•

GR_L (gross length of the part)

MATERIAL

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER Category


To define the symbol Tekla Structures uses in plate side marks, use the following variables:

• •

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT

•

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbols no 0, 1 and 2 , defined in the dim ension_marks.sym file (located usually in the folder \environments\countryindependent\symbols\).

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT Category


See XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER

320





XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT Category


See XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_COLOR Category


Use to define the color of the dimension point invalidity symbol circles. Enter a numerical value or the name of the color. Default is DARK RED. Other valid color names are RED, DARK RED, GREEN, DARK GREEN, BLUE, DARK BLUE, CYAN, DARK CYAN, GREY, DARK GREY, DARK YELLOW, ORANGE, MAGENTA, BLACK.

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS Category


Use to define the length of the inner radius of the dimension point circle. Tekla Structures marks the invalid dimensions with red dimension point circles. Enter a decimal value for the custom size of the radius. The default value is 1.0. See also

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS (p. 321)

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS Category


Use to define the length of the outer radius of the dimension point circle. Tekla Structures marks the invalid dimensions with red dimension point circles. Enter a decimal value for the custom size of the radius. The default value is 6.0. See also

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS (p. 321)

XS_DIMENSION_SKEWED_BOLTS_IN_PART_PLANE_IN_SINGLE_DRAWIN GS Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Set to TRUE to dimension bolts perpendicular to the part plane in single-part drawings.

XS_DIR Use to point to the folder for Tekla Structures data, source, and binary files.

XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS You can disable the Advanced options dialog box so that the variables can be edited in the batch files only. To disable the dialog box, set this variable in the initialization files: set XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS=TRUE

www.cadfamily.com




321

For more information on variables, seeSetting variables (p. 80).

XS_DISABLE_CANCEL_DIALOG_FOR_SAVE_NUMBERING_SAVE Category

Numbering

Use to revert to the old numbering functionality that offers no option to cancel numbering before the second save is made. See also

Numbering setup

XS_DISABLE_CIS2 Category

Analysis & Design Use to hide or display the CIMSteel command. To hide the CIMSteel command in the File > Export and File > Import menus, set the XS_DISABLE_CIS2 variable to TRUE. Restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect.

XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS Category

Drawing Properties

Use to disable the Drawing Classifier check for modified parts. When you change part properties in a model after you have defined the Drawing Classifier settings, part presentation and mark content are updated in general arrangement drawings unless you have set this variable to TRUE. To disable the check for modified parts, set the variable to TRUE. To enable the check for modified parts, set the variable to FALSE. Drawings are not updated if the change does not affect numbering.

XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE Category

Drawing Properties

Use to disable the print date information in drawings. Disabling the print date helps to avoid possible conflicts when working with multi-user models in situations where a user modifies drawings while another user prints the same drawings. By default, the variable is set to TRUE.

XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH Category

Drawing view

Set to TRUE to disable partial refreshing of OpenGL windows.

XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define whether templates are opened when you double-click the template table in drawings.

322





By default, the variable is set to FALSE. When set to FALSE, the default template editor will be opened when you double-click the template table. When set to TRUE, the Drawing Properties dialog is shown when you double-click the template table.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_ASSEMBLY Category

Drawing view

Use to left-align assembly drawing views.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_GA Category

Drawing view

Use to left-align GA drawing views.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_MULTI Category

Drawing view

Use to left-align multi drawing views.

XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_SINGLE Category

Drawing view

Use to left-align single-part drawing views.

XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID Use to disable automatic weld preparation. Set this variable to TRUE to prevent automatic weld preparation when using certain weld types.

XS_DISPLAY_ZERO_INCHES Category

Imperial units

Use to display zero inches.

XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE Category

Model View

Use to define the distance outside of which the object must be located for it to be listed by the Find Distant Objects tool. The distance is measured from the nearest part. Enter the value in meters. The default value is 100. See also

www.cadfamily.com

Finding distant objects




323

XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS Category


Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from checking dimension points when you open drawings. Or define settings for different drawing types using any combination of the switches A, W, M, G and C (assembly, single-part, multi-, general arrangement and cast unit drawings). Example

To apply to general arrangement, multi- and assembly drawings, set to GMA.

Using this variable in drawings that contain a lot of parts, especially curved ones, slows down opening drawings and uses a lot of memory.

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONCRETE_PARTS Category

Drawing Properties

Use to control the creation of single-part and assembly drawings from concrete parts. To enable the creation of drawings, set the variable to FALSE. To disable the creation of drawings, set the variable to TRUE.

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from automatically displaying the profile dimensions of concrete parts in cast-unit drawings.

XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS Category

Model view

Set to TRUE to draw polygon plates without chamfers.

XS_DO_NOT_DRAW_COLUMN_MARKS_AT_45_DEGREES_IN_GA_DRAWI NG Category

Marking: parts

Tekla Structures places column marks in GA drawing plan views by default at an angle of 45 degrees in respect to the position of the column. To place the marks horizontally, set this variable to TRUE.

XS_DO_NOT_EXTEND_DIMENSION_LINES_THROUGH_ALL_HOLES Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Set to TRUE to prevent leader lines from extending through all holes in a bolt group.

324





XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES Category


Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from printing red dimension point circles when you print from the drawing list. Red dimension point circles are always printed, if you have the Drawing Editor open.

XS_DO_NOT_REMOVE_END_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: parts

When you use absolute dimensions, by default, Tekla Structures removes the last absolute vertical dimension. To prevent this, set to TRUE.

XS_DO_NOT_USE_DMPAPER_USER Tekla Structures uses a predefined value DMPAPER_USER as the user-defined paper size when printing. Set this to TRUE to enable the old paper size definition . set XS_DO_NOT_USE_DMPAPER_USER=TRUE

XS_DO_NOT_USE_FOLDED_GUSSET_PLATE Set to use part-adds to create folded plates in gusset connections. If disabled (default), Tekla Structures creates folded gusset plates using the Polybeam command instead of the Part-add command.

XS_DO_NOT_USE_GLOBAL_PLATE_SIDE Category

Components

By default, connections 141, 146, 147, 149, 181, 184, 185, 186 and 187 create all shear plates on the same side of the main part, if the main part has several connections (global positioning). Use this variable to position each shear plate according to which end of the main part the connection that creates it is closest to (local positioning).

XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to hide polybeam fold and bend lines in drawings.

XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS Category

This variable is available only in initialization files. Set to TRUE to draw the edges of a cut part in the drawing and to FALSE to leave the edges open. The variable is set to TRUE by default.

XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING Category

www.cadfamily.com





325

Use to show the angle and radius information on the dimension line. See also Unfolding dimensions. To hide this information, clear the Value field.

XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING Category


Use to create bending line dimensions in a drawing. See also Unfolding dimensions. To not create these dimensions, clear the Value field.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES Category

Drawing properties

Use the following variables to show or hide bolts that are hidden from view by other parts, in single part, assembly, and general arrangement drawings. The default values are shown here:

• •

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS=AS_PART

•

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS=FALSE

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS=AS_PART

Possible values are:

See also

• •

AS_PART: uses part’s hidden line visibility settings.

•

FALSE: does not show hidden bolts.

TRUE: always shows hidden bolts.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS See XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS See XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS See XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES Category

Drawing properties

Use the following variables show or hide hidden lines in bolts in single part, assembly, and general arrangement drawings. The default values are shown here:

• •

326

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS=AS_PART XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS=AS_PART





•

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS=FALSE

Possible values are:

See also

• •

AS_PART: used the visibility settings of the part’s own hidden lines.

•

FALSE: does not show bolts’ hidden lines.

TRUE: always shows bolts’ hidden lines.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS See XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS See XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES.

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS See XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES.

XS_DRAW_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Set to TRUE to draw bolts perpendicular to the part plane in single part drawings. This only applies to bolt symbol types symbol and symbol3.

XS_DRAW_BOLTS_THROUGH_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS Use to draw the bolt parts that coincide with neighboring parts.

XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES Category

Concrete detailing

Use to show or hide edge lines of concrete cast units in drawings. Set to TRUE to show overlapping edge lines between adjacent cast units. See also XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES.

XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES Category

Concrete detailing

Use to show or hide concrete part lines inside cast units in drawings. Set to TRUE to show overlapping part lines inside cast units. See also XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES.

XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES Category

www.cadfamily.com

Model view




327

Hide or show the handles or chamfers of contour plates and concrete slabs. The options are:

• •

HANDLES: only shows handles. Makes selecting handles easier. CHAMFERS: only shows chamfers

XS_DRAW_CROSS_AXIS Category

Drawing properties

Set to N to have Tekla Structures hide the axis cross in beam cross sections. Leave blank to display the axis cross in beam cross sections.

XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA Category

Hatching

Use to indicate the name of the schema file to use for assembly drawings. Example

To use the default schema file, enter assembly.htc in the Value field.

XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA Category

Hatching

Use to determine the name of the schema file used for cast-unit drawings. Example

To use the default schema file, enter cast_unit.htc in the Value field.

XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR Category

Drawing Properties

Use to change the highlight color of the automatic change symbols. The color options are RED, BLACK, GREEN, BLUE and GREY.

If you use the default color (magenta), the symbols are displayed on the screen but they will not appear in the printed drawings.

Example

Set the variable to

328

Color on screen

190(default)

not visible

RED

red



Color in printed drawings



Set the variable to

Color on screen

Color in printed drawings

GREEN

green

BLUE

blue

BLACK

black

GREY

grey

XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA Category

Hatching

Use to determine the name of the schema file used for general arrangement drawings. Example

To use the default schema file, enter general.htc in the Value field.

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH Category

Drawing Properties

Use to specify a fixed size for the grid label frames. This is useful, for example, when you want all the grid label frames to be the same size no matter whether there are one or two digits in the frame. The default value is zero (0), which indicates that the width of the grid label frame depends on the width of the grid label. Enter the desired value in millimeters. If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures adjusts the grid label frames to text within each frame XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH =

Example of grid label frames when the frame size is not fixed:

Example of grid label frames when the frame size is fixed:

www.cadfamily.com




329

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR Category

Drawing Properties

Use to change the thickness of the grid label frame in drawings. Example

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR=

XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE Category

Drawing properties

Use to define the contents of the drawing history log file. You can use the following switches individually or in any combination.

Example

• •

ALL

•

DELETED

•

MODIFIED

NEW

NEW_DELETED

XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS Category

Marking: parts

Use to control whether zero levels (+0.000) are shown or hidden in part marks. By default the variable is set to TRUE, so zero levels are hidden in part marks. Set to FALSE to show the zero levels in part marks. To list level information in part marks, in the Part mark properties dialog box, use the element User-defined attribute and type in one of the following template attributes:

See also

• •

ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL

•

CAST_UNIT_BOTTOM_LEVEL

•

CAST_UNIT_TOP_LEVEL

ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL

Adding user-defined attributes to marks

XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE Category

Drawing properties

Use to set the reference line type in drawings. You can use the following switches:

•

330

POINT_LINE creates a line between the part’s creation points.





•

DEFINITION_LINE creates a line between the part’s definition points (creation points +

end offsets ).

•

CORNER_REFERENCE_LINE creates a line between the part’s corner points.

POINT_LINE

DEFINITION_LINE

CORNER_ REFERENCE_LINE

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY Category

Printing

The folder where Tekla Structures creates the plot files, if the file name field is empty in the Print Drawings dialog box.

Overrides the folder defined in the printer catalog.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME Category

Printing

Use to define print filenames for drawings, if the filename is missing from the Print Drawings dialog box.

www.cadfamily.com




331

Example XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME = %%NAME.%% %%TITLE%%%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? %%%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%%%%DRAWING_REVISION? Rev%%%%DRAWING_REVISION%%.dxf

For available switches, see the table in Switches for naming plotfiles. To define different filenames for different types of drawings, use the following variables: XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A (p. 332) XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W (p. 332) XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G (p. 332) XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M (p. 332) XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C (p. 332)

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A See XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W See XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G See XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M See XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C See XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE Category

Drawing properties

Use to scale the points Tekla Structures uses to create reference lines. Enter the scale as a decimal. XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE=0.5

XS_DRAWING_SCALE_SEPARATOR_CHAR Category

Drawing properties

Defines the separator character in drawing scales.

332





XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT Category

Drawing view

See XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X.

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X Category

Drawing view

Use to define the initial position of the drawing sheet. This is useful when using a dual display. You can set this in the following ways: XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X=50 XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y=50 XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT=600 XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH=900

X and Y are the coordinates of the upper left corner of the drawing view, measured from the upper left corner of the MDI client window (the dark gray area in the Tekla Structures window).

XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y Category

Drawing view


XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH Category

Drawing view


XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA Category

Hatching

Use to determine the name of the schema file used for single part drawings. Example

To use the default schema file, enter single.htc in the Value field.

XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY You define the location of the drawing template library by setting this variable to point to the model folder that contains the template drawings. Example

set XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\CloningTemplate

(where CloningTemplate is the model name). See also

Drawing > Clone drawing....

XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES Category

www.cadfamily.com

Drawing Properties




333

Use to modify the user-defined attributes of all selected drawings in the drawing list at the same time, even if the drawings are of different types. The variable is set to TRUE by default. To allow the modification of user-defined attributes for all drawings types at the same time, set the variable to TRUE. To allow the modification of user-defined attributes only for one drawing type at a time, set the variable to FALSE.

XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING Category

Drawing Properties

Use to control how the view placing works. If the views do not fit on the screen after scaling, Tekla Structures increases the sheet size using the layout properties if autosizing is enabled (Layout > Drawing size > Size definition mode > Autosize). Use this variable together with XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED (p. 350).

Value

Description

TRUE

Updates the view placing. Does not affect the scale or the sheet size. This is the default value.

TRUE, SCALE

Updates the view placing and scales the view if the view does not fit on the sheet. Tekla Structures scales the views smaller using the scales in layout properties.

TRUE, SHEET

Updates the view and increases the sheet size if the view does not fit on the sheet.

TRUE, SHEET, SCALE

Updates the view, scales the view and increases the sheet size, if necessary.

FALSE

Does not update the view placing or change the view scale or sheet size.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT Category

Drawing properties

Use the following variables to define the arrow symbol used in section and end view direction marks, for each basic view type (front, top, back, bottom):

• •

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT

•

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK

•

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP

By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 66 in the xsteel.sym file (located usually in the folder \environments\country-independent\symbols\). See also

Section view properties

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP Category

334

Drawing properties





See XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT.

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK Category

Drawing properties


XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM Category

Drawing properties


XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING Category


Use to display the interior angle instead of the exterior angle in angle text. See also Unfolding dimensions.

XS_DRAW_LONG_HOLE_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: bolts

Set to 1 to dimension slotted holes to the center points of the curve. By default slotted holes are dimensioned to the center points of the holes.

XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS Category

Marking: parts

Set to TRUE to always draw leader lines in part marks.

XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use to display skewed elevation dimensions. See also Elevation dimensions. By default this variable is disabled (skewed elevation dimensions are not displayed in drawings).

XS_DRIVER Category

File locations

See plotdev.bin (p. 57).

XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PLATES Category

CNC

Set to TRUE to create AK blocks in DSTV files also for rectangular plates.

www.cadfamily.com




335

XS_DSTV_LIST_SEPARATOR Use to define the separator used in DSTV lists. By default the separator is the # character.

XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH Category

CNC

Use to make cuts affect the part length in the NC file header. Otherwise only fittings affect the length. See Fittings affect NC data. For advanced users

The AK block of the NC file always contains the correct net length. Using this variable writes the net length, instead of the length, to the header block. Some NC machines take the length information either from the header or AK-block. Check with the workshop if you are uncertain which method to use.

Using this variable may damage cutting machines if the part contains cuts and fittings and the longest length is not at the edge of the part (machine tries to start cutting in the middle of the part):

See also

XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH

XS_DSTV_NO_SAWING_ANGLES_FOR_PLATES_NEEDED Category

CNC

Set to TRUE to have no sawing angles written to the DSTV file header for plates.

XS_DSTV_NUMBER_OF_PARTS_BY_SELECTION Category

CNC

Use to define the number of parts in the header of an NC file by the parts that have been selected in the model. When you have set the variable to TRUE, and selected the Create for selected parts option in the NC Files dialog box, the number of parts in the header of the NC file matches the number of selected parts.

XS_DSTV_PLATE_PROFILE_WITH_WIDTH Category

CNC

Set to TRUE to have both the plate thickness and the plate profile width written in the DSTV file header and to FALSE to have only the plate thickness written in the DSTV file header.

XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH Category

336

CNC





Use to insert two length values in NC DSTV files:

• •

Gross length Net length

Gross length Net length

Net and gross length may switch places in the NC file if the variable XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO is set. Then Tekla Structures may use the length value it finds in the fltprops.inp file instead.

See also

XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH

XS_DSTV_USE_ONE_VERTEX_SHARP_INNER_CORNER Category

CNC

Enter TRUE in the Value field if it is not required for the DSTV NC file to show rectangular (90 degrees) notches without chamfer correctly.

XS_DSTV_WRITE_BEHIND_FACE_FOR_PLATE Category

CNC

Writes (AK + IK) contours for front (v) and back (h) faces of plates in NC DSTV files. Without this variable Tekla Structures only writes the front face for plate profiles.

XS_DUPLICATE_CHECK_LIMIT_FOR_COPY_AND_MOVE Category

Modeling Properties

Use to define the maximum number of objects that are checked for duplicates while copying or moving objects. If the selection contains too many objects, Tekla Structures does not check for duplicates. The default value is 100. See also

www.cadfamily.com

Copying and moving objects




337

XS_DWG_IMPORT_IGNORE_UNITS If a DWG reference file is created with imperial settings, it will import to Tekla Structures in too large scale. To prevent this, set this variable to TRUE.

XS_DXF_FONT_NAME Category

Printing

Use to specify a font other than the default for 2D-DXF.

XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR Category

Printing

Use to set a scale factor for 2D-DXF text height. Enter the factor as a decimal.

XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR Category

Printing

Use to set the scale factor for 2D-DXF text width. Enter the factor as a decimal. Example

XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR=1.0

DXK_FONTPATH Use to point to the folder containing Tekla Structures graphic fonts. The Template editor, for example, uses graphic fonts. Always end the path with the backslash character. Example

DXK_FONTPATH=C:\TeklaStructures\

DXK_SYMBOLPATH Use to point to the folder containing Tekla Structures symbol libraries. Always end the path with the backslash character. Example

DXK_SYMBOLPATH=C:\TeklaStructures\

8.6 E EDM_LIC13_3_5 Use to define the password for the toolkit used by the CIMsteel export/import option. You also need a Tekla Structures license file that includes the CIMsteel option. Set this variable in the Windows Control Panel using Settings > Control panel > System > Advanced > Environment variables.

Always use the value:

338





/suHFt0NTYA.i-W-3n1yiW(y_N__(JTk,8TKDWN3xz9,cozrGY&0'x9P'da

We recommend that you use cut and paste to enter this value. Do not set this environment variable in the initialization file.

XS_ENABLE_INNER_CONTOURS_IN_CUT_PARTS Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures create a part cut according to the inner and outer surfaces of the cutting part. When the variable is not set, Tekla Structures creates the cut according to the outer surface of the cutting part. Example

Here a beam has been cut with a round tube.

Variable set to TRUE Variable not set

XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL Use to set the middle mouse button to zoom the model window to its original size. Example

XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL=TRUE

XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION Category

Concrete Detailing

Use to select an optimal place for the base point of the reinforcing bar mark leader line . If set to TRUE, Tekla Structures selects an optimal place for the base point. The base point only points to one reinforcing bar.

XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT Category

Dimensioning: parts

Shape dimensions are automatically shown on both ends of a beam, even if the dimensions are the same. Enter a value for this variable to change this.

www.cadfamily.com




339

Example

If you set this variable to 300, and a part is 300 mm shorter in one direction, Tekla Structures only displays the dimension in the longer direction. Use millimeters in all environments.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE Category

Export

Use to set the coordinate scale to use in DGN exports. The default is 100.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME Category

Export

Use to indicate the output file name in DGN exports. The default is model.dgn.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS Category

Export

Use to define which cuts to include in DGN exports. You can use the following switches:

Switch

Use to

FALSE

Exclude all cuts.

TRUE

Include all cuts (default value).

CLASH

Include all cuts but skip hole cuts’ ends.

CLASH_NORMA L_PLATES

The same as TRUE for contour plates and CLASH for all other parts.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR Category

Export

Use to include or exclude inner contours in DGN exports. The options are:

• •

TRUE to include inner contours (default) FALSE to exclude inner contours

XS_EXPORT_DGN_ROUND_SEGMENTS Use to define the number of segments Tekla Structures uses to display round tubes. Tekla Structures uses this value for large tubes (greater than 100 mm) and 80% of this value for small tubes. The default value is 40.

XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_CLASS_AS_COLOR Set the color for exported parts by the part class (like Color by class in the modeling editor).

XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_VOLUMETRIC Category

340

Export





Set to TRUE to set all plates type to 92 in DGN exports.

XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include primary part ID’s in MIS export files. ID’s appear on separate rows in the file. Example

set XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS=TRUE

XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH Points to the location of the Excel spreadsheet used in connection design. Set the variable in the user.ini file. For more information, see Using Excel in connection design.

8.7 F XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR Category

Modeling properties

Use to set the separator to use between filter strings (e.g. in the view filter). By default Tekla Structures uses a space. Example

To use a semi-colon as a separator, set this variable as follows: XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR=;

XS_FIRM Category

File locations

Set the variables XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM along with XS_SYSTEM to point to the folders Tekla Structures searches for properties files. Tekla Structures always saves properties in the current model folder. You can then copy or move them. See also Folder search order (p. 59).

XS_FLAT_PREFIX Category

Plate work

Use to set the flat bar prefix for output, reports, and marks. If Tekla Structures finds a matching flat bar in the fltprops.inp file, the plate name will consist of the prefix you enter here, followed by the thickness X width (e.g. FLAT5X100). By default PL and PLT profiles get the prefix FL or FLT if a matching plate is found in the fltprops.inp.

www.cadfamily.com




341

In Imperial version, if XS_FLAT_PREFIX is not included in profitab.inp as similar profile as PL (valid parametric profile name), the profile is shown with metric units.

XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE Category

Plate work

Use to set the checking tolerance for flat bars. Tekla Structures uses this value to check plate thickness to determine whether to convert it to a flat bar. The default value is 0.1 mm.

XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE Category

Plate work

Tekla Structures uses this value to check plate width to determine whether to convert it to a flat bar. The default value is 0.1 mm ( XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE=0.1).

XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR Use to control the total height of fractions. Example

set XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR=1.5

XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the far side postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for identical parts on far side. See Merging part marks. Example

XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=FS

8.8 G XS_GA_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE Category

Drawing properties

Use to define a title for a general arrangement drawing view in a multi-drawing.

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING Category

Marking: bolts

Use to display the gage of outstanding leg (GOL) information in bolt marks. If there is no %%VALUE%% in the string then Tekla Structures adds the GOL value to the end of the string.

342





If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures only uses %%VALUE%%. If Tekla Structures cannot calculate the value then nothing is added to the mark. Example

Here, the value for the gage of outstanding leg is 5½.

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_S TRING

GOL in bolt mark

%%VALUE%% GOL

5½ GOL

GOSL %%VALUE%%

GOSL 5½

GOL =

GOL = 5½ 5½

XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL Category

Marking: parts

By default, the symbol for hidden North marks in general arrangement drawings is number 32 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set the variable to a different symbol number.

XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE Category

Marking: parts

By default, Tekla Structures draws North marks in general arrangement drawings using a scale of 1:1. Use this variable to specify a different scale. You could also create a larger symbol for North marks in the Symbol Editor.

XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL Category

Marking: parts

By default, the symbol for hidden North marks in general arrangement drawings is number 32 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set the variable to a different symbol number.

XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE Category

Marking: bolts

Use to omit marks for specific diameter types in general arrangement drawings. The options are HOLE or BOLT.

XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH Category


Set to add a dimension line spanning the entire grid next to existing grid dimensions.

XS_GRID_COLOR Category

Model View

Use to change the grid color in the Model Editor. Define the color of the grid using RGB values:

www.cadfamily.com




343

XS_GRID_COLOR= .

Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect. Example

See also

RGB value

Color

1.0 1.0 1.0

White

1.0 0.0 0.0

Red

0.0 1.0 0.0

Green

0.0 0.0 1.0

Blue

1.0 1.0 0.0

Yellow

Changing grid color

XS_GRID_PLANES_VISIBLE_WITH_USERPLANES Category

Model View

Use to show or hide the grid planes in rendered views. Set to TRUE to show the grid planes. Set to FALSE to hide the grid planes. Reopen the view for the change to take effect.

The grid planes can be shown only if the construction planes are visible. To display the construction planes, select the Construction planes check box in the Display dialog box.

XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT Use to set the font for grid text. If you do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the default font.

8.9 H XS_HANDLE_SCALE Category

Model view

Use to modify the handle size in rendered model views:

• •

The default value is 1.0.

•

Value smaller than 1.0 decreases the handle size.

Value larger than 1.0 enlarges the handles.

Close the rendered view and reopen it to view the modified handle size.

344





XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK Category

CNC

Set to TRUE to have the hard stamps correspond to the orientation marks in drawings.

When you have set this variable to TRUE, you can affect the hard stamp location also by using the variables XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS (p. 366) and XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS (p. 367).

XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE Category

Hatching

Tekla Structures includes a hatch buffer to speed up opening drawings containing hatch. This variable defines the size of the buffer. The default value is 100000. If you use extremely complicated hatches you may get better performance with a larger value. For small hatches, use a smaller value.

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R Category

Hatching

Use to define a hatch color that is not converted to black when printed. This color will be printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings. The hatch color is defined using RGB (Red Green Blue) values on a scale of 0 to 255. Define the color using the following variables: set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R to 214 set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G to 214 set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B to 214 The default value is black (0,0,0). The smaller the values, the darker the shade. See also

Hatching in section views and Special color.

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G Category

Hatching

See XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R

XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B Category

Hatching

See XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R

www.cadfamily.com




345

XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE Defines the distance within which Tekla Structures treats part lines inside cast units as overlapping lines. The default value is 0.01.

XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL Category

Marking: parts

By default the hidden North mark symbol is number 32 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set the variable XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL to a different symbol number.

XS_HIDDEN_REMOVE_DOUBLE_LINES To have Tekla Structures draw double lines when displaying models with Exact representation and creating drawings and 2D DXF files, set this variable to FALSE. By default Tekla Structures does not draw double lines, to minimize file size.

XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to hide lines behind a bolt nut (with Exact part representation).

XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES Category


Use to define whether changed dimension text and moved dimension points are highlighted in associative drawings. When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures highlights the changed dimension text and the moved dimension points in updated associative drawings. Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following ways:

•

A change symbol (by default a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the new point and the dimension values.

•

An arrow is drawn from the old point to the new point.

To change the appearance of the change symbol, use the following variables:

• •

XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL (p. 300) XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE (p. 299)

To remove the change symbols, go to Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Change Symbol. Select Single or All, depending on how many symbols you want to remove. See also

XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES (p. 346)

XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES Category

Marking: General

Use to define whether changed mark contents are highlighted in associative drawings.

346





When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures highlights the mark contents that have been changed in updated associative drawings. Tekla Structures highlights the changes by drawing a change symbol (by default a cloud) around the changed mark content. To change the appearance of the change symbol, use the following variables:

• •

XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL (p. 300) XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE (p. 299)

To remove the mark change symbols, go to Annotating > Review Marks > Remove Mark Change Symbol. Select Single or All, depending on how many symbols you want to remove. XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (p. 346)

See also

XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks. The variables XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting. See also Size element in bolt marks.

XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks in general arrangement drawings. If you have not set the variables XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386) or XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391), then this variable is used. Size element in bolt marks

See also

8.10 I XS_IGNORE_SUBASSEMBLY_HIERARCHY_IN_DIMENSIONING Category

Dimensioning: Parts

Use to defined whether sub-assembly parts are dimensioned as secondary parts of the main assembly. When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures ignores sub-assemblies, and parts inside the sub-assemblies are dimensioned as if they were parts in the main assembly.

XS_IMPERIAL Category

Imperial units

Set to have output in imperial units only. This affects only the following elements of bolt marks:

www.cadfamily.com




347

• •

Gage of outstanding leg (GOL) Center-to-center distance

XS_IMPERIAL_BOLT_MARK Category

Imperial units

Set to 1 to show bolt diameter and length in imperial units in bolt marks. Use when you need to use imperial bolts and metric units. This affects only the following elements of bolt marks:

• •

Bolt diameter Bolt length

XS_IMPERIAL_DATE Category

Imperial units

Set to TRUE to use the date format mm/dd/yyyy. Set to FALSE to use the date format dd.mm.yyyy.

XS_IMPERIAL_HOLE_MARK Category

Imperial units

Set to 1 to show hole diameter in imperial units in bolt marks. Use when you need to use imperial bolts and metric units. This affects only the following elements of bolt marks:

• •

Slotted hole X dimension

•

Slotted hole max dimension

•

Slotted hole min dimension

Slotted hole Y dimension

XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT Category

Imperial units

Set to allow input in imperial units only.

XS_IMPERIAL_TIME Category

Imperial units

Set to TRUE to use the time format hh:mm:ss am/pm. Set to FALSE to use the time format hh:mm:ss.

XS_IMPERIAL_TRIANGLES Category

348

Imperial units





Set to 1 to also show triangle ratios in inches.

XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG Category

Import

Set to TRUE to create create a log every time you use an import model. Set to APPEND to append a log entry to the previous log.

XS_INCH_SIGN_ALWAYS Category

Imperial units

By default, Tekla Structures does not put an inch symbol (") in dimensions which contain only inches. Set this variable to show inch symbols in all dimensions.

XS_INP Points to the folder containing the objects.inp. The default location is \XSDATADIR%\environments\country-independent\inp\.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS Category

Drawing properties

Enter TRUE in the Value field to prevent drawing views from being deleted when associated objects are removed from the model. FALSE is the default. For general arrangement drawings use the variable XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA. TRUE is the default.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA Category

Drawing properties

See XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PART_COUNT Category

Drawing Properties

Enter an integer to define how many parts are taken into account when searching for associated objects. The variable is set to 10 by default.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PLANE_COUNT Category

Drawing Properties

Enter an integer to define how many planes are taken into account when searching for associated objects. The variable is set to 1000 by default.

www.cadfamily.com




349

XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED Category

Drawing properties

Clear the value field or set it to FALSE to prevent Tekla Structures from automatically moving dimensions, marks, etc. according to model changes.

This setting affects all drawings. To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating general arrangement drawings, use the variable XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA (p. 350).

To control how the drawing view placing works when the model changes, set this variable to TRUE and use it together with the variable XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING.

XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA Category

Drawing properties

Clear the value field or set it to FALSE to prevent Tekla Structures from automatically moving dimensions, marks, etc. according to model changes.

This setting affects only general arrangement drawings. To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating all types of drawings, use the variable XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED (p. 350).

XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to automatically update the following drawing and model objects in cloned drawings, if the original drawing is associative:

• •

Dimensions

•

Drawing welds (welds that you have included in the drawing)

•

Modeling welds (weld symbols that have been automatically created in the drawing)

•

Text

•

Associative notes

•

Graphical objects

Marks

This variable also:

• •

350

Retains single part views included in the drawing Enables modeling welds in the cloned drawing.





This feature is at pre-release stage so it may not function correctly.

See also

Drawing> Clone drawing Drawing objects associated with model objects XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED

XS_INTELLIGENT_MESSAGES_ALLOWED Category

Drawing properties

Use to display message when a drawing is opened if a model object to which one or more drawing objects are linked is deleted in the model. To display the message, enter any value in the Value field. To not display the message, enter FALSE or 0.

XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER Category

Dimensioning: parts

Set to NONE to prevent Tekla Structures using the center line of I profiles to dimension front views.

8.11 J XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT Category

Marking: general

The connection numbers are visible in drawings, when you set the Connection mark field to Number in the Connection mark properties dialog box. Use this variable to define the connection number format. For example, you can use it to define prefix text. Example

In XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT=J%%3.3d: J is the prefix and the rest of the string defines the number format:

• •

The first number defines the minimum field width.

•

% and d (integer value) indicate the format.

The second number defines the minimum quantity of numbers to display.

XS_JOINTS_USE_NOTCH1 Category

Components

Set to 1 to have connections use standard notch routines. Set to 0 to have connections use simple notch routines.

www.cadfamily.com




351

8.12 K XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING Category

Modeling properties

By default Tekla Structures deletes autosave files when you close a model, to save disk space. Set this variable to prevent Tekla Structures deleting these files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model.

XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX Category

Modeling properties

Defines the character used in absolute snapping. Enter any allowed ASCII character. If you have set Tekla Structures to use absolute snapping by default, using the variable XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE) , you do not need to use a snap character for absolute snapping. Example

XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX=$

See also

XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX

XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE Category

Modeling properties

Defines t he snapping mode Tekla Structures uses by default. Set to RELATIVE or ABSOLUTE. See also

XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX

XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX Category

Modeling properties

Defines the character used in relative snapping. Enter any allowed ASCII character. If you have set Tekla Structures to use relative snapping by default, using the variable XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE), you do not need to use a snap character for relative snapping. Example

XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX=@

See also

XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX

352





8.13 L LEGEND_MODEL_PATH Category


Points to the location of the legend_text.fields file, which contains all the available template table fields. The file legend_text.fields is only used with Template Editor version 2.2.

XS_LINE_WIDTH Category

Model view

Use to change the width of lines in rendered views. Enter the value in pixels.

XS_LOG_FILE_NAME Use to define the name of the log file. The default is TeklaStructures.log.

XS_LOGPATH Points to the folder containing the Tekla Structures log file.

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks. The variables XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting. For switches you can use for defining the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks in general arrangement drawings. If you have not set the variables XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386) or XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 392), then this variable is used. See also

www.cadfamily.com

Size element in bolt marks




353

8.14 M XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY Use to specify an alternative folder for recorded macro files. Macro files are usually language and environment dependent and will not run in any other environment or language. By default, this variable is defined in the local environment initialization files. For example in the usimp environment, this variable points to the ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\usimp\macros folder. To define your own macro folder, set this variable in the user.ini file.

The macro folder must contain subfolders modeling and drawings.

See also

Recording and running macros

XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP Category

Modeling properties

Set to TRUE when you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros. The timestamps are in the .cs file of the macro in question, which is located in ../ environments/country-independent/macros folder. The macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders, depending on in which mode the macro was recorded.

See also

Recording and running macros

XS_MACRO_REFERENCES Category

Modeling properties

Use to define a path to an additional library, which is used when a macro is compiled.

XS_MACRO_LOG By default Tekla Structures macro output is displayed in the terminal window. Set this variable to a file name to save this output to a file.

354





XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET Category

Components

Use to adjust the magnetic distance of magnetic planes. By default the distance is 0.05 mm. For more information on magnetic planes, see User-defined planes.

XS_MARK_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY No help available.

XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR Category

Marking: general

By default Tekla Structures leaves a space 0.4*text height between mark elements. Use this variable to change the default value.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_HEIGHT Category

Marking: general

Height of arrow head in mark leader line.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH Category

Marking: general

Length of arrow head in mark leader line.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH Category

Marking: General

Use to define the length of the leader line extension. Give the lenght in millimeters. The default value is 0.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME Category

Marking: General

Use to define the leader line position for a leader line with no frame. The default value is 0.

www.cadfamily.com




355

Example

Position

See also

Appearance

Set the variable to

Nearest corner.

0

In the middle of the text area.

1

1/3 from the top of the text area.

2

In the middle of the first row of text.

3

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME (p. 356)

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME Category

Marking: General

Use to define the leader line position for a leader line with a rectangular frame. The default value is 0.

356





Example

Position

See also

Appearance

Set the variable to

Nearest corner.

0

In the middle of the text area.

1

1/3 from the top of the text area.

2

In the middle of the firs row of text.

3

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME (p. 355)

XS_MARK_LINE_SPACE_FACTOR Category

Marking: general

By default Tekla Structures leaves a space 0.3*text height in multi-line marks (e.g. part, bolt, and connection marks). Use this variable to change the default value.

XS_MARK_TEXT_FRAME_BOX_HEIGHT_FACTOR Category

Marking: General

Use to define how close text is to underlining. The default value is 0.5.

XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE Category

www.cadfamily.com

Drawing properties




357

Enter the folder path and filename of the file containing the user-defined material symbols.

XS_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_SKEWED_END_PLATE_AND_BEAM_END Category

Drawing properties

Use to produce section views and dimensions of slightly skewed end plates. An end plate can be sloping or skewed to such a small degree that it is unnecessary to bevel cut the end of the main part. If the end plate is not dimensioned in the section view, you need to set a limit for the end plate angle.

Limit angle Tekla Structures dimensions any end plate skewed less than this value in section views. Larger angle dimensions do not appear in the section view. Set the angle between the skewed end plate and beam in degrees. The default angle is 0.

XS_MAX_ANGLE_TOLERANCE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_MAIN_PARTS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use to define the maximum angle range (0...1) within which Tekla Structures will dimension non-parallel parts as one.

XS_MAX_AUTOMATIC_RADIUS_DIMENSION Category

Dimensioning: parts

Defines the maximum radius when you use automatic radius in single part drawings. The default value is 5000. Tekla Structures will display radii smaller than the value you enter in drawings.

XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME Category

Profiles

Use to control the number of decimals in profile names. The default value is 1.

358





XS_MAX_FRACTIONS_IN_MODEL_DIMENSION Defines dimensioning accuracy in models in the US Imperial enviroment.

XS_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_PLANES_TO_NAME Category

Modeling Properties

Use to define how many planes Tekla Structures names when the planes are used, for example, in defining distance variables. The default value is 400. When the maximum number of planes is reached, Tekla Structures stops naming the planes and uses the name Undefined plane for the rest of the planes.

XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL Category

Marking: parts

Defines the maximum horizontal distance within which identical reinforcement get merged marks. The default value is 600 mm. See also XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL.

XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL Category

Marking: parts

Defines the maximum vertical distance within which identical reinforcement get merged marks. The default value is 600 mm. See also XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL.

XS_MAX_SPACE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_ASSEMBLY_PARALLEL_PARTS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use to define the maximum distance allowed between parallel parts for Tekla Structures to dimension them as one.

XS_MESSAGES Use to define the location of the message files. All message files have the file extension ail. See also

Messages (p. 89)

XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT Category

Model view

Set to only allow connection or part basic view windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures window. Disable to allow connection or part basic view windows to be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop. See also XS_MDIVIEWPARENT.

www.cadfamily.com




359

XS_MDIVIEWPARENT Category

Model view

Set to only allow view windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures window. Disable to allow view windows to be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop. This gives you more workspace on the screen, because view windows move to the front when you click on them and open dialog boxes remain behind the views. It also allows you to enlarge Tekla Structures windows to fill the entire desktop. This variable also affects drawing windows. Use the following variables to control connection and part basic views and zoom views XS_MDIZOOMPARENT and XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT.

XS_MDIZOOMPARENT Category

Model view

Set to only allow zoom windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures window. Disable to allow zoom windows of views to be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop. This is useful when you want to examine a view using the magnifier tool, because you can click on a view to bring it to the front of the desktop. They can also be enlarged to fill the entire desktop.

XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the minimum number of identical parts whose marks to merge. See also Merging part marks. Example

set XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT=2

XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS Category

Numbering

Use to set the minimum number of characters in assembly multinumbers. Example

If you set this variable 3, the multinumber format is 101AAA.

XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS Category

Numbering

Use to define the minimum number of characters in part multinumbers. Example

If you set this variable to 3, the multinumber format is 101AAA.

XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY Category

CNC

Points to the folder where NC and MIS files are created. The default is the current model folder.

360





You can also enter folder as a relative path to the current model folder using the ".\ " characters in the Value field. If you set XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY=.\NC, Tekla Structures creates NC and MIS files in NC folder under the current model folder. Example

XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY=c:\TeklaStructures\mis-files

XS_MIS_SEQUENCE Category

Export

Use to enable sequences in EJE and KISS file type MIS exports. Define which part property is used as the sequence information in the variable. The options are:

• •

XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=CLASS

•

XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=PHASE_NAME

•

XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=UDA:USER_PHASE

XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=PHASE_NUMBER

The limit for the sequence information field lengths are 10 and 4 characters in KISS and EJE file types, respectively. Do not use long names for phase names or user phases, if you are using this information as MIS Sequence.

XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR Category

Numbering

Use to define whether part and assembly number prefixes affect the numbering of parts and assemblies in multi-drawings. The options are NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.

XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY Category

File Locations

Use to define where Tekla Structures saves model templates. Only the templates saved in this folder are listed in the Model template list box in the New dialog box. The variable is set to C:\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\\model_t emplates by default.

XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to remove unnecessary space between the drawing view label and the drawing view in multi-drawings.

XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_PLACING_TRIAL_NUMBER Category

www.cadfamily.com

This variable is available only in initialization files.




361

Use to define the number of attempts to place the drawing views into a multi-drawing. Enter an integer between 1 and 500. The variable is set to 500 by default.

XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE Category

Drawing properties

Use to define a title for a multi-drawing view in a multi-drawing. Arbitrary strings and switches (BASE_NAME and NAME) can be used for defining the title. By default the title is defined as follows: Drawing %%BASE_NAME%%

XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the separator in merged part marks. See Merging part marks. Example

XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=x

8.15 N XS_NC_DISABLE_PIECE_IDENTIFICATION_FIX Category

CNC

When set to TRUE (default), disables the fix that was made in Tekla Structures 11.0 to DSTV format. The fix switched the places of phase and drawing identification in the DSTV file header to follow the DSTV standard better than before. Because of this change, dstv2dxf converter did not add correct texts to DXF files, and some CNC controller software will interprete the DSTV files incorrectly. To enable the fix and create similar DSTV files as Tekla Structures 11.0, set this variable to FALSE.

XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT Category

Drawing properties

Tekla Structures considers neighboring parts as skewed if the product of the vector multiplication (part axis) (any of the coordinate axis) is less than 1XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT. The limit has to be given as a floating value.

XSNEST Use to indicate the folder containing the Tekla Structures Plate Nesting program. Example

362

XSNEST=C:\PlateNesting





XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS Category

Model view

Set to any value to prevent Tekla Structures displaying views automatically when you start the program. Example

XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS=1

By default views are displayed.

XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: bolts

To create angle dimensions for bolts, clear the Value field. To not create angle dimensions for bolts, enter any value.

XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE Category

Model view

Set to any value to prevent Tekla Structures creating chamfers when in exact mode. Example

XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE=1

By default chamfers are created.

XS_NO_CSK_MARK Category

Marking: bolts

Set to any value to omit the countersunk mark at the end of a bolt mark. Example

XS_NO_CSK_MARK=1

XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS Category

Single part view in assembly drawing

Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from creating end views when you create an assembly drawing and choose to include single-part drawings. If this variable is disabled, Tekla Structures creates end views based on the properties of the single-part drawings.

XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Set to force shape dimensions to be the same as the dimension type you select. Example

XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS=TRUE

By default, shape dimensions are always relative, no matter which dimension type you select.

XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR Category

www.cadfamily.com





363

Set as follows to prevent Tekla Structures producing single part drawings for assemblies containing one part: XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR=LOOSE_PARTS

XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE Category

Marking: parts

Use this variable to define the scale of the north mark symbol. By default, North marks have a scale of 1:1. You can also create a larger symbol for north marks in the Symbol editor.

XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL Category

Marking: parts

By default the north mark symbol is number 32 in the symbol file. Use this variable to change the symbol. For information on working with different symbol files, see Working with symbol files.

XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for identical parts on both side of a main part. See Merging part marks. Example

XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=BS

XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Defines which element the NSFS (or BS) text follows in merged part marks. Example

XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK=22

The number defines the element type in the mark content that precedes the NSFS text. 22 means after assembly position. The default is 23, which means that the text is located after part position. If the type that is defined by the variable cannot be found in the mark at all, the text is located at end of the mark. To force the text to always appear at the end of the mark, use -1.

XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the near side postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for identical parts on near side. See Merging part marks. Example

set XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=NS

XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME Category

Numbering

Use to set the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save when numbering, when you have selected the Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) option in the Numbering setup dialog box.

364





Enter the desired time in seconds. The variable is set to 1500 by default. See also

Numbering setup

8.16 O XS_OBJECT_SELECTION_CONFIRMATION Category

Modeling Properties

Use to change the time after which Tekla Structures prompts you to cancel object selection. You can cancel the object selection process if the selection takes over a defined period of time. The time is defined in milliseconds. The default value is 5000. See also

Canceling object selection

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS Category

Marking: parts

Set to TRUE to hide part marks of parts hidden by other parts from views in general arrangement drawings. Example

If you have stiffeners either side of a beam, one will be hidden by the beam in front of it. Set this variable to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures displaying the part mark of the hidden part.

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_PARTS_OUT_OF_VIEW_PLANE_LIMIT_ANGLE Use to hide the part marks for parts outside the current view plane by defining the limit for inclusion as an angle. You also need to set Parts out of view plane field in the View part mark properties to Not visible to hide parts from the view that are outside the angle you specify here. The default value is 20.0.

XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE Category

Marking: bolts

Set to a value to filter that type of bolt marks when the Bolt size limit field is used in drawing properties. The options are:

Example

• •

SITE

•

SITE_AND_SHOP (default).

SHOP

If you set this variable as XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE=SITE, Tekla Structures filters out only site bolt marks that are outside the bolt size limit and workshop bolt marks of all sizes are shown in drawings.

XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE Category

www.cadfamily.com

Marking: bolts




365

Use to define which bolt types to omit from drawings.

XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE Category

Marking: bolts

Use to define which diameter marks to omit in drawings. The options are HOLE or BOLT.

XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION Category

Components

Use to exclude specific part types when you use AutoConnection. Example

Use the variable to filter out brace parts when using AutoConnection. AutoConnection cannot handle brace connections when large quantities of parts are selected. There are two ways of doing this:

•

Set this variable to XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION=brace. Tekla Structures does not select any parts with names containing the string “brace”.

Or

•

Set the Selection Filter to select all parts except for those named “brace*”.

XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE Category

Welds

Use to define which weld types to omit in drawings.

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the direction of orientation marks. The options are NORTH-EAST, NORTH-WEST, SOUTH-EAST and SOUTH-WEST. For more information, see Orientation marks.

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS Category

Marking: parts

Use to indicate the position of orientation marks for beams. Enter a value indicating the distance from the end of the part to the orientation mark. The default value is 300.0 mm. You can enter any value in the range 1.0 to 3000.0. For more information, see Orientation marks.

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS_IN_GA Category

Marking: parts

Indicates the position of beam orientation marks in GA drawings. For more information, see XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS.

366





XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the placing of orientation marks for columns. The value assigned to this variable is the distance from the end of the part to the orientation mark. The default value for columns is 600.0 mm. Possible values range from 1.0 to 3000.0. For more information, see Orientation marks.

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS_IN_GA Category

Marking: parts

Defines the position of column orientation marks in GA drawings. For more information, see XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS.

8.17 P XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR Category

Profiles

Use to define an additional character to separate dimensions in the name of parametric profiles. Tekla Structures always recognizes the standard separator characters X, *, -, and /.

Only one character is accepted as a value for this variable. You can not use slash (/) in the US imperial environment.

Example

XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR=E

Accepted profile names with this setting are: 1. 2.

PL500*800 PL500X800

3.

PL500E800

Any combination of these is also accepted: ProfileName500*500-500*500E500 (the profile ProfileName should be defined). See also

XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS

XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use to indicate the path to the user-defined part dimension planes table. This table defines the planes in which planes dimensions are created (for example, you might want Tekla Structures to dimension round bars to the middle of the profile rather than the reference line). Example

XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%\dim_planes_table.txt For more information, see Dimension planes.

www.cadfamily.com




367

XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE Category

Marking: parts

Use to define the maximum distance within which identical parts get merged marks. Units are in millimeters. See also Merging part marks. Example

XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE=1200

XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING Category

Numbering

Use to define multinumbers for single parts. Use the following switches to define the contents of part marks. Use as many switches as you need, and enclose each one in double percent symbols (%%). The available switches are:

Switch

Description

PART_MULTI_DRAWING _NUMBER

Multidrawing name.

PART_MULTI_DRAWING _POS

Position of the single-part drawing inside the multidrawing.

PART_PREFIX

Part prefix in the model.

PART_POS

Part position number in the model.

Template fields

Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant template field. Enclose each name in double percent symbols (%%). For example, %%UDA:PHASE%%

User-defined attributes

Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant user-defined attribute, exactly as it appears in the objects.inp file. For example, %%UDA:MY_INFO_1%%

Example

To put the part multinumbers in the format part prefix + position on multi drawing + multi drawing name, set the variable as follows: XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=%%PART_PREFIX%%%%PART_MULTI_DRAWING _POS%%%%PART_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%%

See also

XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR

XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING Category

Numbering

Use to have Tekla Structures use only letters in part numbers. The switches are:

368





Switch

Description

%%PART_PREFIX%%

Part prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.

%%PART_POS%%

Part position number, defined by the start number (from part properties dialog box) and the final position in that numbering series.

%%PART_POS_WITH_LETTERS%%

Same as above, but with letters. Uses letters A – Z by default, but you can also define valid letters with the variable XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_P OSITION_NUMBERS.

The position number/ letter switch can also include a suffix defining the minimum number of digits (or letters), for example: %%PART_POS.3%%. This example results in a first part number of 001, second 002 etc.

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR Category

Dimensioning: Parts

Use to dimension the position of parts to the edge that is nearest to the neighbor part. The default is FALSE.

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE Category

Dimensioning: parts

Forces Tekla Structures to dimension the position of beams to the leading edge. For this variable to take effect, disable the variable XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING. For column assemblies, you must also set the variable XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO.

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO To dimension part position to the leading edge for column assemblies, set XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO=true

You must also set the variable XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE.

XS_PEDDIMAT_FLANGE_CLEARANCE When a beam is notched in the workshop, there is a minimum distance from the flanges within which the web cannot be cut. The default is 10 mm. Use this variable to control the distance in Peddimat format. It only affects profile types I, C, and L. Example

www.cadfamily.com

set XS_PEDDIMAT_FLANGE_CLEARANCE=12




369

Using an incorrect value can cause problems in the workshop.

XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE Category

Model view

Use to define the snap zone of objects. Each object has a snap zone, which defines how close you need to pick to hit a position. When you pick within the snap zone of an object, Tekla Structures automatically snaps to the closest pickable point on that object. Enter the value in pixels. See also

Specifying points

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X Category

Printing

Offsets the print origin in the x direction. Use if a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location. Units are millimeters.

This variable affects all printers.

See also

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y Category

Printing

Offsets the print origin in the y direction. Use if a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location. Units are millimeters.

This variable affects all printers.

See also

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X

PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE Category

Export

Set this variable to any value to have Tekla Structures use assembly marks in PML exports. By default this variable is disabled and Tekla Structures uses part marks.

370





PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE Category

Export

Set this variable to prevent Tekla Structures from using cardinal points in PML exports. This means that all parts will be defined by their center lines and their position may differ from that in the Tekla Structures model. By default this variable is disabled.

XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID Category

Export

Use to revert to the FrameWorksPlus ID number in PML exports. See also XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER.

XS_PML_EXPORT_USE_ADDITIONAL_CUT_DIST Older versions of Tekla Structures added 1mm in length to fitted part ends in PML exports. Use this variable to force recent versions to also do this.

XS_POLYGON_CUT_EXTRA_THICKNESS Category

Modeling properties

Use to define the cut depth of a polygon cut, for example, to cut thick surface treatment. The default value for the cut thickness is 5.0 mm.

XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR Category

Plate work

Use to rotate plates with perpendicular sides in drawings. See also XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR.

XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR Category

Plate work

Use to rotate right-angled plates in drawings. The longest side of polygon plates always faces downwards in drawings, which can affect right-angled plates as illustrated below:

Use this variable to prevent this happening. When this value is set to a factor, Tekla Structures multiplies the length of the side next to the right angle by that factor, making it the longest side. Tekla Structures still uses and displays the real dimensions of the plate.

www.cadfamily.com




371

SQUARE CORNER (2.0)

PERPENDICULAR EDGE (1.5)

XS_POP_MARK_COLOR Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define the color of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a drawing. The default is 1. See also

XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL (p. 372) XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT (p. 372)

XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define the height of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a drawing. Enter the value in millimeters. The default is 2.0. See also

XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL (p. 372) XS_POP_MARK_COLOR (p. 372)

XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define the location of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a drawing. The default is xsteel@0. See also

XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT (p. 372) XS_POP_MARK_COLOR (p. 372)

XS_POSITION_DIMENSIONS_FOR_HOLES_IN_SINGLE_SECONDARY_PAR TS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING Category

Dimensioning: bolts

To create position dimensions for holes in single secondary parts in assembly drawing, enter any value. To not create position dimensions for holes, clear the Value field.

372





XS_PRIMARY_PART_FIRST Category


Set this variable to have Tekla Structures sort part and assembly part lists so that the main part of the assembly appears at the top of the list, immediately after the assembly.

XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define the borders that are left out from the smaller sheets when printing a drawing on multiple small sheets. For example, to leave a 3 mm horizontal and a 5 mm vertical border, set the variable to 3,5.

XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT Set to the name of a font to define the font for printed reports. Tekla Structures uses this variable if you do not specify a font for printed reports in the Print dialog box. If no font is given, Tekla Structures uses the default font. Example

set XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT=Courier New

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE Category


Use to specify the number of characters per row in reports printed in landscape orientation. See also

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT Category


Use to specify the number of characters per row in reports printed in portrait orientation. See also

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT

XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE Category


Use to specify the number of rows in printed reports with landscape orientation. See also

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT

www.cadfamily.com




373

XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT Category


Use to specify the number of rows in printed reports with portrait orientation. See also

XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE

XS_PROFDB Category

File locations

Use to point to the profile folder which Tekla Structures searches for profile, material, device, and bolt catalogs. You can store several catalogs in different locations, so it is important to know which catalog you are using. For more information, see Binary files (p. 55).

XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL Category

Analysis & Design

In the profile catalog you can enter analysis values for each profile. In the analysis, STAAD.Pro calculates the analysis values and compare them to the values in the profile catalog, and uses the values in the profile catalog, if they exist. To check the profile catalog for analysis values for all profiles, enter TRUE in the Value field for

• •

XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL and XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED

After that, run the analysis. If the profile catalog value differs significantly from the value STAAD.Pro calculates, Tekla Structures enters a warning in the analysis log file. Use the variable XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT to define the warning limit.

XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT Category

Analysis & Design

Sets the warning limit when checking profile catalog analysis values. For more information, see XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL.

XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_REPORTS Category

File locations

Use to define the location of the inch mark in profile lengths in reports. To display the inch mark after the fractions (for example, PL1"X18 1/2"), enter TRUE. To display the inch mark before the fractions (for example, PL1"X18"1/2), enter FALSE. By default, the inch mark is displayed after the fractions.

374





XS_PROJECT Category

File locations

Set the variables XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM, along with XS_SYSTEM, to point to the folders Tekla Structures searches for properties files. Tekla Structures always saves properties in the current model folder. You can then copy or move them. See also Folder search order (p. 59).

XS_PROTECT_SYMBOLS Category

Drawing properties

Set to prevent Tekla Structures drawing objects on top of symbols.

8.18 R XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING Category


Use to set prefix text for radii.

XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES Category


Set to TRUE to prevent the variable XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE affecting bolt length in bolt marks.

XSR_DIAMETER_USE_ONLY_INCHES Use to only output bolt diameter values in reports or drawing templates in inches. The result would be 0"3/4, not 0'-0"3/4.

XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE Category

Concrete detailing

Use to increase the size of the reinforcing bar bend symbols in drawings (in drawing units) in order to see them more clearly. See also

Reinforcement appearance

XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY Category

Concrete Detailing

Use to add closing dimensions to the edge of the part in reinforcing bar group dimensions. The default TRUE means that the closing dimensions are added.

www.cadfamily.com




375

XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE Category

Concrete detailing

Use to increase the size of the reinforcing bar end symbols in drawings (in drawing units) in order to see them more clearly. Works for 45 or 135 degree (see XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS) symbols. See also

Reinforcement appearance

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGT H Category

Concrete Detailing

Use to define the step length while searching for an optimal place for the mark leader line base point along the reinforcing bar. Enter the value in millimeters.

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE Category

Concrete Detailing

Use to define how far the other reinforcing bars must be from the base point so that Tekla Structures can place the base point. Enter the value in millimeters.

XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME Category

Concrete Detailing

Use to turn off the text frame around the angle text in pullout pictures. By default, this variable is set to TRUE.

XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION Category

Concrete Detailing

Set to FALSE to have Tekla Structures ignore hooks when it checks the shape of reinforcing bars, and to have Tekla Structures assign the same bending type to bars with and without hooks. Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures take the hooks into account and to treat bars with or without hooks, or with different hooks, as different. The default value is TRUE.

XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS Category

Concrete detailing

Use to reverse the reinforcing bar end symbols to a different direction. When this variable is se to TRUE, the end symbol is drawn at 135 degree angle (used commonly in Norway). See also

XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE

XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS Category

376

Drawning Properties





Use to define whether drawings are recreated when you update an assembly, single or cast-unit drawing that has not been modifed. Drawings are automatically recreated unless they have been edited and then saved, or they have been issued using the Issue functionality in the drawing list. To prevent the recreation of the unmodified drawings, set the variable FALSE. To allow the recreation of the unmodified drawings, set the variable to TRUE.

XS_REFERENCE_CACHE Category

File Locations

Use to define the default location of the cache file that is created from the source file when you load a reference model for the first time. The variable is set to C:\TeklaStructuresModels\\RefCacheFolders by default.

•

You may sometimes want to change the default location of the cache file when you are working with multi-user models to reduce network traffic and disk usage in the server or to speed up the cache operation (if the local drive is faster than the server drive).

•

When you are using different versions of Tekla Structures for different projects and you experience problems with reference models, empty the folder where the reference cache is created. The cache file is recreated the next time you open the reference model.

XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS Category

Import

Set to FALSE to view all reference model objects in gray.

XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_LINES Category

Import

Enter FALSE in the Value field to speed up the reading of reference .dgn files.

XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE Category

Drawing Properties

Use to choose the line type used to display the lines. See the following table for information on the different line types.

Set variable to


0

_____

1 2 3 4

www.cadfamily.com




377

Set variable to


5 6 7

XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF Category

Drawing Properties

Use to hide reference model lines if they are covered by the model itself. To hide covered reference lines, enter TRUE. To display covered lines, enter FALSE.

XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MOD ELS Category

Drawing Properties

Use to hide reference model lines if they are covered by other reference models. To hide covered reference model lines, enter TRUE. To display covered lines, enter FALSE.

XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES Category

Drawing Properties

Use to hide part lines if they are covered by reference models. To hide covered part lines, enter TRUE. To display covered part lines, enter FALSE.

XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS Category

Drawing Properties

Use to hide reference model lines if they are covered by model parts. To hide covered reference model lines, enter TRUE. To display covered lines, enter FALSE.

XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS Category

Import

Use to define the number of round segments to use in reference objects. The default is 16.

XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING Category

Import

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures show only the center line of reference objects outside the work area in rendered views.

XS_RENDERED_CURSOR_LINE_WIDTH Category

378

Model view





Use to set cursor line width in rendered views. Enter the cursor line width in the Value field.

• •

Possible values are 1, 2, or 4. Any other value is handled as 1. The default is 2.

Cursor line width of 1

Cursor line width of 4

XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE See XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE.

XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE In rendered views distant objects appear progressively darker than close ones. Use the following variables to control the shade of objects: set XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE=0.25 set XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE=0.50

Use values from 0 to 1 to control the shade of objects. The higher the value, the darker the distant objects.

Variables set to zero Variables disabled

www.cadfamily.com




379

XS_RENDERED_PIXEL_TOLERANCE_SCALE Tekla Structures uses pixel tolerance to differentiate between clicking and dragging the mouse when zooming. Use this variable to define the pixel tolerance. The default value is 0.7. If the mouse moves less than the value you specify with the mouse button depressed, it is treated as a click.

XS_REPORT_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY Category

File locations

Points to the folder where Tekla Structures saves reports. If the full path appears in the report file name field, Tekla Structures ignores this setting.

XS_ROTATE_CUT_VIEWS Category

Drawing view

Use to specify the rotation of section views. BY_MAIN_VIEW (default) uses the same rotation as the orientation as the main view.

BY_SYMBOL_MAIN_VIEW uses the orientation of the view that contains the section symbol. This

only applies to section views that Tekla Structures creates automatically. Manually-created views have the same rotation as the view they are created from.

380





XS_RUNPATH This variable is available only in initialization files. Use to point to the folder Tekla Structures searches for models by default. When you open the New dialog box, the default model folder is displayed in the Save in list box.

This variable does not affect the Open dialog box.

XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR Category


Set to have Tekla Structures use a space instead of the feet separator in drawing tables and reports (US imperial environment only), e.g. 2 4''1/4. You also need to set XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL.

XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL Category


Set to have Tekla Structures omit the feet symbol in drawing tables and reports (US imperial environment only), e.g. 2-4''1/4.

XSR_USE_NO_INCH_SYMBOL Category


Set to have Tekla Structures omit the inch symbol in drawing tables and reports (US imperial version only), e.g. 2-4 ¼ .

www.cadfamily.com




381

You also need to set XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL and XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR.

XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE Category


Set to force Tekla Structures to show zero feet for values less one foot, e.g. 0'-6''3/4.

XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_FOR_FRACTIONS Category


Set to force Tekla Structures to show zero inches for values only containing fractions, e.g. 2'-3/ 4 or 0''1/4.

XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_VALUE Category


Set to force Tekla Structures to show zero inches for values only containing feet and fractions, e.g. 2'-0''3/4 or 1/4.

8.19 S XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT Category

Multi-user

Set to TRUE to enable the saving of model revision comments in multi-user models. See also

Saving model revision comments

XS_SCALE_COPIED_OR_MOVED_OBJECTS_IN_DRAWINGS Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define the scaling of objects that are copied or moved between drawing views that have different scales. To scale the objects according to the view scales, set the varible to TRUE. To keep the object sizes constant, set the variable to FALSE.

XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT Category

Marking: parts

Tekla Structures fits part marks near the part they belong to by scaling the text height. Set the minimum scale with this variable. Example

382

XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT=0.5





The default value is 1.0 so that if you do not set the variable, Tekla Structures does not scale marks. Tekla Structures scales the text height in steps so that first it tries the scale of 0.9. If the mark does not fit, Tekla Structures scales the mark by 0.8, and so on. Note that part mark's leader line type has to be either "Try along part" or "Always along part".

XS_SCREW_DIAMOND_WITHOUT_PHI Category

Marking: bolts

Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures placing a phi symbol outside the frame of bolt marks (diamond type only).

XS_SDNF_CONVERT_PL_PROFILE_TO_PLATE Category

Export

Set to TRUE to have SDNF exports convert plate profiles (PL) to contour plates. Works with SDNF versions 2.0 and 3.0.

XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID Category

Export

Use to revert to the FrameWorksPlus ID number in SDNF exports. Example

XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID=TRUE

See also XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER.

XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER Category

Import

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures store the FrameWorksPlus ID number in SDNF imports. Tekla Structures stores the ID number in the user-defined attribute SDNF_MEMBER_NUMBER. For information on exporting the ID number, see XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID and XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID.

XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP Category

CNC

Set to TRUE to include hard stamps for secondary parts in DSTV files. Set to FALSE to create hard stamps only for main parts.

Tekla Structures does not create hard stamps for plates.

www.cadfamily.com




383

XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR Category

Hatching

Use to add extra lines in different colors around automatic hatching in section views. Enter a value for the color (from 1 to 14) in the Value field.

• •

The default value is 0 (no extra lines). The number corresponds to the color sequence in the drawing object properties:

To show lines around hatching, and to be able to add extra lines in different colors, you may need to set variable XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS to TRUE in the initialization files. The variable is set to FALSE by default.

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL Category

Drawing properties

Use to define the arrow symbol Tekla Structures uses in section symbols at the left end of sections. By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 145 in the sections.sym file (located usually in the folder \environments\country-independent\symbols\). See also

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL Section view label and symbol.

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE Category

Drawing properties

Sets the reference text for symbols that show a section in another drawing. Enter the text in the Value field. The text can include:

•

384

free text





•

user-defined attributes

•

template attributes

If you set the variable in the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the user-defined and template attributes. For example, %DRAWING_TITLE%. If you set the variable in the initialization files, use double % characters around the user-defined and template attributes. For example, %%DRAWING_TITLE%%.

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL Category

Drawing properties

Use to define the arrow symbol Tekla Structures uses in section symbols at the right end of sections. By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 144 in the sections.sym file (located usually in the folder \environments\country-independent\symbols\). See also

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL Section view label and symbol.

XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE Category

Drawing properties

Sets the reference text for section view labels. See also XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE.

XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE Sets the range for the semi-orthogonal snap as an angle. If you pick within the range, Tekla Structures snaps to the orthogonal position (0, 45, 90, 135, 180, etc. degrees). Example

XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE=15

See also XS_USE_SEMI_ORTHO (p. 406).

XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks (workshop). For switches available to define mark contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

www.cadfamily.com

Marking: Bolts




385

Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks for workshop bolts in general arrangement drawings. See also

Size element in bolt marks XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386) XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks (workshop). For switches to define mark contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in hole marks for workshop bolts in general arrangement drawings. See also

Size element in bolt marks XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 385) XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks (workshop). For switches to define mark contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks for workshop bolts in general arrangement drawings. See also

Size element in bolt marks XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 385) XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)

XS_SHOW_PERFORM_NUMBERING_MESSAGE Use to show or hide the Perform numbering button in the warning message Tekla Structures displays if you try to create a drawing without numbering or when numbering is not up to date.

• •

By default, this variable is set to TRUE and the numbering button is shown. To hide the button, set this variable to FALSE.

Consider hiding the numbering button in the multi-user mode, because unnecessary or unplanned numbering may take a while in large models or break project numbering. This can

386





occur if Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) checkbox is not selected in the Numbering setup dialog box. See also

When to use multi-user mode (p. 58) Numbering setup (p. 71) Numbering – specific cases (p. 72)

XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES Category

Drawing Properties

Use to display or hide the hidden lines of reference models in drawings. When you set the variable to TRUE, reference model lines are never hidden by other objects. To hide hidden lines, enter FALSE.

XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the Revision mark field in the Tekla Structures drawing list in the modeling environment, rather than the Revision number field (default).

XS_SHOW_SITE_STUDS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS Category

Drawing properties

Use to show site studs in assembly drawings.

XS_SHOW_STUDS_IN_WORKSHOP_DRAWINGS Set to TRUE to show workshop studs in single-part drawings.

XS_SHOW_TEMPLATE_LOG_MESSAGES Category


Use to show or hide the error messages related to template attributes in the log file. By default this variable is set to FALSE.

XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW Category


Use to control the dimensioning of centrally-located bolts in single-part views included in assembly drawings. See also Centered parts and bolts.

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS Category


Use to close dimensions in single-part views included in an assembly drawing. See also Closing dimensions.

www.cadfamily.com




387

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS Category


Use to close short dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings. See also Closing dimensions.

XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE Category


Use to set a distance for combining dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value. See also Combining distances.

XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE Category


Use to set a minimum distance for combining dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value. See also Combining distances.

XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY Category


Use to combine dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings. The five options (1,2,3,4,5) correspond to the combining order in the dimensioning properties dialog box. See also Combining distances.

XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE Category


Use to set a dimension type for single-part views included in assembly drawings. The options are:

• •

1 relative

•

3 both

2 absolute

XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS Category


Use to define how parts appear (their representation type) in single-part views included in assembly drawings. The options are:

388

• •

1 solid

•

2 symbol form

4 workshop solid (round tubes open)





XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE Category

Single Part View in Assembly Drawing

Use to exclude single-part views from assembly drawings. The options are:

• •

NONE includes all single part views.

•

ALL_SHAFTS includes single part views of all parts, except those with another object

MAIN_SHAFT includes single part views of all parts, except assembly main parts.

welded to them (i.e. primary parts).

•

AUTOMATIC includes single part views of all parts, except the longest main part in the

assembly.

•

ALL_BUT_MAIN_PART includes single part views of assembly main parts only.

•

STANDARD includes single-part views of all parts, except standard parts. You can add STANDARD after any of the existing values, for example MAIN_SHAFT_AND_STANDARD

creates single-part drawing from all but main part or standard parts. See also Standard part model.

XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET Category


Use to set a forward offset for dimensions in single-part views included in an assembly drawing. Enter the value as a decimal. The forward offset defines how positions dimension lines. See also Forward offset.

XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS Category

Dimensioning: parts

Forces shape dimensions to be the same as the dimension type you select. See also

XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS

XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN Category


Use to display single-part views in drawings without shortening parts.

XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK Category


You can create orientation marks for included single-part views in assembly drawings. To show the orientation marks in single-part views:

• •

www.cadfamily.com

Enter TRUE in the Value field for this variable. Set the option Single-part attributes to Current attributes (in Assembly - layout properties > Other). Tekla Structures takes the orientation mark settings from the current single-part drawing properties.




389

XS_SINGLE_PART_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE Category

Drawing properties

Use to define a title for single-part drawing views in a multi-drawings. You can use any of the following to define the title:

• •

PART_NAME

•

PART_POS

•

ASSEMBLY_POS

•

MODEL_NUMBER

•

LENGTH, PROFILE

•

LENGTH

•

BASE_NAME

•

NAME

PART_MATERIAL

XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA Category


Use to display overall dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings.

XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE Category


Use to show or hide shape dimensions in single part views. Set to 1 to show shape dimensions in single-part views. Set to 0 to hide shape dimensions in single-part views.

XS_SINGLE_SCALE Category


Use to set the scale of single-part views included in assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value. Example

To have Tekla Structures use the scale 1/10, enter 10.0 in the Value field.

XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL Category


Use to show or hide internal bolt dimensions in assembly drawings. Set to 1 to show internal bolt dimensions. Set to 0 to hide internal bolt dimensions. See also Bolt internal dimensions.

390





XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS Category


Use to include position dimensions for bolts in single-part views included in assembly drawings. See also Main part bolt positions.

XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS Category


Use to include dimensions from work points in single-part views included in assembly drawings.

XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE Category


Use to set the dimension type for single-part views included in assembly drawings. The options are:

• •

1 relative

•

3 both

2 absolute

XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks (site). For switches you can use to define the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks for site bolts in general arrangement drawings. See also

Size element in bolt marks XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391) XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 392)

XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks (site). For switches you can use for defining the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

www.cadfamily.com

Marking: Bolts




391

Use to define the contents of the size element in hole marks for site bolts in general arrangement drawings. See also

Size element in bolt marks XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391) XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 392)

XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks (site). For switches you can use for defining the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.

XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA Category

Marking: Bolts

Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks for site bolts in general arrangement drawings. See also

Size element in bolt marks XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391) XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391)

XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY Category

File locations

Points to the folder where Tekla Structures stores screenshots. If the variable is disabled, Tekla Structures stores screenshots in the current model folder. If the defined folder does not exist, Tekla Structuresautomatically creates it when you take a screenshot. Example

XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY=c:\temp\

XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE Category

Speed and accuracy

Use to define the size of the solids buffer. The default value is 5000 solids. Tekla Structures creates a buffer in system RAM to store the solid representation of parts it creates during certain processes. For example, Tekla Structures creates solids when numbering a model. When this buffer fills up, Tekla Structures erases the contents in order to continue using the buffer. Increasing this value also increases the memory used by Tekla Structures processes. Decreasing this value decreases the memory requirements, but also decreases performance as Tekla Structures has to recreate solids more often. Testing various settings is the best way to optimize solid buffer size. Remember opening Tekla Structures windows uses some RAM, and that other programs also use RAM for various processes.

392





Here are approximate recommendations for the solid buffer size, based on the amount of RAM your system has:

• •

128 Mb memory - 10000

•

512 Mb memory - 40000

256 Mb memory - 20000

XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY Use to model profiles more accurately in model views and drawings using profile roundings and sloping flanges. Using this variable also makes the weight value more accurate. By default this variable is not used. To use this variable, add it to the user.ini file and set to TRUE.

This variable increases the number of faces in solids, which slows down Tekla Structures. We recommend using this variable only when needed.

Limitations

• •

In components, some stiffeners might bite into flanges of columns or beams. Some bolt edge distances are not correctly calculated.

XS_STACKED_FRACTION_TYPE Category

Imperial units

Use to define the appearance of fractions. You can use stacked fractions in drawings, text, marks etc., but not in templates. The options are (from left to right in the illustration):

• •

NOT_STACKED

•

SLASH

•

WITHOUT_SLASH

DASH

If you do not want to use stacked fractions, set this variable to NOT_STACKED, or use a backslash character ( \ ) before the slash character ( / ) in the text (e.g. 1\ /16).

XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE Category

Components

Use to define the tolerance between the actual and standard widths of gusset plates created using modeling tools or connections. Tekla Structures uses a standard plate file to define the default plate width including the tolerance value. Enter the value in millimeters. Components that use this variable are:

•

www.cadfamily.com

Welded gusset (10)




393

•

Bolted gusset (11)

•

Tube gusset (20)

•

Corner tube gusset (56)

•

Corner bolted gusset (57)

•

Wraparound gusset (58),

•

Hollow brace wraparound gusset (59)

•

Wraparound gusset cross (60)

•

Gusseted cross (62)

•

Corner wrapped gusset (63)

XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE Category

Components

Use to define the tolerance between the actual and standard widths of stiffener plates created by Haunch (40). Enter the value in millimeters. The variable is set to 10 by default.

XS_STD_PART_MODEL Category

Numbering

Use to indicate the location of the standard part model. Enter the folder path. Example

XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\TeklaStructures\Models\Stand

XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_FACTOR Category


Use the variable to set the scale factor for the text height in superscripts used in dimensions. The default is 0.7. Examples

394





Example number

The variable is set to 0.7 1.5 0.5

XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR Category

Numbering

Use to define the order in which multi-drawing numbers, and part or assembly numbers appear in multi-numbers. The options are: NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS. If this variable is set to PARTS, the presentation of multinumbers for parts is 101a, not a101.

Example

XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR Category

Numbering

Changes the prefix you define for Tekla Structures assembly and/or part marks to a suffix (for example, A1 becomes 1A). The options are NONE, PARTS, ASSEMBLIES, ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.

SYMEDHOME Category


Points to the location of the symbol editor message file.

XS_SYSTEM Category

File locations

Points to the location of the Tekla Structures system folder. Specifying more than one system directory

You can specify more than one system folder. To do this, enter the file paths of the folders, separated by semicolons (for example, C:\TeklaStructures\14.0\usimp\system_steel; C:\TeklaStructures\14.0\usimp\system_common), as the value for the variable. Tekla Structures searches the folders in the order that you have entered them. If files with identical names exist in both folders, the one that is found first will be used. In the example above, the files found from system_steel will be used instead of the files with identical names in system_common.

See also

www.cadfamily.com

Folder search order (p. 94)




395

8.20 T TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE Category


Points to the location of the template font conversion file (template_fonts.cnv).

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY Category

File locations

Points to the location of the folder containing template (*.tpl) and report (*.rpt) files. See also

Folder search order.

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM Category

File locations

Use to set the path to the default environment-specific templates delivered with Tekla Structures. See also

Folder search order.

XS_TEXT_FONT No help available.

XS_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR Use to fine-tune Tekla Structures font heights when you are using the "Custom %" setting in Windows 2000 font size setup Example

set XS_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR=1.0

XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON Category

Drawing Properties

Use to define the point where text that is positioned almost vertically is turned so that it is faced the other way around. The default is 0.1.

396





TEXT_X_SIZE Use to change font size in the Template Editor Example

set TEXT_X_SIZE=3

TEXT_Y_SIZE Use to change font size in the Template Editor Example

TEXT_Y_SIZE=5

XS_THUMBNAIL_FONT Category

Model view

Use to set the font used in the component catalog.

XS_TPLED_INI Category


Defines the location of the tpled.ini file. Example

XS_TPLED_INI=%XS_DIR%\environments\%2\template\settings\

XS_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION_IN_FREEPLACING Category

Drawing properties

Use to fine-tune the functionality of the Arrange Drawing Objects command in the Drawing Editor. This variable is set to TRUE by default, meaning that the Arrange Drawing Objects command tries to find a new location for the selected object as close to the current location as possible. If the current location is free, the object is not moved at all. When this variable is set to FALSE, the Arrange Drawing Objects command works the same way as Ignore Current Locations.

www.cadfamily.com




397

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS Category

Drawing properties

Use to define how Tekla Structures draws tubes. Set to a decimal value. Tekla Structures individually draws the inner and outer surfaces of tubes thicker than this value Example

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS=16.0

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS Category

Drawing properties

Lengthens unfolded tubes by the following multiplication factor: factor = 1.0+2*XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS/diameter Example

Tube d=219 When you set the variable to 0, the unwrapped length of the tube (1.0*PI*diameter) = 688. When the variable is set to 10, the length of the unfolded tube = factor * diameter* PI = (1.0 + 2*10/219) * 219 * 3.14 = 751

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC Category

CNC

To use the plate profile type B in the NC file header data for unwrapped round tubes, set to TRUE. To use RO for round tubes, enter FALSE.

Use this variable only when you have set the variable XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES to TRUE.

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES Category

Drawing properties

Set to TRUE to include cut holes in workshop drawings or NC files of unwrapped CHS (circular hollow section) profiles. This variable is set to TRUE by default. If you set it to FALSE, then the previously existing unwrapping method is applied.

398





If you set this variable to TRUE, the variables XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS and XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS have no effect. Note also that using this variable does not affect conical tube profiles.

8.21 U XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER You can collect all the *.uel files of your custom components and sketched cross sections in one folder, and then automatically import them to new models. Use this variable to point to the folder containing the *.uel files. When this variable is set (preferably in the user.ini file), and you create a new model, Tekla Structures automatically imports the *.uel files to the model.

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT Category


Use to define the format of angle text. Use the same integer values that appear in the option menu of the dimension property dialog box (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). The default value is 1.

www.cadfamily.com




399

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION Category


Use to define the precision of angle text. Use the same integer values that appear in the option menu of the dimension property dialog box (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 16, 32, 10, 100, 1000). The default value is 10.

XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS Category


By default, Tekla Structures uses the neutral axis of the part to calculate the bending radius in unfolded views. Set this variable to TRUE to have Tekla Structures calculate the bending radius from the inner surface of the part.

XS_UNFOLDING_PLANE_EPSILON Category

Dimensioning: Unfolding

Use to specify the epsilon when checking if all section points are on the same plane. The default value is 0.01 mm.

XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Set this variable to have Tekla Structures create unique position numbers for all parts when numbering, even if they are equal. See also

XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS (p. 400)

XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Set to TRUE if you want Tekla Structures to create unique position numbers for all assemblies when numbering, even if they are identical. Parts are still numbered the same way as before. The default value is FALSE. See also

XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS (p. 400)

XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING Category

Marking: parts

Updates the position of updated marks in specific drawing types. Use the letters in the following table to specify the drawing types. By default, this variable applies to single-part, assembly, and multi-drawings.

400





Example

Letter

Drawing type

W

Single-part drawings

A

Assembly drawings

M

Multi-drawings

G

General arrangement drawings

C

Cast-unit drawings

To update the position of updated part marks in single-part, assembly, multi-, and general arrangement drawings: XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING=WAMG

XS_UPDATE_MARKS_IN_FROZEN_DRAWINGS Category

Marking: general

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures to update marks in frozen drawings and also create new marks if new parts have been added. If disabled Tekla Structures only updates parts and bolts.

XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED Category

Concrete detailing

Set toTRUE to place part marks or other text upside down to illustrate that identical parts have a different orientation. If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures automatically changes all marks or text that are rotated more than 90 degrees.

XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT Category


Use to affect the distance within which the first and last US Absolute dimension lines appear as relative. Example

XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT=1000

In this example, Tekla Structures will change first and last dimension lines shorter than 1000 mm to Relative dimensions. Dimension lines greater or equal to 1000 mm will remain US Absolute dimensions.

XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR Category


Tekla Structures multiplies the space required by US Absolute2 dimension text by this value. If the result is larger than the actual dimension, Tekla Structures changes the dimension type to Relative. The default value is 1.5.

XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR Category

www.cadfamily.com

Numbering




401

Makes the assembly or cast unit number the part number of main parts in assemblies or cast units.

•

Set to MAIN_PART to assign the assembly or cast unit number to the main parts of an assembly or cast unit. All other parts use part number.

•

Set to LOOSE_PART to assign the assembly or cast unit number to the assemblies or cast units that only contain one part.

Do not use the same prefix for parts and assemblies.

XS_USE_BOLT_DISTANCE_IN_NOTCH_CALCULATIONS Set to TRUE to use automatic notch height calculation according to bolt distance. This affects connections 129 and 184.

XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS Category

Drawing view

Changes the default color mode in drawings when the Tekla Structures is started. By default, drawings are black and white. Set to TRUE to use colors in drawings.

XS_USE_CONVEX_PROTECT_AREA Category

This variable is available only in initialization files. Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures calculate the protection area more accurately along the faces of parts so that part marks can be placed inside the profile also for curved hollow sections. The variable is set to TRUE by default.

XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_FILE_NAME Use to prevent Tekla Structures converting the dot in the drawing name (e.g. B.1) to an underscore in the plot file name when printing.

XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE Category

Printing

Set to TRUE when you want Tekla Structures to use the drawing name as the print title, for example, when printing to a .pdf file or to a Windows printer. As a result, the Windows printer dialog box, for example, will show the drawing plot file name you define with variables and not the general Tekla Structures print title, such as "Tekla Structures drawing - A [T.100]". See also XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

402





XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS Set to TRUE to disable additional colors in modeling views. Example

XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS=TRUE

XS_USE_FILE_COMPRESSION Set to automatically compress model files. The compression ratio of the model is approximately 70 to 80%. This means you can open and save models more quickly, particularly when working on a network.

XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION Category

Plate work

Set to any value to use flat bar designation. For more information on flat bars, see Using flat bars.

XS_USE_LINECLIP Category

Printing

Set to FALSE to display continuous lines in printed drawings, for example, to run the line through text or drawing marks.

XS_USE_LINECLIP = TRUE

XS_USE_LINECLIP = FALSE

For DWG/ DXF export use the variable XS_USE_LINECLIP_IN_EXPORT.

XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR Category

Numbering

Use to allow the prefixes used in part and assembly numbering to be used in multi-drawing numbers. Example

If you set this variable to PARTS, the multinumbers for parts appear as 101Pa.

XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR Category

Numbering

Use to define if multinumbering affects assemblies, parts, or both. Part and assembly numbering must be based on drawing numbers to use multinumbering.

www.cadfamily.com




403

The options are:

• •

NONE

•

PARTS

•

ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS

ASSEMBLIES

XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS Category

Numbering

To use multinumbering when copying drawing views, enter TRUE in the Value field. To not use multinumbering, clear the Value field.

XS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK Category

Modeling Properties

If you are working on a large model, running the clash check may sometimes be slow. In that case you can use the old clash checking functionality, which does not recognize clashes with reference models. To revert to the old functionality, set the variable to FALSE. The default value is TRUE.

XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION Category

Plate work

Set to TRUE to switch the width and length values, if the width is greater than the length. Exampole

A beam with profile BL15*240 and the distance between beam endpoints is 215 mm.

•

If XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION is set, the length of the beam is fixed at 240, and the beam profile changes to BL15*215.

•

If XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION is not set, the length of the beam is to 215 and the profile remains BL15*240

XS_USE_NEW_WELD_PLACING If you have set welds visible in the drawing, this variable affects in which drawing view (front, back, top, or bottom) Tekla Structures draws the welds.

•

When the variable is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures draws welds to the view in which has best visibility to the secondary part.

•

When the variable is not set, Tekla Structures selects the view according to the primary part.

XS_USE_NEW_USNOTCH Use to indicate whether to locate the horizontal cut of a notch above or below the flange of the main beam. Used with the following notching options:

404





XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR Category

Numbering

Use to define which objects have numeric multi-numbers.The options are:

Example

• •

ASSEMBLIES

•

ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS

PARTS

If you set this variable to PARTS, Tekla Structures displays the multinumber as e.g. 101/1. If you also set the variable XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR to PARTS, Tekla Structures replaces the slash character with the part prefix, e.g. 101P1.

XS_USE_OLD_FILTERING Category

Modeling Properties Use to change the appearance of the Object Group - Select Filter dialog box. The default value is FALSE.

See also

Select filter dialog box

XS_USE_OLD_HQ_PROFILE_DEFINITION Category

Profiles

Set to use the old HQ profile definition. In the old HQ profile definition, profile height is the total height from the lower surface of the lower flange to the top of the upper flange. The new HQ profile definition omits the lower flange thickness and the profile height is equal to the web height.

XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION No help available.

XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES Category

Imperial units

Set to 1 to have sheet sizes in layouts and drawing lists in inches.

XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH Category

Imperial units

Set to TRUE to only display inches in weld length symbols.

www.cadfamily.com




405

XS_USE_ONLY_NOMINAL_REBAR_DIAMETER Category

Concrete detailing

Nominal diameter defines the cross section area of the reinforcing bar. To use nominal diameter for reinforcing bars, enter TRUE in the Value field. To use actual diameter, clear the Value field. (Actual diameter takes into account the "embosses" and tells the smallest hole diameter where the bar fits.)

XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING Category

Dimensioning: parts

Use to make the position dimension of plates dependent on the position of plates in the model. Example

Where a plate is positioned behind the reference points, Tekla Structures will place the position dimension on the top face of the plate.

XS_USE_POINT_AS_SEPARATOR_IN_PROFILE_NAME Set to use the period character (.) as the separator in parametric profile names, instead using it as a decimal separator. This increases the number of separators available in the US imperial environment.

XS_USE_SEMI_ORTHO Set to FALSE when you want to use full orthogonal snapping. With full orthogonal snapping, Tekla Structures can only to snap to positions in orthogonal directions (0, 45, 90, 135, 180, etc. degrees) on the work plane. When set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures uses semi-orthogonal snapping, which enables you to pick orthogonal positions within a tolerance which you set with XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE. Outside the tolerance you can pick any position.

XS_USE_SMALLER_GUSSET_PLATE Category

Components

Set to TRUE to minimize the size of rectangular gusset plates created by gusset connections. You can create smaller gusset plates by using a single bracing and secondary bolts dimensioned to the middle of the secondary part. Tekla Structures generates a triangular gusset plate when the primary part is located between diagonals.

XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES Category

Model view

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures use anti-aliasing to minimize jagged edges in rendered views. Before using this variable, check that your display adapter supports anti-aliasing.

XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING Category

406

Model view





Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures bypass your graphic adapter in rendered views. Use this variable if you have problems with your display (e.g. lines not correctly drawn.

XS_USE_SPECIAL_FILLER_PLATE_THICKNESS Set to TRUE to have filler plate thicknesses comply with Japanese standards.

XS_USE_TUBE_INNER_LENGTH_IN_DIMENSIONING Category

Dimensioning: parts

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures dimension the overall length of tube profiles along the inner surface instead of outer surface.

XS_USE_VERTICAL_PLACING_FOR_COLUMNS_IN Category

Drawing properties

Use to place columns vertically in drawings. Use the following options to specify the types of columns to place vertically:

• •

ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS

•

ASSEMBLY_AND_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS

SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS

XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE Category

Marking: bolts

Defines the location of the user-defined bolt symbol table file.

XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS Category

Profiles

Use to define additional separators to separate dimensions in the names of parametric profiles. The separators can consist of multiple characters. Separate the values with commas, for example GA,ABC.

Follow these rules in naming:

• •

Use upper case letters in separator names.

•

Do not start separator names with a dash (-) or full stop (.).

•

Do not start separator names with an inch separator (", ', /) when using imperial units.

Do not enter digits, commas, or special characters in separator names.

In addition to these characters, Tekla Structures always recognizes the standard separator characters X, *, -, and /, and also the character defined by the variable XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR.

www.cadfamily.com




407

8.22 V XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Specifies valid characters for assembly family position numbers. You must specify all the valid characters in this variable. See also

XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER Category

Numbering

Specifies valid characters for the assembly family number qualifier. You must specify all the valid characters in this variable. Example

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER=GHJKL

See also

XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Use to specify the valid characters for assembly multinumbers. You must specify all the valid characters in this variable. Example

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=abeg

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Specifies valid characters for assembly position numbers. See also XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Use to specify the valid characters for part multinumbers. You must specify all the valid characters in this variable. Example

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABEG

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS Category

Numbering

Use to specify the valid characters for part position numbers. See also XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (p. 368).

408





XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR Category

Model View

Use to change the dimension line color in rendered views. Define the color using RGB values: XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR= .

Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. Restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect. Example

RGB value

Color

1.0 1.0 1.0

White

1.0 0.0 0.0

Red

0.0 1.0 0.0

Green

0.0 0.0 1.0

Blue

1.0 1.0 0.0

Yellow

XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR Category

Model View

Use to change the dimension text color in rendered views. Define the color using RGB values: XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR= .


RGB value

Color

1.0 1.0 1.0

White

1.0 0.0 0.0

Red

0.0 1.0 0.0

Green

0.0 0.0 1.0

Blue

1.0 1.0 0.0

Yellow

XS_VIEW_FAST_BOLT_COLOR Category

Model View

Use to define the color of bolts in rendered views when you are using the bolt representation option Fast. Define the color using the RGB (Red Green Blue) values. The scale is from 0 to 1. Example

For example, use 0.0 0.0 0.0 for black and 1.0 1.0 1.0 for white.

XS_VIEW_FREE_MEASURE_PLANE Category

www.cadfamily.com

Model View




409

Use to define the plane where the results of free measure are shown. You can have the distances displayed in the local and/or global coordinate system. The possible values are VIEW, WORK and BOTH. The default value is VIEW.

If you set the variable to BOTH, only one value is shown if the values are identical.

Example

In the following example, the variable has been set to BOTH:

XS_VIEW_HEIGHT Category

Model view

Use to define the default window size of views and their initial position on the screen. Similar to XS_BASICVIEW... variables.

XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR Category

Model View

Use to change the part label color in rendered views. Define the color using RGB values: XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR= .


410

RGB value

Color

1.0 1.0 1.0

White

1.0 0.0 0.0

Red

0.0 1.0 0.0

Green





RGB value

Color

0.0 0.0 1.0

Blue

1.0 1.0 0.0

Yellow

XS_VIEW_POSITION_X Category

Model view


XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y Category

Model view


XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT Category

Model view

Use to specify the font for drawing view titles. If this variable is disabled, Tekla Structures uses the font specified by XS_DEFAULT_FONT.

XS_VIEW_WIDTH Category

Model view


8.23 W XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS Use to define the maximum angle between adjacent polygonal parts of the warped shape. Enter the value in degrees. You get best results if you use values between 0.5 - 10.0. For example 3.0.

XS_WARP_MAX_DEVIATION Use to define the taximum difference between real warped shape and the polygonal warped shape in the model. Enter the value in millimeters. You get best results if you use values between 5.0-100.0. For example, 50.0.

www.cadfamily.com




411

XS_WEB_PUBLISHING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY Set in the user.ini file to define the location of the folder containing WebViewer templates.

When you set this variable, Tekla Structures searches for Web Viewer templates only in the folder defined with this variable.

XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE Category

Welds

Use to define how Tekla Structures filters weld types.

•

EXACT Tekla Structures filters the welds equal to the default size in the Welding properties

dialog box

•

MIN Tekla Structures filters all welds equal to the default size or smaller n the Welding properties dialog box.

XS_WELD_FONT Use to specify the font for weld text. If this variable is blank, Tekla Structures uses the default font.

XS_WELDING_LENGTH_TOLERANCE Category

Welds

Use to specify the minimum edge length Tekla Structures should take into account when searching for weld locations. The default value is 30 mm.

XS_WELDING_TOUCH_TOLERANCE Category

Welds

Use to define the maximum possible gap between two parts welded together. The default value is 30 mm.

XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR Category

Welds

Set as follows to define the weld CC/length separator character according the AISC (3@12) or AISC (100-300) standard: XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR=@

XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT Category

412

Marking: general





Use to define weld number format. For more information, see XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT.

XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART Category

Dimensioning: parts

Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures also draw reference dimensions for points outside part end points.

8.24 Z XS_ZERO_POINT_SYMBOL_OLD_WAY Category


Set to TRUE to use RD marks containing a circle rather than the text RD. These marks indicate the zero point of dimensions when you use US Absolute dimension types. By default RD marks contain the text RD.

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO Category

Model view

Use to configure the Zoom in and Zoom out commands. The default value is 0.25. Increase this value to zoom more with a single mouse click.

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE Category

Model view

See XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE.

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE Category

Model view

Use to configure zooming when you use wheel mouse mode.

www.cadfamily.com




413

414





9

Introduction

www.cadfamily.com

File extensions

This appendix contains the filename extensions of the files you save in dialog boxes using the Save as button, or the Save defaults command on the Setup menu.

Filename extension

Dialog box name

4d

Project Status Visualization

ad

Assembly drawing properties

adc

Assembly - section view properties

adcd

Assembly - dimensioning properties

adcs

Assembly - section symbol properties

add

Assembly - dimension properties

adl

Assembly - layout properties

adp

Assembly - part properties

adr

Assembly - protection properties

ads

Assembly - bolt properties

adv

Assembly - view properties

adw

Assembly - weld properties

ajm

Assembly - connection mark properties

apm

Assembly - part mark properties

asm

Assembly - bolt mark properties

cbm

Concrete beam properties

ccl

Concrete column properties

clm

Column properties

cpf

Pad footing properties

cpl

Contour plate properties

cpn

Concrete panel properties

crs

Orthogonal beam properties

csl

Concrete slab properties



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 File extensions

415

416

Filename extension

Dialog box name

cudc

Cast unit - section view properties

cudcd

Cast unit - dimensioning properties

cudcomp

Cast unit - component properties

cudcs

Cast unit - section symbol properties

cudd

Cast unit - dimension properties

cudgr

Cast unit - grid properties

cudl

Cast unit - layout properties

cudnp

Cast unit - neighbor part properties

cudp

Cast unit - part properties

cudr

Cast unit - reinforcement properties

cudrm

Cast unit - reinforcement mark properties

cudrp

Cast unit - protection properties

cudv

Cast unit - view properties

cunpm

Cast unit - neighbor part mark properties

cupm

Cast unit - part mark properties

dia

Twin profile properties

dim

Dimension properties

fas

Text file properties

fdg

DWG/DXF properties

fhl

Hyperlink properties

fms

Drawing frame properties

gar

Arc properties

gci

Circle properties

gd

General arrangement drawing properties

gdcom

General - component properties

gdcm

Cast unit - component mark properties

gdl

General - layout properties

gdr

General - reinforcement properties

gdrp

General - protection properties

gjm

General - connection mark properties

gpg

Polygon properties

gln

Line properties

gpl

Polyline properties

grt

Rectangle properties

ldb

Drawing export layers

ler

Layer properties

lev

Level mark properties

md

Multi-drawing properties

mvi

View properties (modeling)

ncp

Pop-mark properties

num

Numbering setup


File extensions www.cadfamily.com



www.cadfamily.com

Filename extension

Dialog box name

pm

Part mark properties

PObjGrp

Object group - representation

prf

Project properties

prt

Beam properties

rbg

Reinforcing bar group properties

rbr

Reinforcing bar properties

rbm

Reinforcement mesh properties

rep

Object representation

rev

Revision mark properties

rop

Reference object properties

sbl

Symbol properties

scr

Bolt properties

sm

Bolt mark properties

SObjGrp

Object Group - Selection Filter

stp

Preferences

txt

Text properties

vf

View filter properties

vg

View grid properties

vi

View properties (drawing)

vjm

View connection mark properties

vnp

View neighbour part properties

vp

View part properties

vpm

View part mark properties

vs

View bolt properties

vsm

View bolt mark properties

vw

View weld properties

wd

Single part drawing properties

wdcd

Single - dimensioning properties

wdr

Single - protection properties

wjm

Single - connection mark properties

wld

Weld properties

wls

Weld symbol properties



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 File extensions

417

418


File extensions www.cadfamily.com



10

Introduction

Reserved shortcuts

This appendix lists the shortcut keys Tekla Structures installs by default. You should not assign these shortcuts to other commands. You can use upper or lower case for shortcuts containing characters (e.g. a or A). You need to use a combination of keystrokes in some shortcuts. The keystrokes are linked with the + character.

Example

To use the shortcut for Redo, Ctrl+Z, hold down the Ctrl key and press Z on the keyboard.

10.1 Common shortcuts

www.cadfamily.com

Command

Shortcut

Help

F1

Open

Ctrl + O

Save

Ctrl + S

Delete

Del

Properties

Alt+Enter

Undo

Ctrl+Z

Redo

Ctrl+Y

Interrupt

Esc

Repeat last command

Enter



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Reserved shortcuts

419

10.2 Modeling commands

420

Command

Shortcut

Pan

P

Move right

x

Move left

z

Move down

y

Move up

w

Rotate using mouse

Ctrl+R

Rotate using keyboard

Ctrl + arrow keys,Shift + arrow keys

Disable view rotation

F8

Set view rotation point

V

Auto rotate

Shift + R, Shift + T

3D/Plane

Ctrl+P

Open component catalog

Ctrl+F

Fly (in perspective views)

Shift+F

Zoom original

Home

Zoom previous

End

Zoom in

PgUp

Zoom out

PgDn

Center by cursor

Ins

Update window

Ctrl+U

Snapshots

F9, F10, F11, F12

Xsnap (Tolerate cursor)

T

Smart Select

S

Drag and drop

D

Middle button pan

Shift+M

Copy

Ctrl + C

Move

Ctrl + M

Ortho

O

Relative snap

R

Relative coordinate input

@, R

Absolute coordinate input

$, A

Next position

Tab

Previous position

Shift + Tab

Select filter

Ctrl + G

Add to selection

Shift

Toggle selection

Ctrl


Reserved shortcuts www.cadfamily.com



Command

Shortcut

Lock X, Y or Z coordinates

X, Y or Z

Select all select switch

F2

Select parts select switch

F3

Select all

Ctrl + A

Select assembly

Alt + object

Snap to reference lines/ points

F4

Snap to geometry lines/ points

F5

Snap to nearest points

F6

Snap to any position

F7

Advanced options

Ctrl + E

Inquire object

Shift + I

Free measure

F

Create new model

Ctrl + N

Open the Views list

Ctrl + I

Create clip plane

Shift + X

Rollover highlight

H

Hide object

Shift + H

Undo last polygon pick

Backspace

Finish polygon input

Space bar

Create AutoConnection

Ctrl + J

Phase manager

Ctrl + H

Clash check

Shift + C

AutoDrawing

Ctrl + W

Drawing list

Ctrl + L

Clone drawing

Ctrl + D

Print drawings

Shift + P

Create report

Ctrl + B

10.3 Drawing commands

www.cadfamily.com

Command

Shortcut

Associative symbol

Shift + A

Black and white drawing

B

Ghost outline

Shift + G

Open drawing list

Ctrl + O

Open next drawing

Ctrl + Pg Dn



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Reserved shortcuts

421

Command

Shortcut

Open previous drawing

Ctrl + Pg Up

Add an orthogonal dimension

G

Command

Shortcut

Set UCS origin

U

Set UCS by two points

Shift+U

Toggle orientation

Ctrl+T

Reset current

Ctrl+1

Reset all

Ctrl+0

10.4 UCS

10.5 Representation for parts Command

Shortcut

Wireframe

Ctrl+1

Shaded Wireframe

Ctrl+2

Hidden Lines

Ctrl+3

Rendered

Ctrl+4

Rendered (Dark Colors)

Ctrl+5

10.6 Representation for component parts

See also

422

Command

Shortcut

Wireframe

Shift+1

Shaded Wireframe

Shift+2

Hidden Lines

Shift+3

Rendered

Shift+4

Rendered (Dark Colors)

Shift+5

Defining shortcuts (p. 53)


Reserved shortcuts www.cadfamily.com



11

Template attributes

Introduction

You can use template fields in drawing and report templates. When you open a drawing or create a report, Tekla Structures uses the attributes or formulas the fields contain to calculate and display information from the model database. This could, for example, include assembly weight or cover area.

Audience

Anyone who needs to modify report or drawing templates will find this information useful.

Organization

Descriptions of template attributes are listed in alphabetical order:

Topics

A (p. 43 0)

B (p. 43 7)

C (p. 43 8)

D (p. 44 1)

E (p. 44 4)

F (p. 44 6)

G (p. 44 7)

H (p. 44 8)

I (p. 44 9)

L (p. 44 9)

M (p. 45 1)

N (p. 45 2)

O (p. 45 3)

P (p. 45 4)

R (p. 45 8)

S (p. 45 9)

T (p. 46 2)

U (p. 46 4)

V (p. 46 4)

W (p. 46 5)

Content type (p. 423) Attributes (p. 425) User-defined attributes in templates (p. 426)

11.1 Content type Use content type in the ROW section to select the parts to display in reports or drawing tables. Reports can include an entire model or selected objects. You can include parts and bolts, drawings, reinforcements, surface treatment, components, studs, and holes in reports, Tekla Structures automatically selects related assemblies and other objects. Tekla Structures always selects all the parts in drawings for inclusion in drawing tables. For more information on content type, see Content types in the Template Editor help.

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Template attributes

423

The content types are:

Type

Description

ASSEMBLY

Use to create lists of assemblies and single parts. Includes all assemblies containing the selected parts and bolts.

BOLT

Use to create screw and bolt lists. Includes all bolts connected to selected parts.

CAST_UNIT

Use to create lists of cast units.

COMMENT

Use to create empty rows or rows that only have textual data or lines anywhere on a template.

CONNECTION

Use to create lists of connections.

DRAWING

Use to create drawing lists without revision history information. Use for reports and included drawings.

HOLE

Use to create lists of holes.

MESH

Use to create lists of meshes.

NUT

Use to create lists of nuts. Contains all nuts for bolts associated with the selected parts.

PART REBAR

Use to create lists of reinforcing bars.

REVISION

Use to create lists of revision marks.

SIMILAR_ASSEMBLY

Use to create lists of similar parts.

SIMILAR_CAST_UNIT

To use this content type, you need to have an empty (hidden in output ASSEMBLY, PART or CAST_UNIT row in row hierarchy above the row with SIMILAR_* content type:

SIMILAR_PART

You cannot have any rows below SIMILAR_* row content type in the row hierarchy. STRAND

Use to create lists of prestressed strands.

STUD

Use to create lists of studs.

SURFACING SUMMARY WASHER

Use to create lists of washers. Contains all washers for all bolts associated with the selected parts.

WELD

424


Template attributes www.cadfamily.com



11.2 Attributes Templates and reports contain value fields, which contain attributes or formulas. The content type you choose affects which attributes you can use. Attribute displays data from model object when the template or report is output. The available attributes are defined with following files, located in ..\environments\*your environment*\template\settings folder:

File

Description

contentattributes.lst

This is a container file, including all the file names which contain the actual attribute definitions.

contentattributes_global.l st

This file includes attributes which are hard-coded into the program. Do not edit this file.

contentattributes_userdefi ned.lst

File includes user-defined attributes, which are defined in objects.inp file.

Do not edit the contentattributes_global.lst file. To use your own attributes in templates and reports, add them to the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. See more in Userdefined attributes in templates (p. 426). Use any attribute in the ROW section of drawings and reports. You can use the following attributes in headers, footers, page footers, and page headers:

www.cadfamily.com

Attribute

Heade r

Footer

Page footer

Page header

ADDRESS

X

X

X

X

BUILDER

X

X

X

X

CURRENT_PHASE

X

DATE

X

X

X

X

DATE_CREATE

X

X

X

X

DATE_END

X

X

X

X

DATE_ISSUE

X

X

X

X

DATE_LAST

X

X

X

X

DATE_MODIFY

X

X

X

X

DATE_PLOT

X

X

X

X

DATE_START

X

X

X

X

DESIGNER

X

X

X

X

DR_PART_POS

X

X

X

X

HEIGHT

X

X

X

X

X




425

Attribute

Heade r

Footer

Page footer

Page header

ID

X

X

X

X

INFO1, INFO2

X

X

X

X

LAST

X

X

X

X

LAST_MARK

X

X

X

X

LAST_TEXT1...3

X

X

X

X

MARK

X

X

X

X

MODEL

X

X

X

X

NAME

X

X

X

X

NAME_BASE

X

X

X

X

NUMBER#1, NUMBER #2

X

X

X

X

OBJECT

X

X

X

X

PAGE

X

PHASE

X

X

PLOTFILE

X

X

ROW_IN_PAGE

X

SCALE1...5

X

X

X

X

SIZE

X

X

X

X

TEXT1...3

X

X

X

X

TIME

X

TITLE

X

TITLE1...3

X

TYPE

X

X

X

X

USERFIELD_1 ... _8

X

X

X

X

WIDTH

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X

X X

X

11.3 User-defined attributes in templates The user-defined attributes used in templates and reports are defined in the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file (located in ..\environments\*your environment*\template\settings folder). By default, this file includes most of the user-defined attributes in the part properties dialog boxes. To use other attributes in templates and reports, you must add them to the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. The contentattributes_userdefined.lst file is divided into two sections: 1.

426

A list of attribute names and the default settings:





2.

A list of attributes assigned to content types:

Row content type

The attribute hierarchy in the Template Editor Customizable comments. In this example, the tab name in the user-defined attributes dialog box. User-defined attribute names, same as in the objects.inp file. See also

www.cadfamily.com

Adding attributes to contentattributes_userdefined.lst (p. 428)




427

Adding attributes to contentattributes_userdefined.lst In the following example a user-defined attribute named MY_ATTRIBUTE is added to the attribute tree in Template Editor: The attribute has been added to the user-defined properties for drawings:

1.

Open the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file in a text editor.

•

428

2.

File is located in ..\environments\*your environment*\template\settings folder. Add MY_ATTRIBUTE to the list of attribute names and define the settings:

3.

Add MY_ATTRIBUTE to the list of attributes assigned to content types:

•

Select the content type according to which object the attribute is associated to in the objects.inp file. In this example: DRAWING content type.

•

Add the attribute is in format USERDEFINED.*ATTRIBUTE_NAME*

4.

Save the changes.

5.

Attribute is shown in the attribute tree in Template Editor, under USERDEFINED:





Modify the way attributes are displayed in the attribute tree Add comments and modify the way the attributes are displayed in the Template Editor attribute tree. Add comment text

Add hierarchy

You can add your own comment text to the attribute in the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file: 1. 2.

Open the file and go to the list of attributes assigned to content types. Add your comment inside quotation marks, after the attribute name:

3.

Save the changes.

4.

The comment you added is displayed in the attribute tree in Template Editor:

You can add your own hierarchy, which is shown in the attribute tree in Template Editor: 1.

Open the contentattributes_userdefined.lst and go to the list of attributes assigned to content types. Define the hierarchy in square brackets, between USERDEFINED. and the attribute name:

2.

• 3.

www.cadfamily.com

Notice the full stops after the brackets, and between the hierarchies. The new hierarchy is shown in the attribute tree:




429

User-defined attributes are case sensitive. Ensure that you type in the field name using the correct case for all characters.

See also

Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101) Adding properties (p. 98)

11.4 A ACN Shows control numbers. For more information on control numbers, see Assigning control numbers to parts and Tools > Numbering > Create control numbers... .

ACTIVE_DESIGN_CODE Shows the active design code of material.

ADDRESS Shows the address entered in the Project properties dialog box.

ALIAS_NAME1 ... 3 Alias name of the material. Use for part and main part material attributes in ASSEMBLY and PART content types.

430





ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V Show bending angles of reinforcing bars based on the mappings in the rebar_schedule_config.inp file, located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder. These mappings are environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your company or project needs. See also

Reinforcement in templates (p. 490) Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469) ANG_U_MAX, ANG_U_MIN, ANG_V_MAX, ANG_V_MIN (p. 431) DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O, DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y (p. 443)

ANG_U_MAX, ANG_U_MIN, ANG_V_MAX, ANG_V_MIN Shows the minimum and maximum bending angles of reinforcing bars or meshes in tapered cross sections. See the example below:

AREA Shows the gross surface area and net area of plates for parts with a profile cross section. It does not take into account cuts and fittings. Tekla Structures calculates area using the extreme length and profile cover area per meter (value defined in the profile catalog). AREA only takes into account the cover area, not the cross area on profile ends. For polygon plates, the value is the actual area of the fabricated part; for all other objects it is zero. See also

AREA_GROSS AREA_NET

AREA_FORM_TOP, AREA_FORM_BOTTOM, AREA_FORM_SIDE Shows the area of faces whose normal vector points to the following directions:

• •

top of form (AREA_FORM_TOP)

•

form sides (AREA_FORM_SIDE)

bottom of form (AREA_FORM_BOTTOM)

For assemblies, the main part local up direction dictates the form up/bottom/sides directions. Faces which are inclined less than 5 degrees are counted in the top and bottom areas. Faces which are skew => 85 degrees are counted in the side areas. Overlapping faces may be counted

www.cadfamily.com




431

twice. Faces which are exactly 45 degrees against main global or local axes, are not counted to any direction.

AREA_FORM_TOP = sq.ft.

42

AREA_FORM_BOTTOM = 42 sq.ft. AREA_FORM_SIDE = 2*(2*7 + 3*5) + 2*(2*6 + 2*5) = 58 + 44 = 102 sq.ft.

AREA_GROSS For profiles this field shows the same result as AREA. For plates it shows the square area (extreme length multiplied by extreme width) needed to include the entire plate. For other objects it shows a zero.

AREA_NET For parts this field shows the net surface area that forms the actual area of the fabricated part. For other objects it shows a zero.

AREA_PER_TONS Shows AREA/WEIGHT x 1000.

AREA_PGX, AREA_NGX, AREA_PGY, AREA_NGY, AREA_PGZ, AREA_NGZ Shows the area of faces whose normal vector points to the positive or negative direction of the following global axes:

432

Attribute

Direction

AREA_PGX

Positive direction of global X-axis

AREA_NGX

Negative direction of global X-axis

AREA_PGY

Positive direction of global Y-axis

AREA_NGY

Negative direction of global Y-axis

AREA_PGZ

Positive direction of global Z-axis

AREA_NGZ

Negative direction of global Z-axis





Also faces whose normal vector is located in less than 45 degree angle to global axis are also included in the area. Faces exactly in 45 degree angle are not included in any global direction.

AREA_PLAN For parts this field shows the total upper surface area (perpendicular to the global Z-axis). ASSEMBLY content type

•

Shows the total upper surface area (perpendicular to the global Z-axis) of the parts included in an assembly.

AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_GROSS Shows the area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at the following global planes:

• •

XY-plane

•

YZ-plane

XZ-plane

Restrictions •

Areas are calculated always in net areas (holes are taken into account) even when gross is requested.

•

Overlapping faces are counted twice.

AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_NET Shows the net area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at the following global planes:

• •

XY-plane

•

YZ-plane

XZ-plane

AREA_PROJECTION_XY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_GROSS Shows the area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at its local planes:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

XY-plane

•

YZ-plane

XZ-plane




433

AREA_PROJECTION_XY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_NET Shows the net area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at its local planes:

• •

XY-plane

•

YZ-plane

XZ-plane

AREA_PX, AREA_NX, AREA_PY, AREA_NY, AREA_PZ, AREA_NZ Shows the area of faces whose normal vector points to the positive or negative direction of the following local axes:

Attribute

Direction

AREA_PX

Positive direction of local X-axis

AREA_NX

Negative direction of local X-axis

AREA_PY

Positive direction of local Y-axis

AREA_NY

Negative direction of local Y-axis

AREA_PZ

Positive direction of local Z-axis

AREA_NZ

Negative direction of local Z-axis

ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL Shows the bottom level of the main part of an assembly. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

This attribute returns the value as text, so you cannot use formulae with this attribute. Use ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED (p. 434) instead. See also

XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS (p. 330)

ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED Shows the unformatted bottom level of the main part of an assembly. Unformatted level returns the bottom levels as a length in mm so you can format them. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

ASSEMBLY_PLWEIGHT Shows the weight of plates attached to an assembly. For other objects it shows a zero.

434





ASSEMBLY_POS Shows the assembly position number. For parts it shows the assembly position number of the assembly that contains the part. For bolts the field is blank.

ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE Shows the assembly position code. The code identifies the grid position.

Assembl y

Code

A/1

A/2

A-B/1

A/3

A/4

A/2

A/6

A-B/1-2

A/7

B/2

TOLERANCE LINE The position code consists of gridline labels in the x and y directions (alternatively in the z direction). If an assembly begins or ends outside the first or last grid line, a < or > character is

www.cadfamily.com




435

included in the position code. For example, if an assembly begins outside the A grid line, this field shows:
Tekla Structures checks the location of the assembly. If it is located inside several grids, Tekla Structures checks whether the assembly is parallel to grid lines or the plane.

3.

If there are several parallel grids, Tekla Structures selects the smallest.

To use the calculation algorithm from versions prior to 6.0, set the variable XS_USE_OLD_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_ALGORITHM.

ASSEMBLY_PREFIX Shows the assembly prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.

ASSEMBLY_SERIAL_NUMBER Shows the assembly number without prefix and separator.

ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL Shows the top level of the main part of an assembly. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

This attribute returns the value as text, so you cannot use formulae with this attribute. Use ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED (p. 436) instead.

See also

XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS (p. 330)

ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED Shows the unformatted top level of the main part of an assembly. Unformatted level returns the top levels as a length in mm so you can format them. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

436





11.5 B BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE Shows the edge distance of a bolt.

BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE_MIN Shows the edge distance multiplied by the coefficient set in the Modeling Editor preferences using the command Tools > Options > Options... > Components.

BOLT_MATERIAL_LENGTH For bolts this field shows the total thickness of the connected material.

BOLT_NPARTS For bolts this field shows the number of connected parts.

BOLT_STANDARD As for TYPE.

BOTTOM_LEVEL Shows the bottom level of a single part, or a cast unit, or an assembly, or a part of a connection. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

This attribute returns the value as text, so you cannot use formulae with this attribute. Use BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED instead.

BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED Shows the unformatted bottom level of a single part, or a cast unit, or an assembly, or a part of a connection. Unformatted level returns the bottom levels as a length in mm so you can format them. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

BUILDER Shows the builder’s name from in the Project properties dialog box.

www.cadfamily.com




437

11.6 C CANTILEVER Shows the length of a protruding part of a profile. Below is an example of a welded box profile:

CAST_UNIT_POS Shows the position of a cast unit. The position consists of a prefix and a number.

CAST_UNIT_POSITION_CODE Shows the position code of a cast unit. The code identifies the grid position. For more information, see ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE.

CAST_UNIT_PREFIX Shows the cast unit prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.

CAST_UNIT_SERIAL_NUMBER Shows the cast unit number without prefix and separator.

CATALOG_NAME Shows the name of a mesh catalog.

CC Shows the center-to-center spacing of evenly-distributed reinforcing bars or a mesh.

CC_CROSS Shows the center-to-center spacing of crossing bars in a reinforcement mesh.

CC_EXACT Shows the center-to-center spacing of a reinforcing bar group or a mesh.

438





CC_EXACT_CROSS Shows all center-to-center spacings of crossing bars in a reinforcement mesh.

CC_EXACT_LONG Shows all center-to-center spacings of longitudinal bars in a reinforcement mesh.

CC_LONG Shows the center-to-center spacing of longitudinal bars in a reinforcement mesh.

CC_MAX Shows the largest center-to-center spacing in reinforcing bar groups or meshes with varied spacing.

CC_MAX_CROSS Shows the largest center-to-center spacing of crossing bars in reinforcement meshes with varied spacing.

CC_MAX_LONG Shows the largest center-to-center spacing of longitudinal bars in reinforcement meshes with varied spacing.

CC_MIN Shows the smallest center-to-center spacing in reinforcing bar groups or meshes with varied spacing.

CC_MIN_CROSS Shows the smallest center-to-center spacing of crossing bars in reinforcement meshes with varied spacing.

CC_MIN_LONG Shows the smallest center-to-center spacing of longitudinal bars in reinforcement meshes with varied spacing.

CLASS Only use to set rules in the Template Editor. It shows the string ASSEMBLY for assemblies, PART for parts, and BOLT for bolts, holes, nuts etc. For drawings it shows DRAWING, and for revisions it shows REVISION.

www.cadfamily.com




439

CLASS_ATTR Shows the attribute class of parts and bolts. For assemblies it shows the attribute class of the assembly main part.

CODE Code for the surface treatment defined in the product_finishes.dat file. For example, TS1

COG_X, COG_Y, COG_Z Shows the coordinates of the center of gravity of assemblies and parts. Cannot be used in headers or footers.

comment User-defined attribute Comment, defined in the object’s user-defined attributes dialog box. For more information on the user-defined attributes in templates and reports, see User-defined attributes in templates (p. 426).

CONNECTED_ASSEMBLIES For bolts this field shows a string containing the position numbers of assemblies of connected parts (e.g. A17 A18 A23). In ASSEMBLY_BOLT lists Tekla Structures does not show the position number of the current assembly. Only use this field as an inquiry command for single bolts. For objects other than bolts the field is blank.

CONNECTED_PARTS Shows a string containing the position numbers of connected parts (e.g. P102 -> P17 P18 P23) for bolts. If the list type is ASSEMBLY_BOLT, the first position number is a member of the current assembly. Only use as an inquiry command for single bolts. For objects other than bolts the field is blank.

CONNECTION_CODE Shows the connection code defined in the connection properties dialog box. Only for use in connection lists.

CONNECTION_DSTV Shows the DSTV code of the connection in connection lists. This field blank if the connection is not a DSTV connection. Only for use in connection lists.

CONNECTION_ERROR Shows the error flag of a connection in connection lists. Only for use in connection lists. The values returned are:

440





• •

1=green connection symbol

•

3=red connection symbol

•

4=connection did not pass design check

2=yellow connection symbol

CONNECTION_GROUP Shows the class of the component, available on the General tab in the component dialog box. Only for use in connection lists.

CONNECTION_NUMBER Shows the number of a connection.

CONNECTION_RUNNING_NUMBER Shows the running number of a connection. All connections are automatically numbered with a running number.

CONTENTTYPE Shows the content type of the current row. For more informaton, see Content type (p. 423).

COVER_AREA Shows the total cover area of the part profile, or of the main part profile in the assembly or cast unit.

CROSS_SECTION_AREA Shows the area (mm2) of a cross section.

CURRENT_PHASE Shows the current active phase. Used for filtering parts. You can also use selection filters.

11.7 D DATE Shows the current date. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is set, the date format is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy. REVISION content type:

www.cadfamily.com




441

In drawing templates this field shows the last revision date. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows the revision history.

DATE_CREATE Shows the creation date of the drawing. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is set, the format of the date is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy. Use this field in part, cast unit, and assembly lists, for the DRAWING content type.

DATE_END Shows the completion date of a project from the Project properties dialog box.

DATE_ISSUE Shows the issue date of the drawing. Use with DRAWING content type.

DATE_LAST In drawing templates this field shows the date of the last revision. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows the entire revision history.

DATE_MODIFY Shows the date of the last changes to the drawing. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is set, the date format is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy. Use in part, cast unit and assembly lists.

DATE_PLOT Shows the date the drawing was last printed. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is set, the date format is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy. Only for use in drawing tables and drawing reports. Use in part, assembly and cast unit lists.

DATE_START Shows the starting date of the project entered in the Project properties dialog box.

DESIGNER Shows the name of the designer in the Project properties dialog box.

DIAMETER Shows the bolt, nut, screw, washer, stud shank, hole or part profile diameter, depending on the content type you use.

442





WASHER content type:

•

The inner diameter of the washer.

NUT content type:

•

The inner diameter of the nut.

SCREW content type:

•

The screw diameter.

STUD content type:

•

The diameter of the stud shank.

DIAMETER_1, DIAMETER_2 Shows the diameters of a tapered profile. Below diameters of parametric profile PD:

DIAMETER_X Shows the length of a slotted hole in the x direction (round hole diameter + LONG_HOLE_X). Use with BOLT, HOLE, NUT and WASHER content types.

DIAMETER_Y Shows the length of a slotted hole in the y direction (round hole diameter + LONG_HOLE_Y). Use with BOLT, HOLE, NUT and WASHER content types.

DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O, DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y Show dimensions of bent reinforcing bars based on the mappings in the rebar_schedule_config.inp file, located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder. These mappings are environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your company or project needs. DIM_TD shows the diameter of the bending cylinder, DIM_R shows the radius. See also

Reinforcement in templates (p. 490) Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469) ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V (p. 431)

www.cadfamily.com




443

DIM_A_MAX ... DIM_G_MAX, DIM_H1_MAX, DIM_H2_MAX, DIM_I_MAX, DIM_J_MAX, DIM_K1_MAX, DIM_K2_MAX, DIM_O_MAX, DIM_R_MAX, DIM_TD_MAX, DIM_X_MAX, DIM_Y_MAX Shows the maximum dimensions of bent reinforcing bars in tapered cross sections. For more information, see the Appendix Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469).

DIM_A_MIN ... DIM_G_MIN, DIM_H1_MIN, DIM_H2_MIN, DIM_I_MIN, DIM_J_MIN, DIM_K1_MIN, DIM_K2_MIN, DIM_O_MIN, DIM_R_MIN, DIM_TD_MIN, DIM_X_MIN, DIM_Y_MIN Shows the minimum dimensions of bent reinforcing bars in tapered cross sections. For more information, see the Appendix Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469).

DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE Shows the default hole size. The default bolt hole size in the bolt mark properties defines the default size of bolt holes. Default sized bolt holes do not have bolt marks in drawings.

DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE Shows the default weld size in the drawing properties. The default weld size in weld properties defines the minimum size of welds to show in drawings.

DR_PART_POS Shows the position number of the drawing main part. Can be used in drawing templates and drawing reports. DR_PART_POS returns attribute PART_POS in all other drawing types, except for the assembly and cast-unit drawings, where it returns ASSEMBLY_POS attribute value.

11.8 E ECCENTRICITY_X, ECCENTRICITY_Y Shows the eccentricity dimensions of a profile. Below the eccentricity x dimension of the RCXX profile:

444





EDGE_FOLD, EDGE_FOLD_1, EDGE_FOLD_2 Shows the edge fold dimensions of a profile. Edge fold dimension 1 and 2 concern unsymmetrical profiles. See the example of a CC profile below:

EDGE_FOLD_1 EDGE_FOLD_2

END_X, END_Y, END_Z Shows the coordinates of the end points used to create a part.

END1_ANGLE_Z Shows the end angle of the first end of a profile in the local z-direction, for parts with crosssection profiles.

END1_ANGLE_Y Shows the end angle of the first end of a profile in the local y-direction, for parts with crosssection profiles.

END2_ANGLE_Z Shows the end angle of the second end of a profile in the local z-direction, for parts with crosssection profiles.

END2_ANGLE_Y Shows the end angle of the second end of the profile in the local y-direction, for parts with crosssection profiles.

END1_CODE, END2_CODE Shows the shape information of the first and second ends of a profile, for parts with cross-section profiles. The options are:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

0 = no operation

•

2 = cut

1 = fitting




445

•

3 = fitting and cut

END1_SKEW, END2_SKEW Shows 1 (INTEGER) if the corresponding end of a part has a skewed cut or fitting and 0 if the end is straight.

11.9 F FATHER_ID Shows the ID of the part that a reinforcement mesh belongs to.

FINISH Shows the final properties of a part defined in the properties dialog box (for example, in the beam properties dialog box). For all other objects the field is blank.

FLANGE_LENGTH_B Shows the total length of the lower flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles as plates.

FLANGE_LENGTH_U Shows the total length of the upper flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles as plates.

FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO Shows the slope ratio of a flange.

FLANGE_THICKNESS Shows the thickness of a flange.

FLANGE_THICKNESS_1, FLANGE_THICKNESS_2 Shows the flange thicknesses of unsymmetrical profiles, such as in unsymmetrical RCDL profile:

446





FLANGE_THICKNESS_B Shows the thickness of the lower flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles as plates.

FLANGE_THICKNESS_U Shows the thickness of the upper flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles as plates.

FLANGE_WIDTH Shows the width of a flange.

FLANGE_WIDTH_1, FLANGE_WIDTH_2 Shows the flange widths of unsymmetrical profiles.

FLANGE_WIDTH_B Shows the width of the lower flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles as plates.

FLANGE_WIDTH_U Shows the width of the upper flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles as plates.

FOLD_ANGLE Shows the fold angle of a profile.

11.10G GRADE Shows the grade of the object. Use with BOLT, NUT, MESH, REBAR, and STUD content types.

GROUP_TYPE Shows the group type of a reinforcing bar:

www.cadfamily.com

• •

Normal = 0

•

Tapered 2 = 2

Tapered = 1




447

•

Tapered curved = 3

•

Tapered N = 4

•

Spiral = 5

GUID Shows GUID, which is a globally unique identifier. For more information, see GUID.

11.11 H HEAD_DIAMETER Shows the diameter of the stud head.

HEAD_THICKNESS Shows the thickness (height) of the stud head.

HEIGHT Shows the height of an object. DRAWING content type:

•

The height of the drawing.

ASSEMBLY content type:

•

The height of the assembly main part for assemblies, parts, and bolts.

PART content type:

•

The height of single-part or assembly drawings. Use in part and assembly lists.

HEIGHT_1 ... 4 Shows the height dimensions of unsymmetrical profiles, such as in RCDX profile below:

HOLE_TOLERANCE Only use in bolt lists. Shows the bolt tolerance. Shows a zero in all other lists.

448





HOOK_START, HOOK_END Shows 1 if there is a hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar, and 0 if there is no hook.

HOOK_START_ANGLE, HOOK_END_ANGLE Shows the angle of the hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar.

HOOK_START_LENGTH, HOOK_END_LENGTH Shows the length of the straight part of the hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar.

HOOK_START_RADIUS, HOOK_END_RADIUS Shows the internal bending radius of the hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar.

11.12I INNER_DIAMETER Shows the inner diameter of an object in the bolt catalog, for example, washers or nuts. Use with BOLT, HOLE, NUT, and WASHER content types.

ID Shows the identification number of an object. Use with all content types.

INFO1, INFO2 Shows the corresponding values in the Project properties dialog box.

IS_POLYBEAM Use to check whether a part is a polybeam. The attribute returns 1 if the part is a polybeam, otherwise it returns 0.

11.13L LAST The last revision number of a drawing (as an integer).

www.cadfamily.com




449

LAST_MARK In drawing templates this field shows the last revision mark. In DRAWING_REV lists, it also shows the entire revision history.

LAST_TEXT1...3 In drawing templates this field shows the text for the last revision. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows the revision history.

LENGTH Shows the length of assemblies, parts, and bolts including cuts and fittings. See also Polybeam length calculation.

LENGTH_GROSS Shows the length of assemblies, parts, and bolts before cuts are made. See also Polybeam length calculation.

LENGTH_MAX Shows the maximum length of a reinforcing bar in a tapered bar group.

LENGTH_MIN Shows the minimum length of a reinforcing bar in a tapered bar group.

LONG_HOLE_X Shows the value from the Slotted hole X field in the Bolt properties dialog box. See also DIAMETER_X.

LONG_HOLE_Y Shows the value from the Slotted hole Y field in the Bolt properties dialog box. See also DIAMETER_Y.

LOT_NUMBER Shows the lot number to which the assembly belongs.

LOT_NAME Shows the name of the lot to which the assembly belongs.

450





11.14M MAJOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2 Shows the major axis length dimensions of a tapered profile. Below d1 is the major axis length 1and d2 is the major axis length 2 in parametric profile EPD.

MARK In drawing templates this field shows the last revision mark. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows the revision history.

MATERIAL Shows the material name for parts. Shows the material of the assembly main part for assemblies. Shows the grade entered in the Bolt assembly catalog dialog box for bolts.

MATERIAL_TYPE Shows the material type (STEEL, CONCRETE, etc) of assemblies or parts.

MESH_POS Shows the position (prefix and running number) of a mesh.

MINOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2 Shows the minor axis length dimensions of a tapered profile. Below r1 is the minor axis length 1and r2 is the minor axis length 2 in parametric profile EPD.

MODEL Shows the name of the model.

MODEL_TOTAL Shows the number of similar objects in a model (i.e. those with the same position number).

www.cadfamily.com




451

MODULUS_OF_ELASTICITY Shows the modulus of elasticity of a material from the material catalog.

MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_X Shows the moment of inertia around the x-x reference axis of a cross section. Moment of inertia is also known as the second moment of area.

MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_Y Shows the moment of inertia around the y-y reference axis of a cross section. Moment of inertia is also known as the second moment of area.

MORTAR_VOLUME Shows the mortar volume used in surface treatment.

11.15N NAME_BASE Shows the drawing name.

NAME_FULL Shows the name of a bolt defined in the bolt catalog, without the standard.

452





For example, in the case of the bolt highlighted in the above dialog box, the NAME_FULL field will show “BOLT20x130-2063”. For objects other than bolts, the field shows a blank.

NAME_SHORT Shows the name of the washer, bolt, nut or screw in a short format. See also NAME_FULL.

NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_X Shows the location of elastic neutral axis.

NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_Y Shows the location of elastic neutral axis.

NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_X Shows the location of plastic neutral axis.

NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_Y Shows the location of plastic neutral axis.

NORMALIZED_WARPING_CONSTANT Shows the warping constant of a profile.

NUMBER#1, NUMBER #2 NUMBER#1 shows the total number of objects on a list. Shows the total number of parts and bolts for one assembly for list types ASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY_BOLT, ASSEMBLY_PART and ASSEMBLY_ALL, if the object is part of an assembly on the list. NUMBER#2 shows the project number as text.

11.16O OBJECT The object field in the Project properties dialog box.

OBJECT_DESCRIPTION Shows the object type and ID. Below examples:

www.cadfamily.com




453

• •

PART 780*380 Id: 227

•

MESH Id: 946

ASSEMBLY Id: 144

OBJECT_LOCKED Shows the status of the user-defined attribute Locked. For more information on this attribute, see Locking objects (p. 76).

OBJECT_TYPE The type of object. The message files contain the translations of these strings (numbers 576 587). The object types are:

• •

POINT

•

JOINT

•

FITTING

•

SCREW

•

ANTI-MATERIAL

•

CUT

•

WELDING

•

ASSEMBLY

•

DRAWING

•

PROJECT

•

OBJECT

PART

OWNER Shows the object owner in format domain/user.

11.17P PAGE The current page number.

PART_POS The position number of parts. Shows a blank cell for all other objects.

454





Shows the mark of assembly main part for assemblies, parts, and bolts. For all other objects the field is blank.

PART_PREFIX Shows the part prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box. For more information on numbering series, see Defining numbers to be used for parts.

PART_SERIAL_NUMBER Shows the part number without the prefix and separator.

PCS Shows the number of bars in a reinforcing bar group.

PHASE The number of the phase to which the object belongs. To show the phase name, use the PHASE.NAME field.

PLASTIC_MODULUS_X Shows the plastic modulus of x-x reference axis of a cross section. Also known as the first moment of area.

PLASTIC_MODULUS_Y Shows the plastic modulus of y-y reference axis of a cross section. Also known as the first moment of area.

PLATE_DENSITY Shows the material density of a plate (kg/m3).

PLATE_THICKNESS Shows the thickness of a plate (mm).

PLOTFILE Shows the name of the drawing plot file. Only for use in drawing tables and drawing reports. See also XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME (p. 331)

www.cadfamily.com




455

POISSONS_RATIO Shows the Poisson’s ratio (analysis property) of material.

POLAR_RADIUS_OF_GYRATION Shows the polar radius of gyration (analysis property) of a profile.

PRELIM_MARK Shows the user-defined attribute Prelim mark. For more information on preliminary marks, see Tools > Numbering > Preliminary marks.

PROFILE Shows the part profile name, or the main part profile name in an assembly or cast unit. You can also show profile attributes in templates and reports: In the Template editor, open the Select attribute dialog box and select PROFILE.* attributes for the selected content type:

For example, MAINPART.PROFILE.HEIGHT with ASSEMBLY content type, shows the height of the main part profile in the assembly.

456





PROFILE_DENSITY Shows the profile density of material (kg/m3).

PROFILE_TYPE The profile type of the part. The default types in Tekla Structures conform to DSTV-NC documentation. They are defined (message numbers 588 - 599) in the message file by_number.ail in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\messages. The table below shows the relationship between messages, profiles in Tekla Structures, and the DSTV-NC profile types defined in messages.

Tekla Structures profiles

Message number

Shows DSTV-NC profile type

I-profiles

589

I

L-profiles

589

L

U-profiles

591

U

Plates

592

B

Round tubes

593

RU

Round bars

594

RO

Square tubes

595

M

CC-profiles

596

C

T-profiles

597

T

Polygon plates

598

B

Folded plates

599

B

Z-profiles and all the other types of profile

590

Z

PROFILE_WEIGHT The weight of a part. For profiles Tekla Structures calculates the weight using the length and weight/m values in the profile catalog. If the weight/m is not defined in the profile catalog, this field works in the same way as WEIGHT_NET, but uses the plate density value (Property weight for plates) from the material catalog instead of profile density.

PROFILE_WEIGHT_NET The net weight of a part. For profiles Tekla Structures calculates the weight using the length and weight/m values in the profile catalog. Line cuts do not affect the length value, which is calculated using the fitted centerline. For all other objects this field works in the same way as WEIGHT_NET.

www.cadfamily.com




457

11.18R RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_X Shows the radius of gyration x (analysis property) of a profile.

RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_Y Shows the radius of gyration y (analysis property) of a profile.

REBAR_POS Shows the position (prefix and the running number) of reinforcing bars.

REFERENCE_MODEL Lists reference models in reports. See also

Reference models (p. 271)

REFERENCE_MODEL_OBJECT Lists reference models objects in reports. See also

Reference model objects (p. 276)

ROUNDING_RADIUS, ROUNDING_RADIUS_1 ... 2 Shows different rounding radii of profiles. Below as an example rounding radius 1 and 2 for a specific I profile:

ROW_IN_PAGE Produces an incremental number starting from 1 at the beginning of each new page. Use in reports and templates. Example

Can be used together with the PAGE field to include page or row information in the drawing template. Set Type to Text and enter the following field definition in the Text field properties: =%PAGE% %/% %ROW_IN_PAGE%

458





11.19S SCALE1...5 Use these fields to show the different scales of drawing views. Decimal values are rounded to the nearest integer. Only for use in drawing tables.

SECTION_MODULUS_X, SECTION_MODULUS_Y Shows section modulus (analysis property) of a profile.

SHAPE Shows the environment-specific bending type of a reinforcing bar.

SHAPE_INTERNAL Shows the internal bending type of Tekla Structures for a reinforcing bar, for example, 2_1.

SHEAR_CENTER_LOCATION Shows the shear center location (analysis property) of a profile.

SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART Returns 1 if the position number of the given part is the same as the position number of the main part in the assembly. To show a main part of an assembly on top of part lists: 1. 2.

In the Template Editor, add value field SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART to PART row. Set the Order to Descending and (if needed) hide the field in output, in the Value Field Properties dialog box.

3.

Drag the SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART field to be first in sort order in the Content browser.

SITE_WORKSHOP For bolts this field shows the assembly type information in a string (Site or Shop). The message files (466 and 467) contain translations of these strings. For studs this field shows the assembly type information in a string (Site or Shop).

SIZE Shows the size of the drawing (e.g. 210x297). Only for use in drawing templates and drawing reports.

www.cadfamily.com




459

SORT_OF_E_x_Cw_PER_G_x_J Shows sqrt(ECw/GJ) analysis property of a profile.

SUPPLEMENT_PART_WEIGHT Shows the weight of supplementary parts. SUPPLEMENT_PART_WEIGHT = the weight of the whole assembly less the weight of the main part. See also WEIGHT.

START_X Shows the coordinates of the creation points of parts.

START_Y See START_X.

START_Z See START_X.

STATICAL_MOMENT_Qf Shows the statical moment of the flange.

STATICAL_MOMENT_Qw Shows the statical moment of the web.

STIFFENER_DIMENSION Shows the stiffener dimension of a profile. See also STIFFENER_DIMENSION_1 ... 3.

STIFFENER_DIMENSION_1 ... 3 Shows the stiffener dimensions of a profile. Below f1 is stiffener dimension 1, f2 is stiffener dimension 2, and f3 is stiffener dimension 3 in parametric profile EZ.

460





STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_1...5 Shows a list of debonded strands. Strand numbers are separated by spaces. STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_2 to row 2, and so on.

STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_1...5 Shows the debonding length from the end of the strands. STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_2 to row 2, and so on.

STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_1...5 Shows the debonding length from the start of the strands. STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_2 to row 2, and

so on.

STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_1...5 Shows the debonding length from the middle to the end of the strands. STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_2 to row 2,

and so on.

STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_1...5 Shows the debonding length from the middle to the start of the strands. STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_2 to

row 2, and so on.

STRAND_N_PATTERN Shows the number of different cross-sections in a strand pattern.

STRAND_N_STRAND Shows the number of strands.

STRAND_POS Shows the position (prefix and running number) of a strand.

www.cadfamily.com




461

STRAND_PULL_FORCE Shows the pull force of a strand.

STRAND_UNBONDED Shows the sequence numbers of debonded strands, seprated by spaces or commas.

SUBTYPE Shows the subtype of a profile.

SURFACING_NAME Shows the name of a sufrace treatment.

11.20T TANGENT_OF_PRINCIPAL_AXIS_ANGLE Shows the tangent of principal axis angle (analysis property) of a profile.

TEXT1...3 In drawing templates this field shows the text for the last revision. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows the revision history.

THERMAL_DILATATION Shows the thermal dilatation coefficient of material.

THREAD_IN_MATERIAL Shows 1 if the thread of the screw can be inside the material to be connected and 0 if not.

TILE_NUMBER Shows the number of tiles used in surface treatment (approximate value).

TILE_VOLUME Shows the volume of tiles used in surface treatment, without the mortar volume. See also MORTAR_VOLUME.

462





TIME Shows the current time (hh:mm:ss).

TITLE Shows the user-defined drawing name. Can also be used for parts and assemblies. For example, you could create a report of assemblies listing which assembly drawings had been created.

TITLE1...3 In reports this field shows the user-defined titles entered in the Report dialog box. In drawing templates this field shows the drawing attributes.

TOP_LEVEL Shows the bottom level of a single part, or a cast unit, or an assembly, or a part of a connection. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

This attribute returns the value as text, so you cannot use formulae with this attribute. Use TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED instead.

TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED Shows the bottom level of a single part, or a cast unit, or an assembly, or a part of a connection. You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.

TORSIONAL_CONSTANT Shows the torsional constant (analysis property) of a profile.

TYPE Shows the object type or standard:

Content type

Description

BOLT

Shows the bolts standard as it appears in the Bolt assembly catalog dialog box (for example, 7968). For all other objects the field is blank.

www.cadfamily.com

DRAWING

Shows the drawing type: A, W, C, G or M.

MESH

Shows the mesh standard.

NUT

Shows the nut standard.




463

Content type

Description

SURFACING

Surface treatment type in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

WASHER

Shows the standard of the washer.

TYPE1 For bolts this field shows the bolt type as the type of each possible bolt part that appears in the Bolt assembly catalog dialog box (e.g. 7968/2041/2041/2041/2067/2067). For objects other than bolts the field is blank.

TYPE2 For bolts this field shows the bolt type as the numbers of existing bolt parts (e.g. 10021). For objects other than bolts the field is blank.

TYPE3 The same as BOLT_TYPE2, but shows X for existing and o for nonexistent bolt parts (for example, XooXX). For objects other than bolts the field shows a blank.

TYPE4 The same as BOLT_TYPE1 but only the existing components are shown in the string.

11.21U USERFIELD_1 ... _8 Shows the value of the user-defined attribute User field 1, User field 2 etc. See also

For more information on the user-defined attributes in templates and reports, see User-defined attributes in templates (p. 426). For more information on user-defined attributes, see User-defined attributes and User-defined attributes in drawings.

11.22V Topics

VOLUME VOLUME_GROSS VOLUME_NET

464





VOLUME Shows the object volume, for example, the volume of an assembly or of a cast unit. Takes holes and cuts into account.

VOLUME_GROSS Shows the object gross volume. Does not take into account holes and cuts.

VOLUME_NET Shows the object volume taking into account holes and cuts.

11.23W WARPING_CONSTANT Shows the warping constant (analysis property) of a profile.

WARPING_STATICAL_MOMENT Shows the warping statical moment (analysis property) of a profile.

WEB_HEIGHT See WEB_WIDTH.

WEB_LENGTH The gross length of the web of an I profile. Use to show welded profiles as plates.

WEB_THICKNESS The thickness of the web of an I profile. Use to show welded profiles as plates.

WEB_THICKNESS_1, WEB_THICKNESS_2 The additional thickness values of the web of a profile.

WEB_WIDTH The width of the web of an I profile. Use to show welded profiles as plates.

www.cadfamily.com




465

WEIGHT Shows the weight of the object. The calculation formula depends on the object type:

•

For parts with cross-sections defined in the profile catalog, the weight is calculated from the cross section area in the profile catalog), length (LENGTH) and density of material (property weight for profiles in the material catalog). The result is the same as calculating WEIGHT_GROSS.

•

For other profiles with no cross sections defined (typically parametric profiles), shows the net weight calculated using the profile volume and density of material. Fittings, cuts, weld preparations, and part adds affect volume calculation.

•

For assemblies, shows the sum of the part weights for each assembly.

•

For bolts, shows the weight of the entire bolt assembly (including washers and nut) in grams.

WEIGHT_GROSS Shows the gross weight, which is the total weight of material needed to fabricate the part. The calculation formula depends on the part:

•

If the part has cross-sections defined in the profile catalog, the weight is calculated from part length (LENGTH), the cross section area in the profile catalog, and the density of material.

•

If the part is a folded or contour plate without a cross section area, the weight is calculated from plate overall height, overall length and density of material (property weight for plates in the material catalog).

•

For other profiles without cross sections (typically parametric profiles), the gross weight is calculated the same way as the WEIGHT_NET, but cuts are not taken into account and the plate density value is used instead of profile density.

•

For assemblies, shows the combined gross weight of parts included in an assembly. For bolts it shows the bolt weight.

WEIGHT_M Shows the property weight of a profile (defined in the material catalog). For parametric profiles, shows the weight of the profile divided by the length. For standard profiles, shows the Weight per unit length from the Analysis properties in the profile catalog.

WEIGHT_MAX Shows the maximum weight of a single reinforcing bar or strand in a tapered bar group.

WEIGHT_MIN Shows the minimum weight of a single reinforcing bar or strand in a tapered bar group.

WEIGHT_NET Shows the weight of the fabricated part, assembly or cast unit. The calculation formula depends on the object:

466





• •

For parts, returns the net weight, which is the actual weight of the fabricated part.

•

For assemblies, returns the sum of part weights.

For bolts, returns the bolt weight, and for other objects a zero.

The calculation is based on part volume and density of material. The density value used in the calculation depends on the profile cross-sections:

•

If cross-section are defined in the profile catalog, density is the Property weight of profiles in the material catalog.

•

If there are no cross-sections, density is the Property weight of plates in the material catalog.

WEIGHT_PER_UNIT_LENGTH Shows the weight per unit length (analysis property) of a profile.

WEIGHT_TOTAL Shows the total weight of all reinforcing bars or of all strands in a reinforcing bar group.

WELD_ANGLE1, WELD_ANGLE2 Shows weld angle for welds above and below line.

WELD_ASSEMBLYTYPE Shows the assembly type of a weld (Site or Shop). Only use in welding lists.

WELD_DEFAULT Shows the default weld size according to the drawing attributes. Only use in drawing tables.

WELD_FATHER_CODE Shows the connection running number of the connection where the weld is located. The field is blank if the weld is not next to a connection. Use only in welding lists.

WELD_FATHER_NUMBER Shows the connection number of the connection where the weld is located. The field is blank if the weld is not next to a connection. Use only in welding lists.

WELD_FILLTYPE1, WELD_FILLTYPE2 Shows the weld contour (None, Flush, Convex, Concave) for welds above and below line.

WELD_FINISH1, WELD_FINISH2 Shows the weld finish for welds above and below line.

www.cadfamily.com




467

WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS Shows the root thickness of a weld and is used only in welding lists.

WELD_SIZE1, WELD_SIZE2 Shows weld size for welds above and below line.

WELD_TEXT Shows the reference text of a weld.

WELD_TYPE1, WELD_TYPE2 Shows weld type for above and below line. See the Weld types.

WIDTH The width of a part or assembly. For drawings, shows the width of the drawing.

WIDTH_1, WIDTH_2 Shows special width values of some profiles. Below parametric profile rectangular hollow section with subtype h1*b1-h2*b2*t, where b1 is width 1 and b2 is width 2.

468





12

Reinforcing bar bending types

Tekla Structures recognizes different reinforcing bar bending shapes and assigns bending type identifiers to them. The table below lists these reinforcing bar bending types. If Tekla Structures does not recognize the shape of a reinforcing bar, it assigns the UNKNOWN bending type to it. The bending type identifiers in the table below are internal, hard-coded types of Tekla Structures. The leg dimensions (D1, D2, etc.) and bending angles (A1, A2, etc.) of reinforcing bars are internal dimensions and angles. You can map internal types, for example, to countryor project-specific types, and internal dimensions and angles to specific template attributes. You do this in the rebar_schedule_config.inp file. See Reinforcement in templates (p. 490). The magenta points in the images represent the points you pick in the model when you create reinforcing bars.

Type

Image

1 2_1

Requires standard bending radius. 2_2

Non-standard bending radius.

www.cadfamily.com



TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 Reinforcing bar bending types

469

Type

Image

3_1

3_2

4

4_2

4_3

4_4

5_1

5_2

470


Reinforcing bar bending EMail:[email protected] types www.cadfamily.com


Type

Image

5_3

6_1

6_2

7

8

8_2 9

Requires 180 degree hook. 10

www.cadfamily.com




471

Type

Image

11

12

13

Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends (i.e. model D1 and D5 using 90 degree hooks). 14

Requires hooks at both ends. 14_2

472




Type

Image

14_3

14_4

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends. 14_5

Recognized if XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to FALSE. 15


www.cadfamily.com




473

Type

Image

16_2

17

18

19

20_1

20_2

474




Type

Image

21

22

23

24

25

26

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends. 27

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

www.cadfamily.com




475

Type

Image

28


Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends. 29_2

29_3

29_4

29_5

476




Type

Image

30





35

Requires 180 degree hook.

www.cadfamily.com




477

Type

Image

36

Requires 180 degree hook. 36_2

Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends. 36_3

Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends. 37

Requires 180 degree hook. 38

Requires 180 degree hook at one end and 90 degree hook at the other end. 38_2

478




Type

Image

39

40




43_2

www.cadfamily.com




479

Type

Image

44




Requires 180 hooks at both ends. 46

Requires hooks at both ends.

480




Type

Image

47




49

www.cadfamily.com




481

Type

Image

49_2

50

Requires hooks at both ends. 51





482




Type

Image

55

56

57

58

59

60

61


www.cadfamily.com




483

Type

Image

61_2

Recognized if XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to FALSE. 61_3


Requires hook. 63

Requires hook. 64


484




Type

Image

64_2




www.cadfamily.com




485

Type

Image

67

67_2

68

69_1

69_2

70_1

486




Type

Image

70_2

71

72

73_1

73_2

73_3

www.cadfamily.com




487

Type

Image

74

75_1

75_2

76

77

488




Type

Image

78

79_1

79_2

80

UNKNOWN

www.cadfamily.com

For example:




489

12.1 Reinforcement in templates Audience

This topic is aimed at Tekla Structures users who need to localize reinforcing bar bending types or to create templates for reinforcing bar bending schedules.

Reinforcement templates

You can show dimensions, bending angles, and bending types of reinforcing bars in drawings and reports by including reinforcement-specific attributes, such as DIM_A, ANG_S, SHAPE, and SHAPE_INTERNAL, in template fields. For more information on creating templates, see the Template Editor (TplEd) online help.

Mapping dimensions

Use the rebar_schedule_config.inp file in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder to map:

•

Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar dimensions and angles with specific template attributes

•

Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar bending types with specific bending types

These mappings are environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your company or project needs. You can use equations, functions, and if statements to calculate the dimensions and angles you need to show. Use any standard text editor (for example, Notepad) to edit the rebar_schedule_config.inp file. Examples

The following example of the rebar_schedule_config.inp file maps the internal bending type 5_1 to the bending type identifier E, and the leg dimensions and bending angles to specific template attributes:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 1) BEND_TYPE_5_1[1]="E" BEND_TYPE_5_1[2]="DIM_A=D1" BEND_TYPE_5_1[3]="DIM_B=D5" BEND_TYPE_5_1[4]="DIM_C=D2" BEND_TYPE_5_1[5]="DIM_TD=TD" BEND_TYPE_5_1[6]="ANG_U=A1" BEND_TYPE_5_1[7]="ANG_V=A2"

With this mapping, the internal bending type 6_2 becomes XY, and the template attributes DIM_B and DIM_C will show the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the second leg D2, and DIM_E and DIM_F the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the fourth leg D4:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 2) BEND_TYPE_6_2[1]="XY" BEND_TYPE_6_2[2]="DIM_A=D1" BEND_TYPE_6_2[3]="DIM_B=D2*COS(A2*PI/ 180)" BEND_TYPE_6_2[4]="DIM_C=D2*SIN(A2*PI/ 180)" BEND_TYPE_6_2[5]="DIM_D=D3" BEND_TYPE_6_2[6]="DIM_E=D4*COS(A1*PI/ 180)" BEND_TYPE_6_2[7]="DIM_F=D4*SIN(A1*PI/ 180)" BEND_TYPE_6_2[8]="DIM_G=D5" BEND_TYPE_6_2[9]="DIM_TD=TD"

490




The following example maps the internal bending type 4 to the bending type identifier A if the dimensions D1 and D3 are the same. Otherwise it maps 4 to B:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 3) BEND_TYPE_4[1]=if (D1==D3) then ("A") else ("B") endif BEND_TYPE_4[2]="DIM_A=D1" BEND_TYPE_4[3]="DIM_B=D2" BEND_TYPE_4[4]="DIM_C=D3" BEND_TYPE_4[5]="DIM_TD=TD"

If Tekla Structures does not recognize a reinforcing bar bending shape, it uses the internal bending type UNKNOWN for it. In the rebar_schedule_config.inp file you can also define how unknown bending types appear in drawings and reports. For example, you may just want to use the bending type identifier ???, and list all leg dimensions and bending angles:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 4) BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[1]="???" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[2]="DIM_A=D1" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[3]="DIM_B=D2" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[4]="DIM_C=D3" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[5]="DIM_D=D4" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[6]="DIM_E=D5" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[7]="DIM_F=D6" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[8]="ANG_S=A1" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[9]="ANG_T=A2" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[10]="ANG_U=A3" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[11]="ANG_V=A4" BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[12]="DIM_TD=TD"

See also

DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O, DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y (p. 443) ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V (p. 431) SHAPE (p. 459) SHAPE_INTERNAL (p. 459) Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469)

www.cadfamily.com




491

Index a

b

access rights ................................................................ 75 adding properties.......................................................... 98 adding user-defined attributes...................................... 98 advanced line type and layer conversion ................... 268 defining your own line type mappings line ............................................................... 268 advanced options ....................................................... 285 ail files .......................................................................... 89 analysis models (CIS) ........................................199, 224 anti-spyware ................................................................. 45 applications ................................................................ 296 ASCII exporting ............................................................. 234 importing .....................................................206, 211 assdb.db....................................................................... 91 asterisk ....................................................................... 308 AutoConnection.......................................................... 151 changing a connection ........................................ 155 connecting built-in members ............................... 313 restrictions........................................................... 153 rules .................................................................... 159 setup ................................................................... 152 tolerance ............................................................. 300 UDL ..................................................................... 300 when to use........................................................... 47 AutoDefaults............................................................... 151 rules .................................................................... 159 setup ................................................................... 156 when to use........................................................... 47 AutoDrawings ............................................................. 113 AutoDrawings wizard files creating ............................................................... 106 automating detailing ..................................................... 45 Autosave ...................................................................... 48 error....................................................................... 50 file location ............................................................ 49 folder ................................................................... 301 keeping files .......................................................... 50 setting interval ....................................................... 49 usernames ............................................................ 50

background color ........................................................301 bak files ........................................................................95 basic view height...................................................................303 horizontal position ...............................................303 vertical position....................................................303 width ....................................................................303 batch file .......................................................................79 beam length................................................................174 bin files .........................................................................90 bolt assemblies...........................................................134 bolt assembly catalog .................................................134 viewing or modifying............................................137 bolt catalog .................................................................134 exporting..............................................................141 importing..............................................................141 importing part of ..................................................144 merging ...............................................................141 modifying .............................................................135 saving ..................................................................137 upgrading to new version ....................................141 viewing ................................................................135 bolt length calculation .................................................146 bolt length rounding ....................................................304 bolt mark contents size ..................................................... 305, 385, 391 bolts catalog.................................................................134 importing catalog .................................................141 importing part of catalog......................................144 length...................................................................146 upgrading catalog to new version........................141 Bus importing..............................................................205 BVBS export ...............................................................240 by_number.ail .............................................................102


www.cadfamily.com



492

c c/c format.................................................................... 307 CAD exporting models................................................. 229 import file types ................................................... 200 importing ............................................................. 200 Calma .................................................................201, 229 catalog export files ..................................................... 143 editing.................................................................. 144 catalogs ........................................................................ 42 a closer look at the export file ............................. 143 bolt and assembly introduction............................ 134 common features and processes ........................ 115 difference between Update and OK .................... 117 editing export files ............................................... 144 for advanced users.............................................. 143 material introduction............................................ 130 overview .............................................................. 115 profile introduction............................................... 117 reinforcing bar introduction.................................. 142 rules in profile catalog ......................................... 118 saving a modified catalog.................................... 116 units used in import and export ........................... 145 which catalog am I using?................................... 116 chamfer accuracy......................................................307, 315 length accuracy ................................................... 307 change symbol ........................................................... 346 changing the language of the user interface .............. 103 changing the NC folder............................................... 173 changing user-defined attributes .................................. 99 checking multi-user databases..................................... 75 CIMsteel database name ................................................... 310 database path ..................................................... 310 exporting analysis models................................... 224 exporting manufacturing models ......................... 226 express file .......................................................... 310 password.....................................................310, 338 CIS exporting analysis models................................... 224 exporting manufacturing models ......................... 226 importing ............................................................. 199 clash check color .................................................................... 311 cloud arc width.............................................................. 296 CNC............................................................................ 167 cnv files ................................................................90, 192

color background..........................................................301 column vertically in drawings ...........................................407 Combining properties .................................................162 component description files ..........................................86 connecting side symbol ..............................................313 Connection Browser ...................................................155 connection properties files..........................................157 accessing ............................................................157 saving ..................................................................157 content type ................................................................423 conversion files CIS examples ......................................................227 creating................................................................192 in..........................................................................192 locating ................................................................193 samples ...............................................................193 troubleshooting....................................................193 where to save ......................................................193 copying multi-user models ..................................................64 creating conversion files....................................................192 cross sections......................................................123 customer-specific initializarion...............................83 NC files................................................................174 Peddimat files......................................................176 shortcuts................................................................83 standard files .......................................................106 cross sections creating................................................................123 deleting from catalog ...........................................125 modifying .............................................................124 customizing...................................................................98 AutoDrawings wizard files ...................................106 connections ...........................................................46 creating standard files .........................................106 interface.................................................................51 message files ......................................................102 modeling................................................................46 other properties files............................................106 parametric profiles...............................................104 properties ..............................................................98 toolbars..................................................................51 user-defined fields in templates...........................100


www.cadfamily.com



493

d dat files .........................................................................86 data files and modeling tools ........................................87 db1................................................................................95 db2................................................................................95 defaults.zxt......................................................... 156, 158 deleting cross sections from catalog .................................125 material grades from catalog ...............................133 unnecessary ..........................................................75 detailing automating.............................................................45 dg files ..........................................................................96 DGN............................................................................271 exporting 3D ........................................................221 supported objects ................................................277 diameter prefix ............................................................304 dimension point change symbol .................................346 dimensions extension origin offset..........................................319 disabling variables ........................................................81 display adaptor optimizing performance .........................................54 dproc files .....................................................................92 drawing files..................................................................73 deleting unnecessary.............................................75 drawing position on screen.........................................333 drawings exporting..............................................................266 in multi-user mode .................................................73 DSTV ................................................................. 174, 202 converting to DXF................................................176 exporting..............................................................223 importing..............................................................203 DSTV connection properties.........................................89 DSTV.bat ....................................................................176 dstv.lis...........................................................................89 DWG ...........................................................................271 DWG/DXF files importing..............................................................199 DXF.............................................................................271 exporting 3D ........................................................219 file size.................................................................346 DXF (NC) ....................................................................175

e ECP ............................................................................234 edge distance ...............................................................43

494

editing catalog export files...............................................144 connection properties ..........................................158 drawings in multi-user mode..................................73 EJE .............................................................................234 ELiPLAN overview...................................................... 216, 263 env_global_default.ini ...................................................81 environment variables see variables..........................................................80 error messages in multi-user mode .................................................65 Eureka LPM importing ..............................................................216 executable.....................................................................91 export basics...................................................................187 overview...............................................................187 export files from catalog .........................................................143 Export rebar BVBS (78) ..................................... 240, 242 Export Unitechnik (79) Data .....................................................................263 Main .....................................................................248 Reinforcement .....................................................259 TS ........................................................................257 Unitechnik configuration ......................................253 exporting 3D ............................................................... 219, 221 ASCII files ............................................................234 bolt catalog ..........................................................141 BVBS ...................................................................238 CAD models.........................................................229 CIMsteel analysis models ....................................224 CIMsteel manufacturing models ..........................226 different................................................................219 different formats...................................................190 drawings ..............................................................266 DSTV ...................................................................223 ELiPLAN ..............................................................264 FEM models.........................................................222 IFC .......................................................................234 materials ..............................................................134 MIS ......................................................................233 model dump .........................................................237 part of profile catalog ...........................................128 profile catalog ......................................................128 SDNF ...................................................................230 STAAD.................................................................222 to..........................................................................219 to other sofware ...................................................190 Unitechnik ............................................................243


www.cadfamily.com



f

h

FabTrol/KISS.............................................................. 233 FEM exporting ............................................................. 222 import file types ................................................... 202 importing ............................................................. 202 yield stress in import ........................................... 205 file types and function................................................... 85 filter in catalogs ........................................................... 116 filtering separator ............................................................. 341 filtering out parts in tables .......................................... 423 firm folder ...............................................................42, 96 fittings affect NC ......................................................... 174 flat bars...............................................................108, 308 designation.......................................................... 403 setting the prefix.................................................. 341 thickness tolerance ............................................. 342 tolerance ............................................................. 342 fltprops.inp.................................................................. 108 folders........................................................................... 92 firm ........................................................................ 97 model .................................................................... 95 project ................................................................... 97 search order .......................................................... 94 structure ................................................................ 93 system................................................................... 96 template ................................................................ 97 font default ................................................................. 316 default font size ................................................... 316 font height ........................................................... 396 for cut symbol...................................................... 315 for dimension....................................................... 319 for DXF................................................................ 338 for grid text .......................................................... 344 for reports............................................................ 373 size in .................................................................. 397 fonts.............................................................................. 91 framing conditions ...................................................... 152

hard ............................................................................181 hidden.........................................................................268 HLI ..................................................................... 201, 229 hole marks size ..................................................... 347, 386, 391 size of slotted holes............................ 353, 386, 392 holes slotted hole dimension.........................................335

g gage format ................................................................ 306 GOL format................................................................. 342 grade .......................................................................... 132 grids overall dimension ................................................ 343

i IFC exporting..............................................................234 import basics ..................................................................187 overview ..............................................................187 import tools .................................................................194 importing ASCII .......................................................... 206, 211 bolt catalog ..........................................................141 Bus ......................................................................205 CAD models ........................................................200 changed objects ..................................................197 CIS ......................................................................199 different formats ......................................... 188, 194 DSTV...................................................................203 DWG/DXF files ....................................................199 ELiPLAN..............................................................217 Eureka LPM.........................................................216 FEM models ........................................................202 from other software .................................... 188, 194 materials..............................................................134 MicasPlus ............................................................216 model dump.........................................................206 models, overview.................................................195 part of bolt catalog...............................................144 profile catalog ......................................................129 profiles from previous versions............................129 re-importing models.............................................197 SDNF...................................................................201 S-Frame ..............................................................216 STAAD ................................................................204 Stan 3d ................................................................204 Steelfab ...............................................................215 inches disabling ..............................................................381 symbol in dimensions ..........................................294 symbol in welds ...................................................294


www.cadfamily.com



495

initialization ............................................................ 80, 81 initialization file..............................................................79 customer-specific initializarion...............................83 including other initialization files ............................83 inp .................................................................................85 interface customizing............................................................51 Iteration.......................................................................163

l lay .................................................................................92 layers in drawings ..........................................................266 legend_text.fields........................................................100 line type mapping........................................................268 line width............................................................ 302, 353 lis files ...........................................................................90 lock attribute .................................................................76 log ...............................................................................113 log files........................................................................110 access part pop-up menu ....................................114 direct access to parts from log.............................114 drawing history ....................................................113 list of ....................................................................110 numbering history ....................................... 111, 113 of CAD import ......................................................200 of SDNF import........................................... 200, 201 viewing.................................................................114

m machine ......................................................................167 macro............................................................................44 maintenance procedures in multi-user mode .................................................74 manufacturing .............................................................167 manufacturing models (CIS) .......................................226 map to...........................................................................91 marks line space ............................................................357 space between elements.....................................355 master models ..............................................................60 saving ....................................................................67 matdb.bin ......................................................................91 material catalog ..........................................................130 viewing or modifying ............................................130 material grades adding to material catalog ...................................132 deleting ................................................................133

496

material types adding to material catalog....................................132 materials adding material grades ........................................132 adding material types...........................................132 adding user-defined attributes .............................131 catalog .................................................................130 deleting material grades ......................................133 exporting and importing .......................................134 of profiles .............................................................119 user-defined symbols...........................................133 matexp_cis.cnv ...........................................................227 menus creating user-defined menu ...................................53 merging bolt catalog ..........................................................141 profile catalog ......................................................128 messages......................................................................89 MicasPlus importing ..............................................................216 MicroSAS ....................................................................222 MIS export file types....................................................233 exporting ..............................................................233 list file extensions.................................................234 model dump exporting ..............................................................237 importing ..............................................................206 modeling in multi-user mode .................................................67 modeling tools when ......................................................................46 modifying bolt assemblies ....................................................137 bolt catalog ..........................................................135 cross sections ......................................................124 material catalog ...................................................130 profile catalog ............................................. 117, 122 Monorail ......................................................................202 moving views on screen ...................................................360 multi-drawings view title ...................................................... 297, 342 multinumbers ..............................................................403 available characters.............................................408 model prefix .........................................................361 number of characters...........................................360 numeric ................................................................405 order ....................................................................395 prefix ....................................................................403 view title ...............................................................362


www.cadfamily.com



multi-user mode............................................................ 57 active multi-users .................................................. 64 autosave................................................................ 62 checking databases .............................................. 75 clearing locks ........................................................ 65 error messages ..................................................... 65 locking models ...................................................... 60 locks for drawings ................................................. 74 maintenance procedures....................................... 74 numbering .......................................................71, 72 overview ................................................................ 57 recommendations.................................................. 66 saving in ..........................................................62, 67 saving model revision comments .......................... 63 system setup ......................................................... 61 when to use........................................................... 58 multi-user models copying.................................................................. 64 shutting down ........................................................ 64 multi-user system ......................................................... 59

n NC .............................................................................. 167 DSTV................................................................... 168 formats ................................................................ 167 NC file classifier.......................................................... 168 NC files creating ............................................................... 174 nc1 files ........................................................................ 96 nesting tasks .............................................................. 186 creating ............................................................... 183 editing.................................................................. 183 nesting................................................................. 185 north mark symbol...................................................... 364 hidden ................................................................. 346 in GA drawings.................................................... 343 scale.................................................................... 364 scale in GA drawings .......................................... 343 numbering controlling access to numbering setup.................. 78 in multi-user mode...........................................71, 72 numbering history....................................................... 111 numbering series.......................................................... 42

o objects.inp .................................................................. 101 fields.................................................................... 102

optimizing performance display adaptor ......................................................54 solid buffer size .....................................................55 solids .....................................................................55 virtual memory.......................................................54 options ..........................................................................43 overlapping series ......................................................113

p parametric profiles ......................................................117 part properties predefining.............................................................46 PDMS .........................................................................232 Peddimat ....................................................................176 Peddimat for DOS ......................................................177 Peddimat for Windows................................................177 Peddimat standard tooling..........................................177 performance .................................................................54 compressing model files......................................403 solid buffer size .....................................................55 permissions ..................................................................75 phases ..........................................................................42 plan...............................................................................60 Plantview ....................................................................201 plate............................................................................183 plotdev.bin ....................................................................92 PML ............................................................................230 polybeam length calculation .......................................306 pop_mark_parts.inp....................................................179 pop-mark settings .......................................................179 pop-marks...................................................................178 Pos1...4 ........................................................................43 position number in SDNF import....................................................201 preferences...................................................................43 prfexp_cis.cnv.............................................................227 printer files ....................................................................92 printing to .........................................................................331 to file....................................................................331 privileges ......................................................................75 privileges.inp.................................................................76 profdb.bin......................................................................91 profile............................................................................90 profile catalog .............................................................117 exporting..............................................................128 exporting part of ..................................................128 importing..............................................................129 merging ...............................................................128 viewing or modifying............................................122


www.cadfamily.com



497

profiles adding to catalog ........................................ 122, 125 adding user-defined attributes to .........................127 catalog .................................................................117 cross section.......................................123, 124, 125 defining material ..................................................119 exporting catalog .................................................128 exporting part of catalog ......................................128 importing catalog .................................................129 importing from previous versions.........................129 merging catalogs .................................................128 parametric............................................................117 standard...............................................................117 types of chamfer ..................................................124 user-defined.........................................................117 viewing or modifying ............................................117 profitab.inp ........................................................... 90, 104 project folder .......................................................... 42, 96 project setup catalogs .................................................................42 drawing properties .................................................48 firm and project folders ..........................................42 layouts and templates............................................48 numbering series ...................................................42 options ...................................................................43 phases ...................................................................42 print devices ..........................................................48 reports and symbols ..............................................48 wizards ..................................................................48 properties adding....................................................................98

r reaction forces ............................................................165 rebar bending types ......................................................469 recording macros ..........................................................44 reference line in drawings ..........................................................330 reference model objects selecting ..................................................... 276, 277 reference models ........................................................271 detecting changes ...............................................273 reference .............................................................377 reference model objects ......................................276 selecting ..................................................... 276, 277 updating...............................................................273 using one model ..................................................271 using several models...........................................272 reference objects ........................................................271

498

reference points size ......................................................................332 reinforcement in templates .........................................................490 reinforcing bar bending ................................................................469 reports of import...............................................................198 on reinforcement..................................................490 revision saving model revision comments...........................63 revision control in import ...............................................................197 rpt files ..........................................................................92 rule groups ..................................................................152 creating ................................................................153 rule sets ......................................................................153 creating ................................................................153 editing ..................................................................154 priority ..................................................................158 rules ............................................................................159 adding to catalog .................................................121 deleting ................................................................121 editing catalog rules.............................................121 working with catalogs...........................................118 rules.zxt.......................................................................155 running macros .............................................................44

s SACS ..........................................................................202 save defaults...............................................................105 saved attributes.............................................................95 saving bolt catalog ..........................................................137 in multi-user mode .......................................... 62, 67 master models .......................................................67 modified catalogs.................................................116 SCIA................................................................... 215, 229 screwdb.db....................................................................91 SDNF ..........................................................................383 exporting ..............................................................230 importing ..............................................................201 log files of import..................................................201 position number in import ....................................201 SDNF (PDMS) ................................................... 201, 230 section.........................................................................380 select filter uses selection filter..................................................48


www.cadfamily.com



selecting objects reference model objects reference models .................................276, 277 S-Frame ..................................................................... 202 importing ............................................................. 216 shear force calculation ............................................... 165 shortcuts creating ................................................................. 83 defining keys reserved ......................................................... 53 reserved .............................................................. 419 shutting down multi-user models.................................. 64 single-user vs multi-user .............................................. 58 slotted hole mark contents size..............................................................386, 392 solid buffer size .......................................................... 392 optimizing performance......................................... 55 STAAD exporting ............................................................. 222 importing ............................................................. 204 Staad .......................................................................... 202 stacked fractions ........................................................ 393 Stan 3d ....................................................................... 202 importing ............................................................. 204 standard files .............................................................. 105 standard profiles......................................................... 117 Steel 2000 .................................................................. 234 Steelfab importing ............................................................. 215 stock sheet specification ............................................ 184 studs........................................................................... 139 sym............................................................................... 91 system folder ................................................................ 96

t table attributes....................................................423, 425 tables attributes ............................................................. 425 filtering parts........................................................ 423 Tekla Structures server ................................................ 59 TeklaStructures.ini........................................................ 81 TeklaStructuresNest................................................... 183 template attributes...................................................... 423 toolbars creating user-defined toolbar ................................ 52 customizing ........................................................... 51 tooling......................................................................... 177 tpl files .......................................................................... 92 twin profile conversion in import ............................................ 192

u UDL ............................................................................165 unfold_corner_ratios.inp .............................................107 unfolding parameters..................................................107 Unitechnik export........................................................244 Unitechnik export refenence.......................................247 units converting............................................................313 in catalog import and export ................................145 updating reference models.................................................273 User Field 1 ..................................................................99 user.ini ................................................................... 80, 81 user-defined attributes adding....................................................................98 adding to material grade......................................131 user-defined profiles ...................................................117 user-defined symbols for materials.........................................................133 usernames....................................................................50 using Tekla Structures effectively.................................41

v variables .....................................................................285 disabling ................................................................81 setting....................................................................80 viewing bolt assemblies....................................................137 bolt catalog ..........................................................135 log files ................................................................114 material catalog ...................................................130 profile catalog ............................................. 117, 122 viewing nesting results ...............................................186 virtual memory optimizing performance .........................................54

w warning messages........................................................45 weld preparation .........................................................323 weld symbols ..............................................................293 wizard files....................................................................92 interpreting ..........................................................106 working models.............................................................60


www.cadfamily.com



499

x

y

XML ................................................................... 201, 232 xsdb.xs..........................................................................95 xslib.db1........................................................................95 xslib.db2........................................................................95 xsr files..........................................................................96

yield stress in FEM import ......................................................205

z zooming original .................................................................339 tolerance ..............................................................370 zxt files ............................................................... 155, 158

500


www.cadfamily.com



Tekla Structure System_Tutorial

Recommend Documents